T3035 Complete User Manual Rev.1

User Manual
Portable Top Drive

HPT-500-2E-AC
RIG/PLANT REFERENCE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION

Atlas T3035 Top Drive HPT-05 500 AC SG TT
ADDITIONAL CODE SDRL CODE TOTAL PGS
8 2 This document contains proprietary and confidential National Oilwell Varco Norway AS
information which belongs to National Oilwell Varco; it is Postboks 401, Lundsiden
REMARKS loaned for limited purposes only and remains the property
of National Oilwell Varco. Reproduction, in whole or in N-4604 Kristiansand
MAIN TAG NUMBER DISCIPLINE part; or use of this design or distribution of this information Norway
to others is not permitted without the express written
consent of National Oilwell Varco. This document is to be
CLIENT PO NUMBER returned to National Oilwell Varco upon request and in Phone +47 38 19 20 00
any event upon completion of the use for which it was Fax +47 38 19 26 04
loaned.
© Copyright National Oilwell Varco - 2011
CLIENT DOCUMENT NUMBER DOCUMENT NUMBER REV
T3035-Z-MA-001 1
Document number T3035-Z-MA-001
Revision 1
Page 3
Table of Contents
1. INTRODUCTION
2. MAIN DATA
3. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
4. PREPARATION
5. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
6. MAINTENANCE
7. SAFETY AND SERVICE BULLETINS
8. SPARE PARTS LIST
9. DATA SHEETS
10. DRAWINGS AND PARTS LISTS

User Manual No.: T3035-Z-MA-001, Rev. 0
Equipment: Portable Top Drive
Page: 1 of 4
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
Chapter 1: Introduction
www.natoil.com
Page: 2 of 4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................... 3
1.1 Portable Top Drive .................................................................................................. 3
1.2 Structure and Contents of Manual .......................................................................... 4
1.3 Contacts for Assistance .......................................................................................... 4
www.natoil.com
Page: 3 of 4
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Portable Top Drive
This user manual describes the National Oilwell TM Portable Top Drive for the
rig/user stated at the document front page.
The objective of the top drive is rotating the drillstring, pipehandling, and passing
drilling mud into the drillstring. Reference is also made to volume 2 of this manual,
which describes the belonging Omron VFD unit.
Typical Top Drive in Test Stand

www.natoil.com
Page: 4 of 4
1.2 Structure and Contents of Manual
The manual is based on Norwegian Standard NS 5820: Supplier's Documentation

of Equipment. It is composed of 10 main chapters that all belong to the same
document. The main chapters are listed after the document front sheet. Each
chapter consists of a front page, table of contents, and then the different sections
making up the chapter. Attachments are separated from the chapters by blue divider
sheets.
1.3 Contacts for Assistance
The below contact information applies for support from National Oilwell Norway AS.
Always refer to the National Oilwell Norway project number (T-number, see the first
part of the manual’s document number) when contacting National Oilwell Norway for
assistance or spare parts.
National Oilwell Norway AS

(Previously Hydralift ASA)
Servicebox 401
N-4604 Kristiansand S
NORWAY
Switchboard phone: +47 381 92000

Service phones: +47 381 92352 and +47 381 92353
Service fax: +47 381 92604
24 hours service phone: +47 381 92482
Spare parts phone: +47 381 92348
Spare parts fax: +47 381 92604
E-mail: [email protected]
Inquiries via e-mail will be handled continuously.
www.natoil.com
Page: 1 of 6
CHAPTER 2
MAIN DATA
Chapter 2: Main Data
www.natoil.com
Page: 2 of 6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2 MAIN DATA ...................................................................................................................... 3

2.1 Safety Summary ..................................................................................................... 3
2.2 Main Data................................................................................................................ 3
2.2.1 Alarm and Setpoint Schedule ...................................................................... 4
2.2.2 Unit Conversions ......................................................................................... 5
2.2.3 Abbreviations............................................................................................... 5
2.3 External Connections.............................................................................................. 5
2.4 Restrictions in Use .................................................................................................. 6
2.5 Restrictions in Guarantee ....................................................................................... 6
www.natoil.com
Page: 3 of 6
2 MAIN DATA
2.1 Safety Summary
The hazards and protective measures (cautions and warnings) applicable to this
equipment are summarised in sections 5.1 (Operating Instructions) and 6.1
(Maintenance).
2.2 Main Data
Equipment: National Oilwell TM Portable Top Drive

Equipment type: HPT-500-2E-AC
Client: Upetrom Group Management SRL

Rig: Atlas
Client main tag no.: None
Supplier’s project no.: T3035

Year of delivery: 2004
Third Party: None
Type of elevator links supplied: 350 tons, 108”
Recommended type of hydr. oil: Texaco Rando HDZ

Required viscosity of hydr. oil: ISO VG 46
Required cleanliness of hydr. oil: NAS 1638, Class 8
Hydr. oil quantity: 60 litres
Hydraulic supply pressure: 250 barg (max)
Gearbox oil type: Texaco Synlube CLP 150

Gearbox oil quantity: 180 litres
Further data: See the Product Data Sheet in chapter 9.
www.natoil.com
Page: 4 of 6
2.2.1 Alarm and Setpoint Schedule
Description Setpoints Increasing Switch Comments

or Pos. No.
Decreasing
Alarm Setpoints
Temp. high in drilling motor 170 ºC Increasing TE001 + Alarm only (no shutdown).
windings (PTC thermistors) TE002 Restarting inhibited.
Gearbox oil temp. high 90 ºC Increasing TT011 Alarm only
Gearbox oil pressure low 0.5 barg Decreasing PS010 Alarm after 30 sec.
HPU temp. high 65 °C Increasing TT013 Alarm only
HPU level low Low level Decreasing LS012 Alarm only
HPU level low-low High level Decreasing LS012 Shutdown of onboard HPU
Other Setpoints
Grabber on 50 barg Decreasing PS008 Switch on light in control
button + provide PLC with
signals for various safety
interlocks.
Link tilt pressure 10 barg Increasing PS006 Inhibit pipehandler rotation

with links kicked out.
Lube oil filter bypass Δp = 2.5 N/A H23 Allows gear oil to pass
barg clogged filter.
Oil cooler bypass Δp = 2.2 N/A H22 Allows gear oil to pass
barg cooler when high visc.
LS pressure settings in Various Increasing H01 See hydraulic flow

main control valve block diagram.
Anti shock valves in main 230 barg Increasing H01 Prevents damaging &
control valve block bursting of hydr. cylinders.
Counter balance valves in Various Increasing H01 Provide intended functions

main control valve block working.
Main control valve safety 280 barg Increasing H01 Hydr. safety feature
valve
www.natoil.com
Page: 5 of 6
2.2.2 Unit Conversions
barg = psig x 0.06895

psig = barg x 14.5038
MPa = barg x 0.1
barg = MPa x 10
bara = bar (absolute)

bard = bar (differential)
barg = bar (gravity)
2.2.3 Abbreviations
AC Alternating current
ACS Anti collision system
CPU Central processing unit (part of PLC)
DCR Drilling control room (= driller’s cabin)
2E Two electrical drilling motors
HPU Hydraulic power unit
IBOP Inline blow-out preventer
LCM Life cycle management
LED Light emitting diode
LER Local equipment room
N.C. Normally closed
N.O. Normally open
NS Norwegian Standard
PLC Programmable logic controller
PPM Parts per million
RPM Revolutions per minute
SD Shutdown
SP Setpoint
TP Terminal point (nozzle)
UPS Uninterrupted power supply
VFD Variable frequency drive (AC drive)
2.3 External Connections
The equipment is externally hooked up as follows:
Electrical connections: See the instrument block diagram.
www.natoil.com
Page: 6 of 6
2.4 Restrictions in Use
Subject equipment must only be used for the prescribed purpose and within the
specified limitations. The operator must be qualified for the task.
Repairs and modifications must not be carried out without prior written approval
from National Oilwell Norway AS, except for the minor corrections that are
described in the maintenance chapter. If such work is carried out by others, National
Oilwell Norway AS procedures for this kind of work must be followed. Lead sealings
must not be broken without written approval from National Oilwell Norway AS. Only
approved materials and original spare parts must be used.
2.5 Restrictions in Guarantee
National Oilwell Norway AS refuse all responsibility caused by breach of the

restrictions described in section 2.4 (above). The guarantee for good performance is
strictly linked to the correct and careful application of the instructions in this user
manual. If, during the warranty period, these restrictions are breached, the
warranty/guarantee shall no longer be valid.
www.natoil.com
Page: 1 of 31
CHAPTER 3
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 3: Technical Description
www.natoil.com
Page: 2 of 31
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................ 3

3.1 General ................................................................................................................... 3
3.2 Overview of Main & Sub Assemblies ...................................................................... 4
3.3 Drive System (Motor and Gearbox) with Accessories............................................. 5
3.3.1 Gearbox....................................................................................................... 6
3.3.2 AC Drilling Motors........................................................................................ 7
3.3.3 Air Brakes.................................................................................................... 8
3.3.4 Motor Cooling System ................................................................................. 9
3.3.5 Suspension System ................................................................................... 10
3.3.6 Weight Compensating System .................................................................. 11
3.3.7 Water Course ............................................................................................ 12
3.3.8 Drill Stem Subs .......................................................................................... 13
3.3.9 Hydraulic Power Unit ................................................................................. 15
3.4 Pipehandler System .............................................................................................. 16
3.4.1 Rotating Head ........................................................................................... 17
3.4.2 Link Hanger ............................................................................................... 18
3.4.3 Link Tilt System ......................................................................................... 19
3.4.4 Torque Column .......................................................................................... 20
3.4.5 Back-up Grabber ....................................................................................... 21
3.4.6 IBOP Actuator ........................................................................................... 22
3.5 Control System ..................................................................................................... 23
3.5.1 Control Station, Incl. AC Drive and PLC .................................................... 23
3.5.2 Operator Control Panel.............................................................................. 25
3.5.3 Service Loop and Interconnection Cables ................................................. 26
3.5.4 Hydraulic Control Valve Unit ...................................................................... 27
3.6 Auxiliary Equipment .............................................................................................. 28
3.6.1 Torque Tube System ................................................................................. 28
3.6.2 Handling and Transport Frame .................................................................. 29
3.7 Supplied by Others ............................................................................................... 30
3.8 Sub-vendor Literature ........................................................................................... 31
www.natoil.com
Page: 3 of 31
3 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
3.1 General
The National Oilwell HPT-500-2E-AC Portable Top Drive (hereafter mostly referred
to by the HPT abbreviation) is a dual motor AC top drive – with special advantages/
features for installation on land rigs and masts. The system includes an onboard
style hydraulic power unit, AC drive control unit and PLC (both installed in a control
house), internal cabling between cabinets and top drive (all with plugs & recept-
acles, and torque tube. The only utilities required are electric power and rig air.
The HPT package is optimized in respect of

minimize rig up / rig down time – as well as give
the drilling contractor the most efficient and
reliable tool available.
Key benefits of the HPT are:
• 16.2 ft stack-up height

• 900 HP
• 40000 ft-lbs drill torque
• 80000 ft breakout torque
• HYDRALLOCKTM Locking Device for
IBOPs
• Long-reach dual-link tilt system
• Onboard style HPU
• Grabber can handle ODs from 4” to 9½”
without replacing inserts.
www.natoil.com
Page: 4 of 31
3.2 Overview of Main & Sub Assemblies
A standard HPT system consists of following main & sub assemblies:
Drive System (Motor and Gearbox with accessories), including:
• Gearbox
• AC Drilling Motors
• Air Brakes
• Motor Cooling System
• Suspension System
• Thread Compensating System
• Water Course
• Drill Stem Subs
• Onboard HPU
Pipehandler, including:
• Rotating Head
• Link Hanger
• Link Tilt System
• Torque Column
• Back-Up Grabber
• IBOP Actuator
Control System, including:
• Control Station incl. AC Drive and PLC

• Operator Control Panel
• Service Loop & Interconnection Cables
• Control Valve Unit
Auxiliary Equipment:
• Torque Tube System

• Handling Cradle
• Special Tools
www.natoil.com
Page: 5 of 31
3.3 Drive System (Motor and Gearbox) with Accessories
The main part of the drive system is the gearbox and the drive/drilling motors, often
known as “the train”.
Upper Part of Top Drive
www.natoil.com
Page: 6 of 31
3.3.1 Gearbox
The Gearbox is designed and manufactured with latest technology in helical cut
gearwheels, dual top & bottom lip seal systems. A housing made of high strength
cast steel supports both the thrust bearing as well as all gearwheels with bearings.
The bull gear is heat shrunken to the main shaft thrust shoulder. A set of springs
provides preloading of both main thrust bearing and axial upward thrust bearing -
ensures safe bearing and prevent shock load on the main thrust through top hole
drilling and jarring. The main shaft is radial supported by two separate radial
bearings. This precise guiding combined with dual lip seals provide optimal life time
for the wash pipe.
A screw pump is fixed to one of the high speed shaft NDE’s providing lubrication to
all gear wheels w/ bearings. A motor support frame is to the top of the gearbox. This
frame combines the function as motor support as well as transferring drilling loads
from motors into the gearbox and to the torque carriage.
Gearbox
www.natoil.com
Page: 7 of 31
3.3.2 AC Drilling Motors
The AC Drilling Motors are fixed to the motor support bracket, and the rotation is
transferred into the gearbox via flexible couplings. A power box located at each
motor is used for termination of the jumper cables between the receptacles (service
loop connection) and the motor leads.
AC Drilling Motor
www.natoil.com
Page: 8 of 31
3.3.3 Air Brakes
The Air Brakes (parking brakes) are fixed to the non-drive end of the drilling motors.
The brake drums have provision for transferring the drilling motor speed to a
tachometer. The 1024-pulse tachometer provides safe operation as well as precise
speed read out.
Air Brake Unit on Top of Drilling Motor
www.natoil.com
Page: 9 of 31
3.3.4 Motor Cooling System
The Motor Cooling System is located above the air brakes. The blowers are made
of stainless steel and have curved forward blades in order to minimize noise,
combined with providing air flow and pressure as necessary for cooling the motors.
Each blower has washable inlet filters.
Oil coolers are mounted to both the drilling motor outlets – providing sufficient
cooling of the gearbox lubrication oil as well as the HPU return oil.
Air Cooling Blowers on Top of Drilling Motors
www.natoil.com
Page: 10 of 31
3.3.5 Suspension System
The Suspension System (bail) is fixed to the gearbox via two bail pins. The upper
contact radius complies with API 8C.
Upper Part of Bail with Weight Compensator Cylinders
www.natoil.com
Page: 11 of 31
3.3.6 Weight Compensating System
The Weight Compensating System is fixed to the bail via two brackets. Two
separate suspension systems consisting of hydraulic cylinders, shackles, chains
and links are fixed between the bail brackets and the ears on the drilling hook. (In
order to be installed together with several types of hooks – or sometimes directly to
a travelling block - the chains are delivered with a certain over-length allowing to be
cut to length as needed from rig to rig.
Weight Compensating System
www.natoil.com
Page: 12 of 31
3.3.7 Water Course
The Water Course consists of the wash pipe and S-pipe system. A standard
National Oilwell wash pipe is used for transferring the drilling mud from the
stationary S-pipe to the rotating main shaft. S-pipe lower end terminates in a
hammer lug female sub.
Wash Pipe and Upper End of S-pipe
www.natoil.com
Page: 13 of 31
3.3.8 Drill Stem Subs
A set of Drill Stem Subs is fixed to the lower end of the main shaft. The set consists
of two identical IBOPs, a saver sub, and a set of HYDRALLOCK locking rings. (The
drill stem sub technical specification is listed on the product data sheet). The
HYDRALLOCK rings consist of 3 sets of locking rings, where each set consists of
two rings with unequal number of locking teeth. As a system these rings provides a
simple, reliable and safe locking method of the drill stem subs through breakout
operations.
A split collar (thrust collar) is located at the lower end of the main shaft. In tripping
operations all loads run from the link hanger via the thrust collar up through the
main shaft – allowing full load rating of the top drive independently of lower sub
connection used.
Hydrallock Locking System Illustration
www.natoil.com
Page: 14 of 31
Hydrallock Locking System Parts
www.natoil.com
Page: 15 of 31
3.3.9 Hydraulic Power Unit
The Hydraulic Power Unit (onboard style) is located on the motor support frame –
between the two drilling motors. An 11 HP electric motor is used as drive for the
power regulated hydraulic pump. The benefit of the power regulated power unit is
allowing a small and compact onboard unit to be used, together with reducing the
noise – due to never producing higher pressure then required by the actual
consumer. The rigid tank is made of stainless steel and is equipped with return filter,
breather, level sensor, and temperature transmitter.
Onboard Hydraulic Power Unit
www.natoil.com
Page: 16 of 31
3.4 Pipehandler System
The top drive is equipped with the most sophisticated pipehandler on the marked.
The link tilt facility has capacity of kicking out the elevator 6 ft (if 108” links are
installed). An ultra high capacity grabber is used for back-up when making up to the
drill string. All ranges from OD 4 ½” to 9” can be torqued-up by utilizing the same
pipehandler kit. The rotating head provides hydraulic flow to consumers while
allowing 360 degrees continuous rotation of the pipehandler. A high capacity locking
cylinder is designed to be engaged both when using the grabber and through drilling
operations
Lower Part of Top Drive
www.natoil.com
Page: 17 of 31
3.4.1 Rotating Head
The Rotating Head provides hydraulic flow to consumers while allowing 360
degrees continuous rotation of the pipehandler. A locking cylinder fixed to the upper
flange of the rotating head is used for preventing rotation of the piehandler through
breakout operations.
The rotation is provided by a hydraulic cylinder fixed to a gear wheel driving the
slew ring bearing. The lower flange has four set of torque pins combined with four
spring packages. These pins are used for transferring pipehandler rotation loads
down to the elevator, while the springs ensure the link hanger to be clear of the
thrust collar while drilling.
Rotating Head before Installation
www.natoil.com
Page: 18 of 31
3.4.2 Link Hanger
The Link Hanger is a cast steel body surrounding the main shaft. API designed &
rated ears allow installation of any standard 350 or 500 tons elevator links.
Link Hanger
www.natoil.com
Page: 19 of 31
3.4.3 Link Tilt System
The Link Tilt System consists of a set of hydraulic cylinders and clamps for fixing to
the elevator links. (Standard clamps fit 350 tons links, while 500 tons clamps are
available as an option). By moving the position of the clamps the operator can
choose maximum forward and/or backward tilt for the elevator. Total fwd/bwd is
limited to approx. 90 degrees.
Link Tilt System

www.natoil.com
Page: 20 of 31
3.4.4 Torque Column
The Torque Column is fixed to the lugs at the rear side of the link hanger. It acts as
a torque arrestor when breaking out connections using drilling motors and grabber.
Fixing holes for the grabber are located at 4 different locations along the column.
Both link tilt cylinders and IBOP actuator interface points are integrated parts of the
column.
Torque Column Sections
www.natoil.com
Page: 21 of 31
3.4.5 Back-up Grabber
The Back-up Grabber is normally fixed to the lowest fixing point on the torque
column. The grabber body is floating on the column sleeve and kept in vertical
positions by two gas springs. A set of vertical keys allows both vertical travelling
combined with transferring torque from the column to the grabber body through
make up & break out sequences. The “horse shoes” like die retainers combined with
long reach clamp cylinders ensure “one kit fits all”. (The grabber grips from OD 4.0
in to 9.5 in without replacing die holders or dies.)
The lower end of the grabber has a rubber funnel providing precise stabbing of
grabber over the drill pipe though insertion of new stands. All hydraulic lines on the
grabber are hidden inside the body. The clean design minimizes any risk of
hydraulic leakages as well as getting objects stuck in the unit.
Backup Grabber
www.natoil.com
Page: 22 of 31
3.4.6 IBOP Actuator
The IBOP Actuator consists of a pneumatic cylinder, a lever arm, and an actuating
sleeve. When the pneumatic cylinder retracts, it moves the lever arm up providing
lifting of the sleeve simultaneously as a key fixed to the remote operated IBOP
rotates 90 degrees and closes the IBOP valve.
IBOP Actuator
www.natoil.com
Page: 23 of 31
3.5 Control System
The Control System includes all electric and hydraulic valves, actuators, sensors,
JBs, monitoring devices, panels, AC drive as needed to remote operate the top
drive in a safe and reliable manner.
3.5.1 Control Station, Incl. AC Drive and PLC
The Control Station, incl. AC Drive and PLC, is the main component of the contriol
system. All panels etc. are mounted inside a compact air temperature controlled
housing. The motor control unit (“Vector Flux” type VFD) and PLC cabinet are
completely wired up inside the housing, and all interface cabling is done via a plug
panel in one of the end walls. The other end wall has a 5 tons air condition unit and
a breaking resistor.
Control Station
www.natoil.com
Page: 24 of 31
Cable Outlets from Control Station
www.natoil.com
Page: 25 of 31
3.5.2 Operator Control Panel
The Operator Control Panel, made of stainless steel, includes all buttons, switches,
gauges, and potentiometers needed for remote control and read out of the top drive
functions. The operator control panel has a stud bolt at each end of the side walls,
allowing installation on a fork type bracket – which allows the panel to be adjusted
to preferable angle.
Operator Control Panel
www.natoil.com
Page: 26 of 31
3.5.3 Service Loop and Interconnection Cables
The Service Loop and Interconnection Cables include all cabling normally required
between:
• Control Station and Operator Control Panel

• Control Panel and Split Point in Mast (# Both power and signal)
• Service Loops between Top Drive and Split Point in Mast (# Both power and
signal)
All cables & service loops are equipped with plugs or receptacles – all as required
for termination between the top drive components.
Service Loop Terminated on Top Drive

www.natoil.com
Page: 27 of 31
3.5.4 Hydraulic Control Valve Unit
The Hydraulic Control Valve Unit is located at rear end, under the gearbox housing.
A support bracket includes the hydraulic and pneumatic control valve blocks,
instrument junction boxes, pressure switches, etc, - all as needed for remote
operate the top drive auxiliary remote operated functions and monitoring.
Hydraulic Control Valves at Rear of Gearbox
www.natoil.com
Page: 28 of 31
3.6 Auxiliary Equipment
3.6.1 Torque Tube System
The torque tube system includes six sections of rectangular profiles, a universal
torque reaction spreader beam kit, and a top suspension beam. The torque tube
system is designed for quick rig-up & rig-down through rig move. The whole system
is designed to be “universal”, which means that the torque tube can be installed in
the major of the masts without need of any mast modification.
A special made “stabbing ramp” (or stab-in cradle) is used to simplify the operation
when putting the torque tube sections together. The cradle is designed to fit the
square opening in the rotary table, and due to the cradle being allowed to swing in
all directions the engagement between the section(s), hanging in the block and the
section parked in the cradle, becomes pretty simple.
Torque Tube
www.natoil.com
Page: 29 of 31
3.6.2 Handling and Transport Frame
The top drive is supplied inside a Handling and Transport Frame. The frame is used
for lifting/handling the Top Drive while it is loaded/unloaded during rig moves, and
while the top drive is handled in and out of the V-door.
Top Drive in Transport Frame
www.natoil.com
Page: 30 of 31
3.7 Supplied by Others
Following items are not included as standard, and must be organized and provide
by Client:
• Power incoming cables

• SCR modification (incl. circuit breaker)
• Mud stand pipe extension
• Mud hose length & coupling size/type to be checked
• Derrick cable kit supports (as needed for supporting & guiding of cable
bundles from derrick termination point to VFD-container.
• Air interface hose (in derrick)
• Support bracket for operator control panel
• Foundation/base “beams” for VFD-container
• Elevator links
• Gear oil for HPT gearbox (approx. 180 litres)
• Hydraulic oil for “onboard” HPU (approx. 60 litres)
www.natoil.com
Page: 31 of 31
3.8 Sub-vendor Literature
The following sub-vendor literature is attached after this sheet:
Attachment: Bondura Bolts 6.6

Electronic file name: Bondura 6.6.doc
Description: Assembly and Maintenance Procedure for Bondura Bolts
6.6 and 6.0 – Offshore.
Total pages: 5
Attachment: Ingersoll-Rand Filter and Lubricator Modules

Electronic file name: HPS air filter and lubricator.pdf
Description: Literature for air filter and air lubricator.
Total pages: 4
Attachment: ITAG Kelly Valve Type TOPGUARD Manual

Electronic file name: ITAG Topguard kelly valves.pdf
Description: Operating and maintenance manual for IBOPs.
Total pages: 24
Attachment: Reliance Electric RPM AC Induction Motors

Electronic file name: Reliance drilling motors.pdf
Description: Installation, operation and maintenance of drilling motors
Total pages: 17
The following literature from the VFD sub-supplier is supplied in volume 2 of this
user manual (separate ring binder):
Attachment: Omron IDM Controls VFD (Top Drive House) Manual

Electronic file name: Multiple pdf files
Description: National Oilwell ref: VFD for HPT T3034.
Omron ref: Hydralift Top Drive House, 600 VAC,
810 Amp, PQ-12878-JG rev. B.
Total pages: 5 chapters i VFD manual
www.natoil.com
BOLT NORGE AS Page 1 of 5
ASSEMBLY AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FOR
BONDURA BOLTS 6.6 and 6.0 - OFFSHORE
Read the instructions carefully!
Bolt Norge AS does not guarantee the product if the assembly and maintenance procedures are not followed.
ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE.
1. Preparations.
1.1 Remove any burr. Clean the support.
1.2 Align the bolt hole. The middle section must line up with the support
on each side. See Fig. 1. Use a jack or hoists if necessary.
If the bolt is hammered into a hole where the bearing and the Fig.1
support does not line up, the bolt may be damaged.
2. Fitting the bolt

2.1 Unscrew the locking plates on the Bondura Bolt and remove the taper
sleeves.
2.2 Fit the bolt in the joint so that the bolt's tapered end is even with the Fig. 2a Correct centring of bolt
outside of the support. See Fig. 2a and 2b.
If the bolt is not centre-aligned, the taper sleeve may bottom out in
the support before the expansion is completed. The bolt will then
be partially loose, and may "cut" the taper screws and lock screws.
For 20-65 mm dia. Bondura:
NOTE! Remember that the locking tab on the bolt must fit
into the slot on the locking plate. See Fig. 3a.
Fig. 2b
3. Fitting taper sleeves Incorrect centring of the bolt results in poor
"wedging force"
3.1 Fit the taper sleeves and fasten the end plates with the plate screws.
When tightening the screws, alternate between the different sides to
ensure that the bolt does not shift. Tighten up with specified torque
(see table). Run the equipment for about one hour and retighten to the Locking tab
correct torque. Retightening after installation is necessary. See
"Maintenance».
In Table 1 you will find the required distance "x" from the taper flange
to the support before the expansion. It also specifies when the taper
sleeve must be replaced with an over-sized taper. In order to prevent
moisture from entering from the outside, you may use O-rings or
sealing compound on the taper sleeve, between the bolt and support.
Fig. 3a Locking of 20-65 mm dia bolt
4. Locking of Bondura Bolt
X O-ring/”marine seals”
The Bondura Bolt does not rotate or slide out because the taper
Locking plate
sleeves expand and result in a "wedging force" between the bolt
and support.
4.1 Use a spacer sleeve between the locking plate and the equipment to
ensure that the locking plate is not bent when tightening the lock
screw.See Fig. 3a and 3b.
4.2 The screws may be secured with "locktite".
Equipment classified as "suspended load" must always be secured T1
with a wire or cotter pin through the hole in the screw heads. Spacer sleeve
4.3 As an extra precaution, the locking plate must be fastened with a lock
Fig. 3b Locking of 70-320 mm dia bolt
screw to the equipment.
C:\Documents and Settings\PettersenK.NOV\Desktop\kladd\T3035\Bondura 6.6.doc 06.12.00 DF No. LD-12-B

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE BONDURA ® 6.6 and 6.0 OFFSHORE ……..continued.
MAINTENANCE OF BONDURA ® 6.6 and 6.0 FOR USE OFFSHORE

Establish procedures for maintenance. This will extend the lifetime of the bolts. Lack of maintenance may result
in the bolts coming loose and sliding out of the bolt hole. If this happens, parts of the bolt or equipment may
fall down.
5. Bondura Bolt lubrication.

Follow the instructions from the vendors regarding type of
Bolt "X" before Min. «X».
grease and frequency. The bolt is lubricated most effectively diameter expansion Switch to
when it is "unloaded", as the weight of the equipment may dia over-sized taper
prevent lubrication of the bearing surfaces of the bolt.
20-40 5 1
45-65 8 4
6. Inspection/retightening.
79-95 9 5
Purpose:
It always takes some time before the bolt and the support is 100-180 9 5
"broken in". The resulting "play" must be absorbed by retightening 200-320 10 6
the screws that holds the taper sleeves in place. Table 1 shows the acceptable distance "x"
When they are retightened, the taper sleeves expand and also between the taper flange and support
absorb wear and ovality in the bolt supports. The taper sleeve
may absorb play of up to 2 mm in diameter. If the play is larger,
you must use an over-sized taper. See Fig. 4.
Check this box for used equipment. You have to take into
consideration the possibility of extra play. Retighten several ”x”=0
times during the first 100 hours, before switching to the
procedures in Item 6b
Maintenance of the Bondura Bolt consists of two

elements:
a) Inspection.
Establish inspection procedures, e.g. every time the bolts are
lubricated.
 That locking plates, taper sleeves and screws are in place.
 That the bolt cannot rotate (intact anti-rotation lock). Fig. 4. Too much play results in no
 That the wire safety is intact. "wedging force". Switch to over-sized
 Check that the bolt has not shifted to one side. taper. "X" is measured between the
 (if this is the case, see Item 1 under Troubleshooting) taper flange and support.
b) Retightening/inspection:
Establish retightening/inspection procedures as specified below.
Equipment Interval
Travelling block / clevis Annually
Bail / top drive link 3 times per year
Other top drive bolts 2 times per year
Dolly 2 times per year Play on
top
Drill string compensator Annually
Pipe handling machinery, cranes Annually
Drawworks Annually
 Check that the distance between the taper flange and support is not
less than the min. "x" stated in the table. The distance between the
taper flange and support must be the same (within approx. 2 mm)
Fig. 5. A heavy load on the bolt
on both sides of the bolt. Normally the play will be the same in
prevents complete tightening.
both supports. Unload the bolt before tightening.

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE BONDURA ® 6.6 and 6.0 OFFSHORE ……..continued.
If you are in doubt as to whether the bolt is centre-aligned, it is possible to unscrew the plate and check the bolt.
If the distance is less than min. "x", the cause may be that:
a) The bolt has shifted to one side.
b) The play in the supports is too great for the taper sleeve (exceeds 2 mm). Switch to over-sized taper.
 Tighten the bolt screws to the specified torque in order to expand the taper sleeves. First "unload" the equipment.
The weight of the equipment may prevent effective tightening. See Fig. 5
7. Troubleshooting.
- If the bolt "rotates" or cuts the lock screws:
* Check that the bolt is properly centre-aligned. See Item 2, Fig. 2
* Tighten the bolt screws in order to expand the taper sleeves.
* Check that the distance between the taper flange and support side is not less than the min. "x" stated in Table 1. If
this is the case, the play in the support is too great for the taper sleeve (exceeds 2 mm). Switch to over-sized taper.
* If the bolt still rotates, it may be that the bearing surface on the bolt or bearing liner is "torn" and must be replaced.
- If there is axial movement in the bolt, and it no longer is centre-aligned in the supports:
* Check that the bolt screws are properly tightened and that the distance "x" between the taper flange and support is
not smaller than stated in Table 1. If necessary, switch to over-sized taper.
8. Disassembly of type 6.6 and 6.0 Bondura Bolts

The equipment must always be unloaded before starting the disassembly.
8.1 Unscrew the locking plate.
8.2 In most cases the tapers may be removed by using a pry bar/chisel between the support and the taper flange. We
recommend using penetrating oil first. In case of large bolt dimensions or problems, use a "taper puller" to pull off
the taper sleeves, see "Pullers».
8.3. In most instances, the bolts will come out easily. Another option is to pull out the bolts by screwing on the locking
plate and using a puller / jack on the locking plate. On larger bolt dimensions or in the event of problems, the bolt
can be pulled out using a hydraulic jack. "Pullers".
Bondura 6.6 dia. 20-65 mm

Item Position
Bolt 4 10 25 34 20 16 4 16 23 26
Taper K6 16
Locking plate 20
Locking side plate 34
Bolt screw 25
Bolt screw 26
Non-locking plate 23
Nipple 10 C1 C2
Lw
1
Bondura 6.6 dia. 70-320
26 20 16 4 16 23 26
Item Position.
Bolt 4
Taper K6 16
Locking plate 20
Bolt screw 26
Non-locking plate 23
Nipple 10 C1 C2
Lw
10
C:\Documents and Settings\PettersenK.NOV\Desktop\kladd\T3035\Bondura 6.6.doc 06.12.00 DF No. LD-12-

B
INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE BONDURA ® 6.6 ……..continued.
Dimensions and data for Bondura type

6.6 and 6.0 Non-locking plate
a
Taper sleeve
Locking plate
b
Plate screws
c
Lock screw
Sleeve
T1
Design 20-65 mm dia. Design 70-130 mm dia. Design 140-320 mm dia.

Plate screws:
dia. 200-320
All locking plates has a hole for through sleeve and lock screw. This is to prevent the locking
plate falling down if anything should happen to the plate screws.
BOLT DIA DIMENSION LOCK SCREW PLATE SCREWS

see dimensioned drawings M
mm a b c T1 Lock screw Torque Spanner gap Plate screw
max dimensions (Nm) NV dimensions
20 37 50 23 23 M10 x 30 40 17 2 x M10
25 - 30 37 50 28 23 M10 x 30 80 19 2 x M12
31.8 - 40 46 63 31 23 M10 x 30 190 24 2 x M16
44.4 - 65 71 113 55 28 M12 x 35 380 30 2 x M20
70 - 80 101 128 61 31 M16 x 40 100 22 6 x M14
85 - 95 101 128 66.5 31 M16 x 40 130 24 6 x M16
100 - 110 133 168 78 40 M20 x 50 190 24 8 x M16
114 - 127 133 168 85.5 43 M20 x 50 380 30 6 x M20
140 - 150 190 245 112 50 M30 x 70 500 36 6 x M24
160 - 180 190 245 120 50 M30 x 70 500 36 8 x M24
200 - 250 264 327 160 63 M36 x 90 500 36 10 x M24
260 - 300 338 416 190 63 M36 x 90 600 46 10 x M30
320 338 416 210 63 M36 x 90 600 46 10 x M30
BOLT
Bondura ® NORGE AS
- For safety's sake et datterselskap i Serigstad AS

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE BONDURA ® 6.6 ……..continued.
STANDARD BONDURABOLT PROGRAM
Bondura ® 6.1 is used where there

is access only from one side,
or limited access on one side. The bolt is
installed from one side. The inner taper
sleeve is tightened via the centre shaft.
Both taper sleeves are tightened
(serviced) from one side.
Bondura ® 6.1 dia. 30-57 Bondura ® 6.1 dia. 60-180 mm
Bondura ® 6.2 is used in non-

fixed joints when one or both supports
are extra wide. This solution is also
used when the bolt cannot protrude
past the support on one side, but
where there is access to tighten the
bolt from both sides.
Bondura ® 6.2 dia. 30-65 Bondura ® 6.2 dia. 70-120 mm
Bondura ® 6.6 fits most bolt

locations in non-fixed joints. The bolt
requires access from both sides in
order to tighten the bolt screws.
Bondura ® 3.6.3.6 has expanding

taper sleeves on both outer and inner Bondura ® 6.6 dia. 20-65 Bondura ® 6.6 dia. 70-320 mm
support, ensuring a fixed connection
also in the middle segment. Examples
of applications for this bolt are in fixed
structural connections such as framed
structures and when joining sections.
It is also used in self-aligning plain
bearings where the bolt is "locked" to
the inner sleeve of the bearing. When
the inner taper sleeves expand during
installation, this ensures that the
bearing does not turn on the bolt Bondura ® 3.6.3.6 dia. 30-80 Bondura ® 3.6.3.6 dia. 90-320 mm
surface.
Bondura ® 3.1 and 3.3 are first

generation expanding bolts. They are
now replaced mainly by 6.1 and 6.6
with the exception of special bolt
positions
Bondura ® 3.3 dia. 30-200 mm Bondura ® 3.1 dia. 60-140 mm

F252XX-XXX RELEASED: 3-22-96
FILTER MODULE REVISED:
(REV. A)
9-24-99
TORQUE TO 18 - 22 IN. LBS. F20
F1
F1
F2
F7
F2
F3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION
F8
F4
Body: Zinc die-cast.
Bowls: Polycarbonate or zinc die-cast.
Bowl Guard: Zinc die-cast.
F4 Sight Glass: Grilamid.
Seals: Nitrile.
F5 Drain: Brass and Nitrile.
F9 Filter Element: Porous polypropylene.
OPERATION CONDITIONS
F10 F11 Q Temperature Range: Poly bowl - 0_ to 125_ F (-18_ to 52_C).
Metal bowl - 0_ to 175_ F (-18_ to 79_C).
Max. Inlet Air Pressure: Poly bowl - 150 p.s.i.g. (10.3 bar)
Metal bowl - 175 p.s.i.g. (12 bar)
Application: Industrial compressed air systems.
Sump Capacity (Filters): 2.87 oz. (85 cc).
Filter Area (Filters): 7.728 in.2 (4986.3 mm2).
Flow: Air flow is at 90 p.s.i.g. (6.2 bar) inlet and 5 p.s.i.g. (0.3
bar) pressure drop.
F14
Q F15 1/4” - 54 scfm
3/8” - 100 scfm
F6 F16
F13 1/2” - 122 scfm
F17
F12 Q F18
F19
Q LUBRICATE WITH KEY LUBE UPON ASSEMBLY.
ITEM DESCRIPTION (SIZE) [INCLUDES] QTY PART NO. ITEM DESCRIPTION (SIZE) [INCLUDES] QTY PART NO.
F1 Filter Base Ć Standard (1) N/A F12 Poly Bowl/Guard Asm. W/Flex Drain [F9ĆF12] (1) 104202I
Filter Base Ć Service Indicator (1) N/A F13 Metal Bowl W/Flex Drain [F9ĆF11,F13] (1) 104206I
F2 Element Holder (Torque to 20 Ć 40 in. lbs) (1) 100029 F14 Metal Bowl W/SĆGlass, FĆDrain [F9ĆF11,F14ĆF19] (1) 104204I
F3 Filter Element, Coalescing (.3 Micron) (1) 100032 jF15 O" Ring (1/16" x 2Ć1/4" o.d.) (1) Y325Ć34
F4 Baffle (hand tighten) (1) 100030 jF16 Sight Glass (1) 100011
F5 Auto Drain Kit [F6] (1) 104068 F17 Shroud (1) 100013
F6 Nut (1) N/A jF18 O" Ring (1/16" x 13/64" o.d.) (2) Y325Ć4
F7 Spinner (1) 100028 F19 Screw (Torque to 15 Ć 20 in. lbs) [F18] (2) 104252Ć1
F8 Filter Element (40 Micron) (1) 100031Ć1 F20 Repair Kit for Service Indicator, Mechanical (1) 104197
Filter Element (5 Micron) (1) 100031Ć3 Manual Drain Kit [F9,F10] (1) 104149
n F9 Drain Stem (1) 29730 n Repair Kit Parts (1) 104176
n F10 Drain Seal (1) 29731 j Sight Glass Kit Parts (1) 104182
n F11 O" Ring (3/32" x 2Ć1/4" o.d.) (1) Y325Ć137 I Filter base is date coded, prior to “892” consult factory.
INGERSOLL-RAND COMPANY
T ONE ARO CENTER D BRYAN, OHIO 43506-0151
& (419) 636-4242 D FAX (419) 633-1674 E1999 D PRINTED IN U.S.A.
OPERATING AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
• Use only genuine ARO replacement parts to assure com- Isolate the unit by closing the line valve or disconnect the sup-
patible pressure rating and performance. ply line or hose.
• Read carefully all warnings and safety precautions and
heed the following before operating, to avoid personal in- WARNING BOWL REMOVAL HAZARD. THE BOWL
jury and/or property damage. MUST BE SECURELY LOCKED INTO POSITION BEFORE
• Be certain anyone operating this equipment has been EXPOSING THE UNIT TO LINE PRESSURE. The bowls are
trained to use it safely. designed with a feature which inhibits removal while under
pressure. When reinstalling, push the bowl up into the body
WARNING COMPONENT RUPTURE. DO NOT EXCEED and rotate to the right 1/8 turn. Failure to lock the bowl could
MAXIMUM RATED OPERATING PRESSURE OF: Metal cause it to blow off, which could result in personal injury or
Bowl - 175 p.s.i. (12 bar), Polycarbonate Bowl - 150 p.s.i. (10 property damage.
bar). To avoid possible damage or personal injury, DO NOT
expose the unit to excessive pressure beyond the intended WARNING DO NOT USE DEGREASERS OR SOLVENTS
working range. TO CLEAN POLYCARBONATE BOWLS. Exposure internal-
ly or externally to incompatible chemicals or their vapors or
WARNING TEMPERATURE LIMITS. DO NOT EXCEED fumes could attack and weaken polycarbonate material,
MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE LIMITS OF: Metal Bowl - 175_ F causing failure.
(79_ C), Polycarbonate Bowl - 125_ F (52_ C). Excessive tem- DO NOT EXPOSE to acetone, trichloroethane, gasolene, al-
perature can affect non-metallic parts which may weaken cohols, keytones, esters, chlorinated hydrocarbons, toluene,
them and cause failure. etc.
Clean polycarbonate bowls with soap and water or kerosene
WARNING USE WITH INDUSTRIAL COMPRESSED AIR only. USE COMPATIBLE LUBRICATING OILS ONLY. Lubri-
SYSTEMS ONLY. DO NOT USE WITH BOTTLED GAS cating oils used in plastic bowls must be compatible with poly-
PRODUCTS OR FLUIDS. MISAPPLICATIONS CAN RE- carbonate plastic (some “fire resistant” oil additives are not
SULT IN COMPONENT FAILURE. compatible). Fumes of these substances in contact with poly-
carbonate bowls internally or externally can also damage the
bowl. Consult Aro catalog or the Aro Corporation, Bryan, Ohio
WARNING DISASSEMBLY HAZARD. DO NOT DISAS- 43506 for comprehensive listings of harmful chemicals and
SEMBLE THIS UNIT WHEN IT IS UNDER PRESSURE. compatible listings of harmful chemicals and compatible lubri-
SHUT OFF AND RELIEVE AIR SUPPLY BEFORE AT- cating oils. If questions arise, request form no. 4424.
TEMPTING SERVICE OR DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURES.
INSTALLATION OPERATION
• Install filters with the air flow as indicated by the arrow on the • Monitor the sediment accumulation.
top of the unit. • If the pressure drop across the filter becomes excessive,
• Install filters as close as possible to the air operated equip- empty the filter bowl, clean or replace the filter element to as-
ment for best performance. sure good performance.
• Filters must be installed with the bowls downward for proper • Clean the filter element periodically. Soak the filter bowl and
operation. clean with soap and water. Refer to warnings concerning poly-
• When using filters featuring the sight glass on the bowl, orient carbonate bowls.
the bowl so it is most visible for the operator.
• Locate the filter upstream from the regulator and lubricator.
MAINTENANCE
• Filters with manual drain must be drained as frequently as
necessary to keep the liquid level below the baffle, which
could cause liquid to be carried downstream.
PN 100400Ć005
2 OF 2 F252XXĆXXX
= L1
= Q L2 LUBRICATOR MODULEL262X1-XXX
RELEASED: 3-22-96
= L3
= Q L5 L4 =
MÓDULO LUBRICADOR REVISED:
(REV. D)
10-27-00
L6 =
MODULE LUBRIFICATEUR
= L7
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
L9 L8 MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION
L11
Body: Zinc dieĆcast.
L10 Bowls: Polycarbonate or zinc dieĆcast.
H L12 Bowl Guard: Zinc dieĆcast.
Sight Cap: Grilamid.
L13 Sight Glass: Grilamid.
L16 Seals: Nitrile.
L14 OPERATION CONDITIONS
L17 Temperature Range: Poly bowl Ć 0_ to 125_ F (Ć18_ to 52_C).
L15 Metal bowl Ć 0_ to 175_ F (Ć18_ to 79_C).
Max. Inlet Air Pressure: Poly bowl Ć 150 p.s.i.g. (10.3 bar).
Metal bowl Ć 175 p.s.i.g. (12 bar).
L18 L19 Q Application: Industrial compressed air systems.
Oil Capacity: 6 oz. (177 ml.).
Flow: Air flow is at 90 p.s.i.g. (6.2 bar) inlet and 10 p.s.i.g. (0.7 bar)
L28 L23 Q
L25
pressure drop.
L29
L27 1/4" Ć 75 scfm
L20 3/8" Ć 100 scfm
1/2" Ć 110 scfm
L21 Q LUBRICATE WITH KEY LUBE UPON ASSEMBLY.
LUBRIQUE CON LUBRICANTE KEY UNA VEZ QUE SE HALLA
L30 MONTADO.
L31 LUBRIFIER AU MOYEN DE KEYLUBE LORS DE
L’ASSEMBLAGE.
Q L33 H GREASE WITH LUBRICATING OIL UPON ASSEMBLY.
L32 ENGRASAR CON ACEITE LUBRICANTE AL MOMENTO DE
L24
L26 Q ENSAMBLARLO.
GRAISSE AVEC HUILE DE LUBRIFICATION DURANT
L’ASSEMBLAGE.
= INCLUDED IN 104226 REPAIR KIT.
SE INCLUYE EN EL JUEGO DE REPARACIÓN 104226.
L22 INCLUSE DANS LA TROUSSE DE RÉPARATION 104226.
I Lubricator base date coded, prior to “892” consult factory.
Q L23 La base del lubricador está cifrada con la fecha, consulte con la fábrica si es previo a “892”.
L24 Base lubrificatrice à code de datation, antérieur à “892”, communiquer avec le fabricant.
L25
Q L26 L27
ITEM DESCRIPTION (Size in Inches) QTY PART NO. ITEM DESCRIPTION (Size in Inches) QTY PART NO.
ELEMENTO Descripción (tamaño en pulgadas) Cant Numero de Pieza ELEMENTO Descripción (tamaño en pulgadas) Cant Numero de Pieza
ARTICLE Description (taille en pouces) Quan Numero de Pieces ARTICLE Description (taille en pouces) Quan Numero de Pieces
L1 Sight Cap (Outer) (Torque to 20 Ć 30 in. lbs) (1) 100046 nL19 O" Ring (3/32" x 2Ć1/4" o.d.) (1) Y325Ć137
nL2 O" Ring (1/16" x 1" o.d.) (1) Y325Ć20 L20 Poly Bowl / Guard Assembly [L19, L20] (1) 104203I
nL3 O" Ring (1/16" x 7/16" o.d.) (1) Y325Ć11 L21 Metal Bowl Not QuickĆFill [L19, L21] (1) 104207I
L4 Adjustment Screw [L5] (1) 104250 L22 Metal Bowl W / Sight Glass [L19, L22 Ć L27] (1) 104205I
nL5 O" Ring (1/16" x 7/32" o.d.) (1) Y325Ć5 jL23 O" Ring (1/16" x 2Ć1/4" o.d.) (1) Y325Ć34
L6 Sight Cap (Inner) (1) 100047 jL24 Sight Glass (1) 100011
nL7 O" Ring (1/16" x 5/8" o.d.) (1) Y325Ć14 L25 Shroud (1) 100013
L8 Plate [L9] (1) 104249 jL26 O" Ring (1/16" x 13/64" o.d.) (2) Y325Ć4
nL9 Compensating Valve (1) 100050 L27 Screw (Torque to 15 Ć 20 in. lbs) [L26] (2) 104252Ć1
nL10 O" Ring (1/16" x 3/4" o.d.) (1) Y325Ć16 L28 Adapter (1) 29619
L11 Fill Plug (Torque to 15 Ć 30 in. lbs) [L12] (1) 104251 L29 O" Ring (1/16" x 13/16" o.d.) (1) Y325Ć17
nL12 O" Ring (1/16" x 11/16" o.d.) (1) Y325Ć15 L30 Metal Bowl W / Sight Glass, QĆFill [L19, L23 Ć L33] (1) 104211I
L13 Lubricator Base (1) N/A L31 Nut (Torque to 30 Ć 40 in. lbs) (1) 29620
L14 Ball (.125" dia.) (1) Y16Ć204 L32 Fitting (QuickĆFill) (1) 29235
L15 Orifice (1) 100053 L33 O" Ring (1/16" x 7/16" o.d.) (1) Y325Ć11
L16 Ball (.125" dia.) (1) Y16Ć204 n Parts in Lubricator Repair Kit 104181
L17 Fitting (1) 100052 j Parts in Sight Glass Repair Kit 104182
L18 Tube (4.375" long) (1) 100063Ć1
INGERSOLL-RAND COMPANY
P.O. BOX 151 D ONE ARO CENTER D BRYAN, OHIO 43506Ć0151
& (419) 636-4242 D FAX (419) 633-1674 E2000 D PRINTED IN U.S.A.
OPERATING AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
• Use only genuine ARO replacement parts to assure compatĆ OFF AND RELIEVE AIR SUPPLY BEFORE ATTEMPTING SERĆ
ible pressure rating and performance. VICE OR DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURES. Isolate the unit by closĆ
• Read carefully all warnings and safety precautions and heed ing the line valve or disconnect the supply line or hose.
the following before operating, to avoid personal injury and/or
property damage. WARNING BOWL REMOVAL HAZARD. THE BOWL MUST
• Be certain anyone operating this equipment has been trained BE SECURELY LOCKED INTO POSITION BEFORE EXPOSING
to use it safely. THE UNIT TO LINE PRESSURE. The bowls are designed with a
feature which inhibits removal while under pressure. When reinstalĆ
WARNING COMPONENT RUPTURE. DO NOT EXCEED ling, push the bowl up into the body and rotate to the right 1/8 turn.
MAXIMUM RATED OPERATING PRESSURE OF: Metal Bowl Ć Failure to lock the bowl could cause it to blow off, which could result
175 p.s.i. (12 bar), Polycarbonate Bowl Ć 150 p.s.i. (10 bar). To in personal injury or property damage.
avoid possible damage or personal injury, DO NOT expose the unit
to excessive pressure beyond the intended working range. WARNING DO NOT USE DEGREASERS OR SOLVENTS TO
CLEAN POLYCARBONATE BOWLS. Exposure internally or exĆ
WARNING TEMPERATURE LIMITS. DO NOT EXCEED MAXĆ ternally to incompatible chemicals or their vapors or fumes could
IMUM TEMPERATURE LIMITS OF: Metal Bowl Ć 175_ F (79_ C), attack and weaken polycarbonate material, causing failure.
Polycarbonate Bowl Ć 125_ F (52_ C). Excessive temperature can DO NOT EXPOSE to acetone, trichloroethane, gasolene, alcohols,
affect nonĆmetallic parts which may weaken them and cause failĆ keytones, esters, chlorinated hydrocarbons, toluene, etc.
ure. Clean polycarbonate bowls with soap and water or kerosene only.
USE COMPATIBLE LUBRICATING OILS ONLY. Lubricating oils
WARNING USE WITH INDUSTRIAL COMPRESSED AIR used in plastic bowls must be compatible with polycarbonate plasĆ
SYSTEMS ONLY. DO NOT USE WITH BOTTLED GAS PRODĆ tic (some fire resistant" oil additives are not compatible). Fumes of
UCTS OR FLUIDS. MISAPPLICATIONS CAN RESULT IN COMĆ these substances in contact with polycarbonate bowls internally or
PONENT FAILURE. externally can also damage the bowl. Consult Aro catalog or the
Aro Corporation, Bryan, Ohio 43506 for comprehensive listings of
WARNING DISASSEMBLY HAZARD. DO NOT DISASĆ harmful chemicals and compatible listings of harmful chemicals
and compatible lubricating oils. If questions arise, request form no.
SEMBLE THIS UNIT WHEN IT IS UNDER PRESSURE. SHUT 4424.
INSTALLATION
• Install lubricators with the air flow as indicated by the arrow on the • Observe the markings (Ć, +) on the lubricator body which shows diĆ
top of the unit. rection. Turn the adjustment screw counterclockwise to increase
• Install lubricators as close as possible to the air operated equipĆ and clockwise to decrease.
ment for best performance.
• Lubricators must be installed with the bowls downward for proper LUBRICATOR ADJUSTMENT:
operation. NOTE: This is a siphon type lubricator design, adjustments need to
• When using lubricators featuring the sight glass on the bowl, orient be made with a constant rate of flow thru the lubricator in an operatĆ
the bowl so it is most visible for the operator. ing mode.
• Locate the lubricator downstream from the regulator and filter. • Use a small screwdriver to adjust the drip rate. The adjustment
screw is located in the sight feed cap on the top of the lubricator.
OPERATION • Determine the average rate of flow (SCFM) thru the lubricator, then
turn the adjustment screw to obtain one drop per minute for each 10
• Use a good grade of nonĆdetergent oil (ARO part # 29665) for use in SCFM. Example: If the average flow is 20 SCFM, set the drip rate at
2 drops per minute.
the air operated equipment. Refer to the air operated equipment
NOTE: The fill plug must be removed to allow removal of the lubriĆ
operator's manual.
NOTE: This lubricator uses a ball check valve located in the lubricaĆ cator bowl or filling of the unit.
tor body to restrict the operating pressure to the bowl and allow reĆ
• Remove the fill plug carefully.
moval of the fill plug. This will permit filling or lubricator bowl
• Fill to the top of the bowl. If the bowl is equipped with a side sight
removal while in the normal operating mode. glass, oil should always be visible in the glass.
PAGE 2 OF 4 L262X1ĆXXX
www.rockwellautomation.com www.ptplace.com www.dodge-pt.com www.reliance.com www.ptplace.ca
Corporate Headquarters
Rockwell Automation, 777 East Wisconsin Avenue, Suite 1400, Milwaukee, WI, 53202-5302 USA, Tel: (1) 414.212.5200, Fax: (1) 414.212.5201
Headquarters for Dodge and Reliance Electric Products

Americas: Rockwell Automation, 6040 Ponders Court, Greenville, SC 29615-4617 USA, Tel: (1) 864.297.4800, Fax: (1) 864.281.2433
Europe/Middle East/Africa: Rockwell Automation, Brühlstraße 22, D-74834 Elztal-Dallau, Germany, Tel: (49) 6261 9410, Fax: (49) 6261 17741
Asia Pacific: Rockwell Automation, 55 Newton Road, #11-01/02 Revenue House, Singapore 307987, Tel: (65) 6356-9077, Fax: (65) 6356-9011
Headquarters for Allen-Bradley Products, Rockwell Software Products and Global Manufacturing Solutions
Americas: Rockwell Automation, 1201 South Second Street, Milwaukee, WI 53204-2496 USA, Tel: (1) 414.382.2000, Fax: (1) 414.382.4444
Europe/Middle East/Africa: Rockwell Automation SA/NV, Vorstlaan/Boulevard du Souverain 36, 1170 Brussels, Belgium, Tel: (32) 2 663 0600, Fax: (32) 2 663 0640
Asia Pacific: Rockwell Automation, 27/F Citicorp Centre, 18 Whitfield Road, Causeway Bay, Hong Kong, Tel: (852) 2887 4788, Fax: (852) 2508 1846
Copyright © 2002 Rockwell Automation. All rights reserved. Printed in USA.
RELIANCE ELECTRIC is a trademark of Rockwell Automation.
Page: 1 of 3
CHAPTER 4
PREPARATION
Chapter 4: Preparation
www.natoil.com
Page: 2 of 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4 PREPARATION ................................................................................................................ 3
4.1 Attached Project Documents................................................................................... 3
www.natoil.com
Page: 3 of 3
4 PREPARATION
4.1 Attached Project Documents
Preparation covers all system activities between completed installation and routine
operation. These activities are also referred to as commissioning or start-up.
The following project documents are attached after this page:
Document title: Handling, Storage and Preservation Procedure

Supplier doc. no.: T3035-Z-KA-002
Supplier revision: 0
Document title: Installation Procedure

Document title: Alignment Procedure

Document title: Commissioning Procedure

www.natoil.com
TECHNICAL DOCUMENT FRONT COVER
Rig / Plant Atlas

Reference T3035
Description
Sub description
Document title Handling, Storage and Preservation Procedure
Portable Top Drive
HPT-500-2E-AC
Code (X) REVIEW STATUS

1 Accepted
2 Accepted, incorporate comments at next scheduled revision Date: (dd.mm.yyyy)
2A Accepted, incorporate comments. Revise and resubmit
Sign:
3 Not accepted, revise and resubmit
4 For information only
0 30.06.2004 Issue for Implementation MAJ KST KST

Revision Date (dd.mm.yyyy) Reason for issue Prepared Checked Approved
This document contains proprietary and confidential information which belongs to National Oilwell Norway AS, it is loaned for limited purposes only and remains the property of National
Oilwell Norway AS. Reproduction, in whole or in part, or use of this design or distribution of this information to others is not permitted without the express written consent of National
Oilwell Norway AS. This document is to be returned to National Oilwell Norway AS upon request and in any event upon completion of the use for which it was loaned.
© Copyright by National Oilwell Norway AS 2004
Client purchase order number Remarks
Area System Discipline Main tag number Total number of pages

13
Sub area Sub system Additional code SDRL codes Design contractor Archive binder
7.3 3035
Client document number Document number Revision
T3035-Z-KA-002 0

Servicebox 401
N-4604 Kristiansand
Norway
Phone +47 38 19 20 00
Telefax +47 38 19 23 11
www.natoil.com
Document number T3035-Z-KA-002
Revision 0
Page 2
CHANGE DESCRIPTION
Revision Change description

0
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................... 4
1.1 Purpose .................................................................................................................. 4
1.2 General ................................................................................................................... 4
1.3 Safety...................................................................................................................... 4
2 HANDLING/LIFTING INSTRUCTIONS............................................................................. 5
2.1 Equipment Needed for Handling Transport Frame & Top Drive.............................. 5
2.2 Handling Instructions for Top Drive......................................................................... 5
2.3 Handling Instructions for Auxiliary Equipment......................................................... 5
2.3.1 Top Drive Lifting Sketches........................................................................... 6
3 PACKING INSTRUCTIONS .............................................................................................. 8
3.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 8
3.2 Packing Requirements............................................................................................ 8
3.3 Types and Methods of Packing............................................................................... 8
3.4 Marking Requirements ............................................................................................ 8
3.5 Packing List............................................................................................................. 9
3.6 Installation period.................................................................................................... 9
4 STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS ........................................................................................... 10
4.1 General ................................................................................................................. 10
4.2 Storage of Mechanical-Hydraulic Equipment ........................................................ 10
4.3 Storage of Electrical and Instrument Equipment ................................................... 10
5 PRESERVATION INSTRUCTIONS ................................................................................ 11
5.1 Prior to Delivery .................................................................................................... 11
5.2 Preservation after Delivery .................................................................................... 12
5.3 De-preservation .................................................................................................... 13
6 ATTACHMENT: PRESERVATION SPECIFICATION & RECORDS .............................. 13
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 4
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is to establish an information base applicable for the
delivery and storage phases of the equipment. These phases involve handling, storage
and preservation of the equipment.
1.2 General
Initial preservation shall be performed short after FAT and before transport.
A copy of the preservation records with initial preservation date shall be attached to the
equipment at start of the preservation period. The updated log file shall be kept by the
preservation responsible.
A preservation label (see behind) shall follow the equipment. This label shall be updated
to reflect last time preservation work
1.3 Safety
This procedure describes how to handle the said equipment and what gear to use for
safe handling. Handling of the equipment involves lifting operations. Only certified lifting
gear shall be used. To avoid any injuring incident to personnel and damage to the
equipment, the lifting procedure described shall be adhered to.
Forklift handling may be used. If heavy equipment is prepared for forklift handling, the
cases or framework is marked where to put the forks. Lighter equipment can be forklift
handled provided that the steel framework is not damaged by the forks; i.e. wooden
bars or similar are put between the steel framework and the forks and
hoses/piping/instruments are protected from squeeze. It is important to comply with the
above instructions to avoid any damage of the equipment by forklift handling.
Personnel trained for handling of heavy equipment is the only personnel that shall be
allowed to enter the lifting operation area. All other personnel shall be kept in a safe
distance. If verbal warnings are not sufficient, the area should be closed off by plastic
band.
Initial preservation, re-preservation and de-preservation may involve usage of solvents

that may be harmful to human. These solvents are only harmful if personnel are
exposed to the solvents for extended periods. Personnel performing this type of work
should be wearing personnel protection equipment.
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 5
2 HANDLING/LIFTING INSTRUCTIONS
2.1 Equipment Needed for Handling Transport Frame & Top Drive
1 off Special designed lifting sling (delivered together with the top drive transport and
handling cradle.
General: Fork lift & cranes as necessary to lifting the lop drive with accessories in/out –
on/off of: vessels, trucks, rig.
WARNING:
USE ONLY THE INTENDED LIFTING GEAR WHEN LIFTING THE TOP DRIVE
HORIZONTALLY IN THE TRANSPORT FRAME.
THE SAME SLING HAS DEVICE FOR LIFTING FROM HORIZONTALLY TO
VERTICALLY – AND LIFTING VERTICALLY.
2.2 Handling Instructions for Top Drive
• Make sure that the top drive is properly bolted to the transport frame
• Inspect all the attaching bolts with respect to correct torque and locking.
• Attach the five-leg sling to the three pad eyes on the top drive plus the remaining two
to the transport frame.
• Lift carefully, make sure that sling do not snag or touch the top drive when lifting.
• Land transport frame on a plane area. Align frame with pieces of wood in each
corner if required.
• Perform inspection of storage protection, preservations and requirements according
to storage instructions.
2.3 Handling Instructions for Auxiliary Equipment
For AC Control Station: Reference is made to instructions in product/component specific

user manuals.
For torque tube, cable drums, service loop, etc.: Use either fork lift or a crane with SWL
capacity higher than the specific item to be handled. (Ref. project specific packing list for
“as built” weights.)
All minor items can be hooked to a typical nylon rope (SWL 2 tons) for safe
lifting/handling
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 6
2.3.1 Top Drive Lifting Sketches
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 7
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 8
3 PACKING INSTRUCTIONS
3.1 Introduction
This general instruction is intended to guide all concerned with regard to the procedures
and minimum standards that are considered necessary for safe carriage of materials,
plus possible storage under extreme open air
3.2 Packing Requirements

All goods are packed to a standard affording protection against modern handling
hazards, and for storage under severe climatic conditions, the latter including exposure
to wind-driven rain and fine dust or sand, with a very high environmental humidity.
The contents of all cases or crates are secured to ensure that their uncontrolled free
movement in any direction within the case is impossible. Care is taken to place heavy
items at the bottom of a crate, and lighter articles nearer the top.
3.3 Types and Methods of Packing
• Special steel cradle for top drive

• Cable drums
• All suitable materials to be palletised.
• Bundling
• All goods are packed to a standard affording protection against modern handling
hazards, and for storage under severe climatic conditions.
• Cardboard/fibreboard cartons consolidated on standard pallets.
• Wooden cases, strapped with two steel bands, secured under tension with the
crimped steel fasteners.
3.4 Marking Requirements

All containers, units, structures, bundles, pallets and wooden cases are to carry
shipping marks. Each piece/case/crate must in addition to the above shipping mark bear
the following information:
• The Project Title.
• The gross and net weight in Kilos.
• The length, width and height in metric units.
• Guidance instructions such as “TOP”, FRAGILE”, and/or “THIS WAY UP” etc.
together with internationally recognised symbols to be painted on all four sides.
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 9
3.5 Packing List

All packages are to be forwarded with a copy of the packing list placed within the unit,
and with a further copy attached to the outside of the case/crate, contained within an
envelope.
3.6 Installation period

The care keeping of the equipment shall continue during installation and after
installation onboard. All the above outlined rules for the storage period shall be
governing for the installation period.
Stainless steel piping, - cable racks, - HVAC ducts, - junction boxes and - control
cabinets shall be protected from weld- and grinding spatter with suitable cloth.
Glass windows in cabins or glass on instrumentation shall be protected from weld

spatter and grinding spatter with glassfibre reinforced aluminium sheet.
Any black steel spatter on stainless steel material shall be removed with suitable
method to avoid pitting corrosion and to re-establish initial surface quality.
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 10
4 STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS
4.1 General
Upon receipt of the equipment, the consignee warehouse staff shall check the
equipment for transport damage. If transport damage is discovered, the consignee
organisation shall within 7 working days write a report back to the supplier, detailing the
extent of the damage.
The consignee organisation shall be solely responsible for the care and treatment of the
equipment during the off-loading, handling and storage period. The consignee
organisation shall furthermore ensure a professional standard of care for the equipment,
which shall be no less than detailed in this procedure.
4.2 Storage of Mechanical-Hydraulic Equipment
Indoors or outdoors storage of the equipment is ticked off on the packing list. If
acceptable to store outside, the equipment shall be supported on beams to avoid
contact with the ground. If the equipment is delivered in a transportation frame, this may
be a suitable support during the storage period.
If suitable, protect the equipment with a tarpaulin against salt spray, dust and grit.
Upon receipt, specially check the equipment interface nozzles for tight plugs and
plugged hydraulic hose ends. Check that unpainted carbon steel areas are preserved
and that the film is intact over the area. The equipment shall be checked for the need of
a re-preservation as described in the preservation section
4.3 Storage of Electrical and Instrument Equipment
Sensitive electrical equipment, installed / placed inside the AC-Control Station is

temporary protected by the preservation as shipped by the supplier. As soon as arriving
destination – and if not installed immediately the heater inside the AC-Control Station
must be energized. Use the10ft extension lead (placed on the wall inside the housing).
This lead has a receptacle in one end that fit the plug panel, while the other end has a
standard 110VAC US-socket.
For all other electrical equipment, the packing list shall reflect the requirement for indoor
storage. The electrical equipment has desiccant inside at time of delivery and will need
attention during storage as outlined in Preservation section and on the check records.
All housings made of stainless steel must be protected from spatter of welding and
grinding. Glass shall be protected. Desiccant shall not be in direct contact with stainless
steel.
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 11
5 PRESERVATION INSTRUCTIONS
5.1 Prior to Delivery

Upon departure from the manufacturer’s workshop the equipment is prepared as
follows:
• AC-Control Station preserved by means of 50ea VCI 132 foam pads.

• All pipes are flushed and cleaned with hydraulic oil.
• Corrosion-preventing Denzo tape (or VCI 368/369)has been used on all
unpainted carbon steel tube fittings.
• Unpainted carbon steel areas has been sprayed with Cortec VCI-368
• Main shaft threads for wash pipe to be sprayed with Cortec VCI-368, and blanked
off.
• Goose neck threads to be sprayed with Cortec VCI-368 and blanked off.
• All API threaded (drill stem components) to be greased with pipe dope or sprayed
with Cortec VCI-368.
• Drain gearbox for gear oil.
• Fill gearbox with 102 (approx. 30 litres) of recommended preservation oil.
• Make sure the gearbox vent plug is replaced by sealing plug.
• Wash pipe assembly to be protected with grease.
Upon receipt, check specially the equipment interface nozzles for tight plugs and
plugged hydraulic hose ends. Check that unpainted carbon steel areas are sprayed with
Cortec
VCI -368, and that the film is intact over the area. The equipment shall be checked for
the need of re-preservation as described in the Preservation chapter.
Check that the Top Drive is clean and dry.
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 12
5.2 Preservation after Delivery
Inspection of Equipment upon Receipt

All equipment is initially preserved from supplier. Upon receipt and before storage in the
next phase, the condition of the preservation shall be checked. If found necessary, a re-
preservation of badly preserved areas shall be done. Use the check records as a guide.
If necessary, the top drive shall be cleaned for dirt and water. The correct preserving
agent is also found on the check records.
The hydraulic piping system on the equipment is flushed and sealed off by supplier. All
open-end nozzles shall remain plugged or capped to avoid ingress of material that can
contaminate the piping and the fluid in the piping. Non-metallic plugs shall not be used.
All hydraulic components are filled with proper hydraulic oil during storage and
transport.
All yellow-chromate materials, as well as valve spindles, are covered with oily Denzo
tape to avoid corrosion. These shall be checked for possible damage of the tape.
The preservation shall be checked periodically. Any anomaly shall be rectified. The
preservation period is described on the check records.
If the storage area location results in salt spray, the equipment should be washed down
with fresh water periodically to reduce the risk of corrosion.
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 13
5.3 De-preservation
De-preservation must be done prior to commissioning start-up. The commissioning

activities comprise preparational checking, functional activities and operational activities.
The preparational checking and functional activities must be performed in the same
phase, but the operational activities may be performed in a later phase than the
functional activities depending on installation completion. If commissioning is performed
during multiple phases, the equipment shall be preserved when functional activities are
completed. Subsequently, de-preservation must be performed prior to commissioning
operational activities.
Normally, handover to operation or client is accomplished short after commissioning
completion. Preservation is normally not repeated in this phase.
Following activities shall be performed to achieve de-preservation: (equipment specific):
• Remove all protection structure and protective cloths.

• Extended cylinder rods to be washed with dissolving agent to remove preservation.
• Remove preservative from all unpainted steel surfaces and flanges.
• Drain preservative oil completely from the gearbox. Re-fill specified gear oil to
correct level.
• Remove denzo tape on all valve spindles necessary.
• Remove denzo tape on el.motor shafts.
• Remove plugs or caps for all open-end nozzles, which shall be available during
operation.
• Sealed drain plugs in panels or boxes to be unsealed if correct installed; vertical
down.
6 ATTACHMENT: PRESERVATION SPECIFICATION & RECORDS
The following attachments (on a single but separate Word file) belong to this document,
and are attached after this sheet:
Preservation Specification & Record – Mechanical/Hydraulic (2 sheets)

Preservation Specification & Record – Electrical/Instrument (2 sheets)
www.natoil.com
Doc. no.: Doc. rev.: Page: Project:
T3035-Z-KA-002 0 1 of 4 ATLAS
Project no: Made by: Approved by: Date: Subject:
T3035 MAJ KST 30.06.04 HANDLING, STORAGE AND PRESERVATION PROCEDURE
PRESERVATION SPECIFICATION & RECORD – MECHANICAL/HYDRAULIC

Record No.: Tag No.: Description:
Record page 1 of 2
D1400-Z-KA-002 HPT
Date/Sign Date/Sign Date/Sign Date/Sign

Activity Intervals Initial
Description of Preservation Activity Preservative Preserved Preserved Preserved Preserved
No.: (Months) Preservation
(2) (3) (4) (5)
All unpainted steel surface and flanges coated with Cortec VCI-
1 3
preservatives 368
Open-end nozzles plugged or capped properly. Nozzle Cortec VCI-
2 3
face coated with preservative 368
All loose items/removed parts preserved, stored and
3 3
marked
4 1 Check that protection structure is undamaged
5 3 All painting undamaged. Unless do repair painting
6 3 Hydraulic system initially filled up with specified oil. Supplied dry
7 3 Gear box added specified preservation oil
8 3 Valve spindles Denzo taped. Denzo tape undamaged. Denzo tape
Comments:
Specified requirements HL/A-4A

Performed by: Accepted by:
and
Date/Sign: ________________________________ Date/Sign: ________________________________
Norsok Standard Z-006
C:\Documents and Settings\PettersenK.NOV\Desktop\kladd\T3035\T3035-Z-KA-002 attachment.doc

T3035-Z-KA-002 0 2 of 4 ATLAS
PRESERVATION SPECIFICATION & RECORD – MECHANICAL / HYDRAULIC

Record page 2 of 2
D1400-Z-KA-002 HPT

(2) (3) (4) (5)
Yellow-chromate steel Denzo taped. Denzo tape
9 3 Denzo tape
undamaged.
Shafts on rotating equipment, which are not locked,
shall be rotated 1 ¼ turn in the rotating direction. New N/A (vertical
10 3
shaft pos. from one turn to the other. motors)
Bearings w/ lub oil , check oil level before turning
11 3 Greased bearings contain adequate grease Grease
12 3 Carbon steel pipe internally preserved Oil filled
Comments:

and

T3035-Z-KA-002 0 3 of 4 ATLAS
PRESERVATION SPECIFICATION & RECORD – ELECTRICAL / INSTRUMENT

Record page 1 of 2
D1400-Z-KA-002 HPT

(2) (3) (4) (5)
1 2 Check that protection structure is undamaged
VpCI-
2 2 All exposed instruments protected against damage.
126/132
All cabinets, panels and boxes exposed to humidity VpCI-
3 2
protected with desiccant. Replace if necessary. 101/110/150
Inspect internals for corrosion and moisture – If so, dry
4 2
up and repair, add desiccant and ensure tight sealings.
All spare cable entrances in panels and boxes plugged.
5 3 If not vertical installed with drain plug down – seal drain
plug.
Open nipples and glands in panels and junction boxes
6 3
to be sealed off.
All non-terminated cable ends fitted with shrinking
7 3
shroud
Gasket in panels or junction box doors to be protected
8 5
with preservatives, if stored outdoors
Stainless steel - remove black steel welding/grinding
9 3
spatter
Shafts on el. motors and mech. seals protected w/ VpCI-
10 3
grease tape. 368/369
Comments:

and

T3035-Z-KA-002 0 4 of 4 ATLAS
PRESERVATION SPECIFICATION & RECORD – ELECTRICAL / INSTRUMENT

Record page 2 of 2
D1400-Z-KA-002 HPT

(2) (3) (4) (5)
Unscrew dust caps on plugs & receptacles and check
11 3 for ingress of water. If any water drain and let the
internal part dry.
Check tightening of all dust caps on plugs &
12 3
receptacles.
Verify that heater inside AC-Control Station is
13 1
energized.
Comments:

and

Rig / Plant Atlas

Reference T3035
Description
Sub description
Document title Installation Procedure
Portable Top Drive
HPT-500-2E-AC

1 Accepted
Sign:


19
7.3 3035
T3035-Z-KA-003 0

Servicebox 401
N-4604 Kristiansand
Norway
Phone +47 38 19 20 00
Telefax +47 38 19 23 11
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 2
CHANGE DESCRIPTION

0
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 4
1.1 Safety Summary ..................................................................................................... 4
1.2 Weights ................................................................................................................... 4
1.3 General Guidelines ................................................................................................. 4
1.4 Installation of Torque Tube ..................................................................................... 5
1.4.1 Figures Describing the Torque Tube Installation: ...................................... 10
1.5 INSTALLATION OF THE TOP DRIVE .................................................................. 16
1.5.1 Equipment Needed for Installation. ........................................................... 16
1.5.2 Initial Steps. ............................................................................................... 17
1.5.3 Installation of Service Loop. ...................................................................... 18
1.5.4 Installation AC-Control Station & Derrick Cabling ...................................... 18
1.5.5 Installation of Drillers Control Panel .......................................................... 19
1.5.6 Completing the top drive............................................................................ 19
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 4
1 GENERAL
This procedure describes correct installation of the National Oilwell Top Drive for the rig
specified at the document front page.
The top drive will be installed inside the mast, suspended in the hook (or block), and
guided by a torque tube. The torque tube is also used to transfer the torque reaction
forces from the top drive into the lower end of the rear mast legs.
The torque tube must is normally installed first, and after a rough alignment, the top
drive can be installed. Thereafter a fine alignment of the torque tube and top drive must
be carried out. These operations are described below in logical order.
1.1 Safety Summary
Before the installation, the person in charge shall conduct a safety briefing for all
involved personnel. The installation procedure shall be examined, and measures agreed
to prevent or minimise any identified hazards. Make sure that the capacity of all lifting
gear and appliances are certified for the specified loads, and that all involved personnel
are professional and qualified for their part of the job.
1.2 Weights
The lifting operations will be carried out by suitable onsite lifting appliances, such as
crane hoist, utility winches, and the drawworks. The weights of the main parts are:
Top suspension beam: 650 kg (1450 lbs)

Torque tube, per section (6 off): 850 kg (1870 lbs)
Torque transfer beam: 1750 kg (3860 lbs)
Stabbing ramp: 250 kg (550 lbs)
Top drive (incl. cradle): 14500 kg (32000 lbs)
Top drive’s transport frame: 1200 kg (2650 lbs)
1.3 General Guidelines
The following general guidelines must be observed during the installation:
• All bolts and nuts must be clean and greased before installation.
• All bolts/nuts must be tightened to the torque specified in the assembly drawings.
• All bolts/nuts must be secured by locking wire or split pins.
• Proper installation is vital for safe torque transmission into the derrick.
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 5
1.4 Installation of Torque Tube
See principal sketches enclosed to this document how the torque tube may be installed.
For assemble drawings & parts list: See chapter 10
This section describes how to install the top drive’s torque tube inside the derrick. An
overall view of the torque tube is shown at the torque tube assembly drawing. The parts
supplied for the installation are those identified by position numbers in the above listed
drawings. All drawings referred to are enclosed in chapter 10 of the user manual,
together with the belonging parts lists.
The overall torque tube is (from the top) composed of the top suspension beam, six
vertical torque tube sections, and at the bottom the horizontal torque transfer beam. In
addition a supplied stabbing ramp can be used for simplify the joining of the vertical
sections. The ramp is designed to a standard API rotary table opening and is designed
to replace the master bushing when installation of the torque tube.
The vertical torque tube sections must be joined one on the other. They are all marked
and numbered from 1 to 6, with number 1 at the top. The upper (box) end of each
section has a hole for the bolt for the stabbing ramp. Through the joining of the sections,
make sure the pad eyes at the backside of the vertical sections points “away from the
well centre”.
The lifting operations must be carried out by suitable onsite lifting appliances, such as
crane hoist, utility winches, and the drawwork.
Install the torque tube and accessories as follows:
• On the drill floor, draw a circle with a radius of 720 mm (28 3/8”) around the well
centre, at the sector where the top drive will be installed. (The torque tube will be
tangent to this circle). Then draw a torque tube outline rectangle, tangent to the
circle, above which the rectangular torque tube will be installed.
• Torque transfer beam: Use a crane and hoist the torque transfer beam up to a
suitable height outside at the drawwork side of the mast. Clamp the torque transfer
beam to the mast legs at an elevation and orientation that matches the torque tube.
The horizontal beam will later be connected to the rear side of the vertical torque
tube’s lowest section, via an adjustable and horizontal reaction tube piece. See
illustration. The beam is normally installed 10 to15ft above drill floor level.
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 6
Torque Transfer Beam Connection to Torque Tube
Clamp at End of Torque Transfer Beam
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 7
• Top suspension beam: Install the top suspension beam to the underside of the
crown beams / water table. The centre of the suspension beam must be placed
exactly 820mm (33 7/24”) rear of the centre line well.
The top suspension beam can be fixed by either:
- Drilling holes in crown/water table beams and use bolts & nuts (delivered with
the top beam) for suspending the top suspension beam to the crown/water
table lower beam flanges.
- Make arrangement needed for using the accompanying threaded bars and
back-up plates.
- Welding the top suspension beam to the underside of the crown/water table
lower beam flanges.
- Make a lug equal to the one on the top suspension flange and weld this as
applicable to the underside of the crown/water table.
Make sure the two shackles are fixed to the lug prior to start joining / lifting of the
vertical sections.
Upper Suspension Beam and Connection to Torque Tube Section 1
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 8
• Stabbing ramp: Remove the master bushing from the rotary table and put the
stabbing ramp in instead. Unscrew & pull out the centre bolt.
• Torque tube: Hoist torque tube section 2 (number two from the top) to vertical
position inside the mast. Push the section to align with the stabbing ramp. Lower the
section until the dedicated hole is aligned with the central bolt hole in the ramp. Then
lock the section to the ramp by reinserting the bolt. Disconnect and withdraw the
winch wire.
• Bring torque tube section 1 (top section) into the mast # Hoist it vertically up in
position above the parked section in the ramp. Lower and stab in section 2 on
section 1. Fix section 1 to section 2 by the four bolts. Make sure all bolts are
tightened to specified torque.
• Install safety chains between section 1 and 2.
Stab-In using the ramp.
• Carefully hoist the joined sections, until the ramp’s central bolt is unloaded, remove
the bolt, and continue hosting until the lower end of section 2 is slightly above the
stabbing ramp.
• Pull the two sections backwards / clear of the centre line ramp.
• Bring torque tube section 3 into the mast and lower it down into the stab-in ramp.
When lowered to correct level – install bolt and disconnect the lifting sling.
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 9
• Hoist the joined sections (1 & 2) vertically up in position above the parked section in
the ramp. Lower and stab in the joined sections into section 3. Fix sections by the
four bolts (M01-M04). Make sure all bolts are tightened to specified torque.
• Repeat for section 4 and 5.
• Unload the joined sections on drill floor at the position as marked in step 1.
• Hoist/lower the travelling block to a level 4-8ft below the top of section 1. Use a lifting
sling for hooking the torque tube to the backside of the block/hook
• Bring torque tube bottom section into the mast and lower it down into the stab-in
ramp. When lowered to correct level – install bolt and disconnect the lifting sling.
• Hoist the joined sections (1 -5) vertically up in position above the parked section in
the ramp. Pull the assembled/joined sections to align with the parked bottom section.
(The ramp allows lower section to lilt as required for obtain alignment). Lower and
stab in the joined sections into section 3. Fix sections by the four bolts. Make sure all
bolts are tightened to specified torque
• Carefully hoist the complete assembled sections up until the lifting eye on top of
section 1 can be fixed to the top suspension beam shackle. (If need - pull the lower
end of the torque tube out for accession of lug/shackle.
• Shackle the torque tube properly to the top suspension beam.
• Slack off and allow the torque tube to be tilted to straight-down position, hanging in
the top suspension beam.
• Check that the tube is hanging right above the previously drawn drill floor rectangle,
and that its lower end is suitably above the drill floor.
• Secure the tube by suitable ropes, until it can be fixed to the torque transfer beam.
• Install the loose reaction tube parts to the lowest torque tube section, as shown in
illustration.
• Connect the torque transfer beam to the lowest torque tube section via the reaction
tube. Adjust the reaction tube and transfer beam as required to fix the torque tube at
approximately correct position.
• Remove the stabbing ramp from the rotary table.
• Further aligning to be done after the top drive is suspended in the travelling block /
hook and released from the transport cradle.
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 10
1.4.1 Figures Describing the Torque Tube Installation:
Step 1: Installation of torque transverse beam.
Step 2: Top suspension beam mounted to crown/water table
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 11
Step 3: Stab-In cradle/ramp placed in rotary table
Step 4: Section 2 parked in stab-in cradle while top section is prepared to be lifted.
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 12
Step 5: Top section being stabbed & joined with section 2.
Step 6: Sections joined, bolts tightened and security chain mounted.
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 13
Step 7: Hook/Block used for lifting a stack of torque tube sections.
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 14
Step 8: Torque tube stack being connected to top suspension beam
Step 9: Lower section being connected to torque transfer beam.
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 15
Step 10: Torque tube installation completed, and top drive installation started.
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 16
1.5 INSTALLATION OF THE TOP DRIVE
The top drive is transported in horizontal position inside its transport frame. The frame is
for transport protection only. See lifting instruction in the “Handling Preservation & Lifting
Procedure” for how to handle/lifting the top drive. The frame remains on while the top
drive is erected to vertical position inside the derrick.
1.5.1 Equipment Needed for Installation.
Client/user is supposed to provide the required lifting and handling equipment for
erection and installation of the top drive inside the mast. Additionally various tools,
lubricants and oils are required in order to fulfil the installation.
• Rig crane, with extension wire from main hook, for tailing top drivel through V-door.
• Utility winches, chain lifts, sling, shackles and ropes for controlling top drive when
lifted out of transport frame, and for removal of empty frame.
• Pup joint, sub or a piece of drill pipe.
• Slips, size corresponding to pup joint size.
• Pieces of wood, for landing saver sub on rotary table.
• Pipe dope
• Grease for assembly purposes.
• Torque Wrench
• Various hand tools
• Various grip straps / straps/ hang-off device for cables
• Gear Oil
• Hydraulic Oil
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 17
1.5.2 Initial Steps.
.
• Lift the transport frame with the top drive into drill floor by a mobile crane. Place the
top drive in cradle horizontally on the drill floor.
• Disconnect the lifting sling from the crane.
• Disconnect the centre pair and balancing wire/sling pairs from the top drive & cradle.
(Only single line attached to the top rotating yoke to remain connected).
• Attach lifting sling to the hook/block.
• Carefully hoist the top drive from horizontally to vertical by lifting through the single
sling.
• When hoisted to vertical – rotate the unit 180 degrees so the wheels are facing the
torque tube.
• Check that the wheel brackets are fully extended.
• Carefully manipulate the top drive until the wheels are matching the torque tube.
• Retract the wheels brackets and slightly tighten the bolt.
Wheel Brackets Extended Wheel Brackets Retracted
• Land the top drive & cradle on the floor.

• Loosen bolts and swing the oil cooler to allow hook / clevis to be manipulated under
the bail.
• Lower the block and carefully manipulate the hook/clevis under the bail and secure
the connection.
• Loosen the cradle from the top drive.
• Carefully hoist the block & top drive and remove the cradle from the drill floor.
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 18
1.5.3 Installation of Service Loop.
• Suspend the service loop termination bracket at level 80-85ft above drill floor.
• Unscrew the locking clamp halves from the top drive + derrick termination brackets.
• Bring the signal umbilical / service loop to drill floor.
• Connect a tugger winch to the derrick end grip strap. Carefully hoist the umbilical out
of the box/drum until the whole length of the umbilical is lifted clear of the box. Make
sure all potential twisting is released.
• Carefully lower the umbilical simultaneously as the lower end is guide along the drill
floor. Continue lowering until the flange can be pulled into the matching groove in the
derrick termination bracket.
• Connect clamp and release & disconnect the shackle from the grip strap.
• Connect the tugger winch to the top drive end grip strap.
• Hoist the umbilical to level for manipulating the flange into the matching groove in
the top drive termination bracket.
• Repeat for power loop/umbilical.
• Connect the air hose to air supply (must be available at racking board level).
1.5.4 Installation AC-Control Station & Derrick Cabling
• Provide a couple of H-beams and make a base plate for the housing. The AC-
Control Station is recommended to be placed next to the SCR House – with plug
panels facing the same direction.
• Bring the power derrick umbilical to the back side of the mast. Connect a lifting
device (mobile crane or winch) the grip strap at derrick end/side of the umbilical and
hoist the umbilical up to a suitable level for suspending the loop. When suspended to
the mast – release and unhook the lifting device from the grip strap.
• Use straps at appropriate locations of lower end of the umbilical and lift/guide the
umbilical towards the AC-Control Station plug panel.
• (If the umbilical/cable shall be routed along the main deck & down the cable tray –
new & additional cable supports/trays may be installed first).
• Use ropes (and if available) grip straps at every 15ft of the vertical installed part of
the cable, and support/tighten it to the mast structure. Check for possible sharp
corners that may tear/damages the cable.
• Repeat for signal cables.
• Run the signal cable from the AC Control Station to drillers control station.
• Unscrew dust caps one by one from the flying leads and terminate them to
respective plug & receptacle. Be sure the guiding slots & keys are matching prior to
add any force – attempting to force the joining of the plugs.
• When fully engaged – fasten & tighten the locking cup (Note: Use hand force only!)
• Repeat for all plugs – both in the derrick and to the plug panel on the control station.
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 19
1.5.5 Installation of Drillers Control Panel
• Make a bracket suitable for mounting to the studs at drillers control panel.
• Mount bracket & panel to an appropriate location at drillers stand.
• Rotate the panel to an appropriate angle (by loosening the nuts fixing the studs to
the bracket).
• Terminate signal cable from AC-Control Station the receptacle on the flying lead
from the panel.
1.5.6 Completing the top drive
• For the service loop at top drive side: Unscrew dust caps one by one from the flying
leads and terminate them to respective plug & receptacle. Be sure the guiding slots
& keys are matching prior to add any force – attempting to force the joining of the
plugs.
• When fully engaged – fasten & tighten the locking cup (Note: Use hand force only!)
• Repeat for all plugs (including the grounding).
• Terminate quick connection coupling for air supply.
• Install elevator links.
• Mount link tilt clamps to a suitable position. (See chapter 5).
• Mount top drive elevator (pneumatic, if available).
• Connect mud hose.
• Mount wash pipe (If already mounted – check tightening).
• Make sure the mud hose clamps are secured to the mast & top drive in respective
end.
• Connect the weight compensating system to the hook. (If the top drive is suspended
directly to the travelling block – adequate brackets should be made in advance).
• Replace seal plug on gearbox to air ventilation plug.
Prior to start any testing & pre-commissioning activities make sure that:
• All scaffoldings are removed.

• All hand tools etc. are removed.
• All bolts secured by means of locking wire or split pins.
• All preservation on cylinder rods, motor shafts, etc. are removed.
• Oils are filled in respective reservoir.
• Lubrication is done according to lubrication instructions.
www.natoil.com
Rig / Plant Atlas

Reference T3035
Description
Sub description
Document title Alignment Procedure
Portable Top Drive
HPT-500-2E-AC

1 Accepted
Sign:


9
7.3 3035
T3035-Z-KA-033 0

Servicebox 401
N-4604 Kristiansand
Norway
Phone +47 38 19 20 00
Telefax +47 38 19 23 11
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 2
CHANGE DESCRIPTION

0
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE ............................................................................................. 4

1.1 Safety Summary ..................................................................................................... 4
1.2 Equipment /Tools Needed ...................................................................................... 4
1.3 Coarse Adjustment ................................................................................................. 4
1.3.1 For Longitudinal Direction (= In/Out Direction) ............................................ 5
1.3.2 For Lateral Direction .................................................................................... 6
1.3.3 For Perpendicular Alignment ....................................................................... 7
1.3.3.1 Final perpendicular alignment (in lateral direction). .................................. 8
1.3.3.2 Final perpendicular alignment (in longitudinal direction). .......................... 9
1.4 Final Alignment Checks .......................................................................................... 9
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 4
1 ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
This procedure describes how to obtain perfect alignment of top drive respectively to
well centre.
1.1 Safety Summary
Before start any adjustments, make sure the top drive is disconnected from the drill
string. Furthermore the incoming power to be isolated by shutting off the main circuit
breaker in the AC-Control Station. People / crew not involved should not be present at
the drill floor when this activity takes place.
1.2 Equipment /Tools Needed
• Wrenches in sizes 24 mm, 30, and 36 mm. (Minimum 2 of each).

• Torque wrench (w/ capacity up to 1000 Nm (750 ft-lbs).
• Hook spanner for 185 mm dia. ( # 7¼” dia.)
• Chain blocks or winches with accessories.
• Pup joint or drill pipe parked in a slips in rotary table.
1.3 Coarse Adjustment
• Prior to start: Have a pup joint or drill pipe parked in a slips in rotary table.
(Typical stick up to be 3-4 ft).
• Lower the top drive until the grabber is positioned a couple of inches above the
stick up.
• Make a rough estimate of the adjustment needed.
The coarse adjustment is done by adjusting the torque tube.
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 5
1.3.1 For Longitudinal Direction (= In/Out Direction)
Unscrew & remove the 16bolts fixing the reaction tube to the transverse tube. Use chain
blocks or pull the top drive & torque tube in direction needed for obtaining alignment.
When properly align re-install the bolts in closest holes.
Torque Transfer Beam Connection to Torque Tube
Torque Transfer Beam

Bolts fixing the
transverse tube to the
reaction tube.
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 6
1.3.2 For Lateral Direction
Loosen the bolts fixing the transfer tube to the clamps. One of the leg lamps is equipped
with a set of toggle (jacking) flanges. Position these flanges as needed to the clamp.
Perform necessary lateral movement of the top drive by jacking via the flange the whole
torque tube & transfer tube. (If needed loosen the jacking flanges and re-position them
as needed to perform required lateral movement).
Clamp at End of Torque Transfer Beam
Clamp on Torque Transfer Beam Jacking flanges.

Bolt for jacking /pushing
the torque tube in
lateral direction.
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 7
1.3.3 For Perpendicular Alignment
The top drive in guided along the torque tube by a system named the torque carriage.
This carriage consists of 4 wheel brackets. These brackets have facility for final tuning /
alignment of the top drive.
Wheel brackets
for final
alignment
tuning
Torque tube
Top Drive Installed in Torque Tube
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 8
1.3.3.1 Final perpendicular alignment (in lateral direction).
These wheel brackets can be individually laterally moved by installing & removing shim.
In order to compensate for the weight of the service loop + mud hose, the correct
shimming is obtained as follows:
On the LHS of the machine # Upper wheels brackets (same side as service loop
termination bracket): Install 5-10mm shim more then on the RHS. When correct amount
of shim is installed – adjust qty of shim on RHS until a cap of 3-5mm (between side
roller wheels and torque tube) is obtained
On the RHS of the machine # Lower wheels brackets (opposite side of the service loop
termination bracket): Install 5-10mm shim more then on the LHS. When correct amount
of shim is installed – adjust qty of shim on LHS until a cap of 3-5mm (between side roller
wheels and torque tube) is obtained
Torque Carriage # Wheel Bracket
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 9
1.3.3.2 Final perpendicular alignment (in longitudinal direction).
Longitudinal tuning is obtained by rotate the eccentric wheel axles. The eccentricity
allows the wheels to be moved in/out (+/-) 10mm (3/8”). Due to the centre of gravity to
by behind the centre line of the top drive the upper wheels must be moved backwards
while the lower wheels must be rotated/moved forward.
NOTE: Always perform the same turning/positioning of the eccentric axle for the upper
pair of wheels brackets. The same for the lower set – always turn the eccentric axles to
equal position.
Eccentric Wheel Axle

Slots for Hook Spanner
1.4 Final Alignment Checks
After fine tuning of the alignment is done lower the top drive and monitor the horizontal
misalignment in x/y directions. Maximum misalignment shall be +/-5mm (3/16”) in any
direction:
Spin in & make up a pupjoint (or a single) to the top drive saver sub. Lower the block
until the pin end of the single meet the stick up in the rotary. Maximum misalignment
shall be +/-10mm (3/8”) in any direction:
If the figures correspond to these requirements the top drive is aligned and ready for
operation.
www.natoil.com
Rig / Plant Atlas

Reference T3035
Description
Sub description
Document title Commissioning Procedure
Portable Top Drive
HPT-500-2E-AC

1 Accepted
Sign:


40
7.4 3035
T3035-Z-KA-005 0

Servicebox 401
N-4604 Kristiansand
Norway
Phone +47 38 19 20 00
Telefax +47 38 19 23 11
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 2
CHANGE DESCRIPTION

0
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 TEST CONDITIONS.......................................................................................................... 5
1.1 Scope...................................................................................................................... 5
1.2 Revisions ................................................................................................................ 5
1.3 Reference Documents ............................................................................................ 5
1.4 General Information ................................................................................................ 6
1.5 Safety...................................................................................................................... 6
1.5.1 Required Test Equipment............................................................................ 6
1.5.2 Preparations ................................................................................................ 7
2 SYSTEM START-UP......................................................................................................... 8
3 RUNNING TESTS ........................................................................................................... 11
3.1 General Functions ................................................................................................. 11
3.1.1 Emergency Stop ........................................................................................ 11
3.1.1.1 Functional Tests ..................................................................................... 11
3.1.2 Lamp Test / Alarm Acknowledgement ....................................................... 11
3.1.3 Alarm Tests ............................................................................................... 12
3.2 DRILLING MOTOR FUNCTIONS ......................................................................... 14
3.2.1 Direction + Speed Checks ......................................................................... 14
3.2.2 Torque Setting Tests ................................................................................. 16
3.2.3 Drilling Motor “MODE” functions. ............................................................... 18
3.2.4 Brake ......................................................................................................... 23
3.3 PIPEHANDLER FUNCTIONS ............................................................................... 24
3.3.1 HPU Start/Stop .......................................................................................... 24
3.3.2 Pipehandler Rotation ................................................................................. 25
3.3.3 Rotate “ZERO POSITION” ........................................................................ 26
3.3.4 Pipehandler “LOCK/UNLOCK” .................................................................. 28
3.3.5 Grabber “ON / OFF” .................................................................................. 29
3.3.6 Link Tilt “BWD / 0 / FWD” .......................................................................... 31
3.3.7 Link Tilt “FLOAT / HOLD” .......................................................................... 32
3.3.8 Link Tilt “CREEP” ...................................................................................... 33
3.3.9 Elevator Open: .......................................................................................... 34
3.4 Auxiliary Functions ................................................................................................ 35
3.4.1 IBOP “Open/Close”.................................................................................... 35
3.4.2 Weight Compensating “Active” .................................................................. 36
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 4
3.5 Pressure Tests ...................................................................................................... 37

3.5.1 General...................................................................................................... 37
3.5.2 Mud Circuit ................................................................................................ 37
3.5.3 Hydraulic system: ...................................................................................... 38
3.6 Alignment Checks ................................................................................................. 39
3.6.1 Top Drive Alignment to Wellcentre ............................................................ 39
3.6.2 Interference / Collision Checks .................................................................. 39
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 5
1 TEST CONDITIONS
1.1 Scope
This document describes the requirements and activities to be carried out at the
commissioning of the HPT top drive.
1.2 Revisions
Where contents are subject to changes, this is indicated at the Change Description at
page 2
1.3 Reference Documents
[1] General Arrangement Drawing no.: T3035-D1400-A0001
[2] Hydraulic Flow Diagram Drawing no.: T3035-D1400-H0003
[4] Electrical Block Diagrams Drawing no.: T3035-D1400-E0001 & 02
[6] Product Data Sheet Doc no: T3035-Z-DS-001
[7] Technical specification for Doc no: HLA-4A

fabrication, assembly &
completion of equipment
packages
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 6
1.4 General Information
After completion of the installation and pre-commissioning checks, the HPT is to be

subjected to a final inspection and test.
The inspection / test shall be carried out in accordance with this document, and all
required observations during the test shall be recorded in the test record.
The inspection / test shall be performed in the presence of a NOI representative, and
owner (end-user).
The test record shall be traceable to the equipment tested and be signed by the
representative of NOI and the purchaser.
1.5 Safety
Testing of the HPT involves activities like movement / rotation of heavy equipment and
pressure testing. Personnel shall be on safe distance when this is going on. During test
a lot of adjustments, tests and inspections will be going on. These activities involve
personnel working on the machine and other personnel shall be aware of the risk of
dropping objects.
Before starting any inspection, dismantling of the equipment, the hydraulic, air and
electrical supply should be isolated, and the emergency stop push-button on driller’s
panel shall be activated. Pressure in hydraulic, mud and air circuit shall be released
after circuit is isolated before starting any activity.
1.5.1 Required Test Equipment
• 2-3 off pressure gauges, where at least one is calibrated and have a valid certificate.
• Equipment for handling the HPT.
• Air supply, 12 m3/h @ 0.7 MPa
• Calibrated load cell, range 0-20 metric Tonnes
• Oil sample bottles
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 7
1.5.2 Preparations
The HPT to be installed as described in installation procedure. Furthermore the centre

line of the machine to be aligned with centre line well. All interconnecting cables to be
terminated and incoming power to the AC control station to be ready to be powered up.
Done: ______________________
Make sure all drill stem connections are tightened to minimum 50.000 / maximum 60000
ft-lbs. Also verify that all the HYDRALLOCK rings are locked and secured.
Done: ______________________
Grease all the lubrication points:
Done: ______________________
Check oil level in all reservoirs (gearbox & HPU-tank):
Done: ______________________
Hook up the electric power supply between AC Control Station and SCR house.
Done: ______________________
Connect all cables between: Op. Contr. Panel and AC-Control Station, & AC-Control
Station and HPT.
Done: ______________________
Power up the SCR house and switch main circuit breaker in AC-Control Station to “ON”
Done: ______________________
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 8
2 SYSTEM START-UP
Prior to start-up, make sure all switches etc. on the operator control panel comply with
the following positions:
OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 9
Service Button / Switch: Control Valve / Lamp:
Drilling Motor to set to “OFF” ⇒ Not energized (Lamp not energized)

Rotation Direction switch in “0” ⇒ Not energized
Drilling Mode switch in ”Drill” ⇒ Not energized
“Activate Mode” button not activated ⇒ Not energized (Lamp not energized)
“Torque Setting” button
not activated ⇒ Not energized
Torque “Incr./Decr.” switch
not activated ⇒ Not energized
“Make-Up Completed” (lamp only) ⇒ Not energized (Lamp not energized)
Speed Throttle to be in “Zero” ⇒ Not energized
Weight Comp. button not activ. = “OFF” ⇒ Not energized (Lamp not energized)
IBOP button to be in “OPEN” ⇒ Not energized (Lamp not energized)
Brake button to be in “OFF” ⇒ Energized (Lamp not energized)
Pipehandler Rotate switch in “0” ⇒ Not energized

Elevator “OPEN” not activated ⇒ Not energized
Link Tilt “CREEP” to be off ⇒ Not energized (Lamp not energized)
Link Tilt Direction switch in “0” ⇒ Not energized
“Rotate Zero Pos” button not activated ⇒ Not energized (Lamp acc. to prox
switch)
Pipeh. “LOCK” button to be off ⇒ Not energized (Lamp acc. to prox
switch)
Grabber “ON” button to be off ⇒ Not energized (Lamp not energized)
Link Tilt “FLOAT” button to be off ⇒ Not energized (Lamp not energized)
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 10
Powering up the System:
Verify mode switch to be in “Drill” position + activate push button for Drilling Motor
“ON”.
The blower motors shall start.
Result:__________________
Verify proper exhaust air flow through outlet ducts.
Result:________________
Date Client Signature Nat.Oilwell Signature Third Party Signature
Comments:
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 11
3 RUNNING TESTS
3.1 General Functions
3.1.1 Emergency Stop
3.1.1.1 Functional Tests
All buttons + switches on the control panel in neutral (ref. 2.1) – except for the drilling
motor to be in “ON” mode.
Activate EMERGENCE STOP” button. The main circuit breaker shall be shut off and all
motors shall be de-enerigized/stop. (The PLC + operator control panel shall remain
powered).
Result:___________________
3.1.2 Lamp Test / Alarm Acknowledgement
Pull back the emergency stop button. Switch main circuit breaker back to on. All buttons
+ switches on the control panel to be in neutral (ref. 2.1) – except for the drilling motor to
be in “ON” mode.
Push button for “LAMP TEST”. Verify that all lamps on the operator control panel
illuminates as long as the button is activated.
Result:___________________
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 12
3.1.3 Alarm Tests
The alarm shall activate both the buzzer plus energize the lamp that shall start flicking. If
the “ALARM ACKNOWLEDGEMENT” button is activated the lamp shall switch from
flicking to continuous illuminating. Furthermore the buzzer shall be silent.
If the source that trigged the alarm remains “unsolved” within the next 3 minutes the
alarm sequence shall be repeated. If the cause for the alarm is eliminated the lamp shall
switch off.
Activate “SYSTEM FAILURE” alarm by simulate loop error on either:

- The gear oil temp transmitter,or
- on the HPU oil temp transmitter.
(Loop error means broken wire or short circuit on loop)
Result:___________________
Simulate “BLOWER LOSS” alarm. This can be done by either:

• Shut off respectively circuit breaker.
• Pull out the respectively fuse.
Result:___________________
Simulate “MOTOR TEMPERATURE HIGH” alarm by manipulate the wiring or change

set points in the PLC.
Result:___________________
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 13
Simulate “GEAR BOX TEMPERATURE HIGH” alarm by manipulate the wiring or

change set points in the PLC.
Result:___________________
Simulate “GEAR OIL PRESSURE LOW” alarm by manipulate the wiring or change set
points in the PLC.
(NOTE: The alarm shall NOT be activated if drilling motor OFF is active).
Result:___________________
Simulate “HPU TEMPERATURE HIGH” alarm by manipulate the wiring or change set
points in the PLC.
Result:___________________
Simulate “HPU LOW LEVEL” alarm by manipulate the wiring or change set points in
the PLC.
Result:___________________
When reaching “HPU LOW-LOW LEVEL” alarm - by manipulate the wiring or change
set points in the PLC, the alarm shall SHUT down the HPU.
Result:___________________
Simulate “AC-DRIVE FAULT” alarm by manipulate the PLC program.
Result:___________________
The “OPERATING ERROR ALARM” alarm will be verified several times through the
coming running tests. (No separate test will therefore be performed through the other
alarm test sequences).
Comments:
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 14
3.2 DRILLING MOTOR FUNCTIONS
3.2.1 Direction + Speed Checks
Functional Tests:
The motor to be “ON” and both blowers to be running. Activate directional switch to
“CW” and mode selector to “Drill”. Push the button for “Activate Mode” and adjust
torque set point to 10.000ft.lb + Speed pot.meter to 100RPM
Verify lamp for motor “ON” to illuminate.
Result:___________________
Verify lamp for “Activate Mode” to illuminate. The illumination shall be continuous until
the mode function is interrupted (by turning mode switch to another mode).
Result:___________________
Verify output shaft rotation direction to be clockwise.
Result:___________________
Verify speed read out gauge to correspond to manual RPM-meter.

(Deviation +/-3% is acceptable)
Result:___________________
Adjust speed pot.meter to 200 RPM

Result:___________________
Adjust speed pot.meter to maximum speed = 240 RPM

Result:___________________
Repeat function tests for “CCW”. Adjust torque set point to 10000 ft-lbs + Adjust speed
pot.meter to <60 RPM
Verify output shaft rotation direction to be counter-clockwise. .
Result:___________________
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 15

Result:___________________
Interlock tests:
Prior to start rotation:
Attempt turning the speed potentiometer without first pushing “Activate Mode” button.
The drill stem shall remain still and the alarm “Operation Error” shall be activated. The
alarm shall remain active until the potentiometer is turned to zero position (or accepted
by pushing the acknowledgement button).
Result:_________________
While rotating in CW and/or CCW direction (typ 100/60RPM + 10.000ft.lbs setting):
Activate the directional switch without first turning the speed potentiometer to zero.
Function shall remain as before attempt changing rotation. Furthermore the alarm
“Operation Error” shall be activated. The alarm shall remain active until the directional
switch is turned to original position.
Result:___________________
Activate push button for ON/OFF to “OFF”. The function shall remain as before attempt
changing. Furthermore the alarm “Operation Error” shall be activated.
Result:___________________
Attempt to turn the mode selector to another mode (“SPIN-IN” “MAKE-UP” or

“BREAK-OUT” mode) without first turning the speed potentiometer to zero. The top
drive shall rotate as before switching, the lamp in the activate mode button shall switch
off, and the alarm “Operation Error” shall be activated.
Result:___________________
While rotating “CCW”. Try to increase the speed to above 60RPM. Verify drill stem
speed to be limited to 60RPM. (No alarm shall be activated).
Result:___________________
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 16
Rotate the drill stem CW and/or CCW providing a speed feedback signal of more then
5RPM. Push button for grabber “ON”. The function shall remain as before attempt
Result:___________________
Comments:
3.2.2 Torque Setting Tests
Functional tests:
Verify all buttons + switches on the control panel to be in neutral (ref. 2.1) – except for
the drilling motor to be in “ON” mode, directional switch to be in “CW”, and the mode
switch to be in “DRILL”. (The torque set point may be adjusted independently of the
“Activate Mode” button/lamp status).
Simultaneously activate “TORQUE SETTING” + “TORQUE SETTING INCREASE”

buttons. Verify torque gauge moves from 0 to 40.000ft.lbs. (If not interrupted the
function shall take between 10 and 15 seconds).
Result:___________________
Simultaneously activate “TORQUE SETTING” + “TORQUE SETTING DECREASE”

buttons. Verify torque gauge moves from 40.000ft.lbs to 0. (If not interrupted the
Result:___________________
Repeat for directional switch in “CCW”.

Result:___________________
Simultaneously activate “TORQUE SETTING” + “TORQUE SETTING DECREASE”

buttons. Verify torque gauge moves from 40.000ft.lbs to 0. (If not interrupted the
Result:___________________
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 17
Remain in “CW”. Switch to “MAKE-UP” and push “Activate Mode”.

Result:___________________
Interlock tests:
Try set/change the torque set point:
While having the directional switch in “0”. Function shall remain as before attempt
changing position. Furthermore the alarm “Operation Error” shall be activated. The
alarm shall remain active until the directional switch is turned to original position.
Result:___________________
While having the mode switch in “SPIN”. Function shall remain as before attempt
changing position. Furthermore the alarm “Operation Error” shall be activated. The
alarm shall remain active until the directional switch is turned to original position.
Result:___________________
While having the mode switch in “BREAK-OUT”. Function shall remain as before
attempt changing position. Furthermore the alarm “Operation Error” shall be activated.
The alarm shall remain active until the directional switch is turned to original position.
Result:___________________
Comments:
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 18
3.2.3 Drilling Motor “MODE” functions.
Functional tests:
(“DRILL MODE” tests are described through previous directional + speed tests).
“SPIN-IN” mode tests:
While all buttons + switches on the control panel in neutral (ref. 2.1) – except for the
drilling motor to be in “ON” mode, directional switch to be in “CW”, and the mode
switch to be in “SPIN-IN”. Push the button “Activate Mode” for start the function.
Verify rotation direction to be CLOCKWISE + speed to be automatically set to 20RPM.
Result:___________________
the mode function is interrupted (by turning mode switch to another mode)..
Result:___________________
Verify that Weight Compensator Function (incl. HPU) automatically starts

simultaneously as the spin in starts. The lamp shall illuminate and the function shall be
active until the spin mode is ended (or interrupted).
Result:___________________
Activate the mode back to drill and activate the brake to “ON”. Repeat mode switch to
“SPIN-IN” + push button for “Activate Mode”. No rotation shall occur, but the
“TORQUE” read out gauge shall stall at 3000ft.lbs. After been stalled for 3seconds the
spin in function shall be reset and the function stop.
Result:___________________
Push for brake off. Turn mode switch to “DRILL”. Verify that Activate Mode lamp turns
off.
Result:___________________
Turn mode switch back to “SPIN-IN”. Push the button for “Activate Mode” and verify
that the machine reassume to spin in. Turn mode switch to “MAKE-UP”. Verify that spin
in function reassume and that “Activate Mode” lamp start flicking.
Result:___________________
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 19
“MAKE-UP” mode tests:
While all buttons + switches on the control panel in neutral (ref. 2.1) – except for the
drilling motor to be in “ON” mode, directional switch to be in “CW”, mode switch to be
in “MAKE-UP”, and torque set point to be set to 3000ft.lbs. Push the button for
“ACTIVATE MODE” and:
Verify rotation direction to be CLOCKWISE + speed to be automatically set to 10RPM.
Result:___________________
the mode function is interrupted (by turning mode switch to another mode)..
Result:___________________

simultaneously as the make-up starts. The lamp shall illuminate and the function be
active until the make-up mode is ended (or interrupted).
Result:___________________
This test simulates a typical connection / make-up sequence:

1. Adjust the make-up “TORQUE SETTING” to 10.000ft.lbs.
2. Switch mode selector to “DRILL”. Push for brake “ON”. (Check that lamp
illuminates).
3. Switch to “SPIN-IN” + push the button for “ACTIVATE MODE”.
4. Verify torque read out to be 3000ft.lbs).
5. Within 3seconds - Switch from “SPIN” to “MAKE-UP” and push the button for
“ACTIVATE MODE”.
6. Verify that torque read-out confirm torque increase from 3000ft.lbs to 10.000ft.lbs.
7. Also verify that “MAKE-UP COMPLETED” lamp start to illuminate 3seconds after the
settled torque is reached.
Result:___________________
Turn mode switch to “SPIN-IN”. Verify that “MAKE-UP COMPLETED” lamp turns off.
Result:__________________
Repeat for torque setting = 40.000ft.lbs.
Result:___________________
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 20
“BREAK-OUT” mode tests:
Prior to this test the break-out torque to be verified programmed to maximum

40.000ft.lbs
While all buttons + switches on the control panel are in neutral (ref. 2.1) – except for the
drilling motor to be in “ON” mode and directional switch to be “CW” position.
Switch to “BREAK-OUT”. Push the button for “ACTIVATE MODE” and verify rotation
direction to be COUNTER-CLOCKWISE + speed to be automatically set to 20RPM.
Also verify that status lamp start illuminating.
Result:___________________
Verify that lamp for “Activate Mode” illuminates. The illumination shall be continuous
until the mode function is interrupted (by turning mode switch to another mode).
Result:___________________

simultaneously as the break-out starts. The lamp shall illuminate and the function be
active until the break-out mode is ended (or interrupted).
Result:___________________
Turn selector switch to “DRILL”. Verify that break-out function stop. Status lamp shall
shut off.
Result:___________________
Push button for brake “ON”. Turn selector switch to “BREAK-OUT” and push the
button for “ACTIVATE MODE” Verify that break-out torque stall at 40.000ft.lbs.
Result:___________________
Reset the mode and run a similar test against a test sub. Verify proper make-up torque
(max. 40.000ft.lbs) corresponds to test sub threads. Run a break out sequence and
check that the HYDRALLOCK rings remain intact.
Result:___________________
NOTE: Due to the break-out torque is automatically set to 80000 ft-lbs it is not possible
to prove the break-out capacity through a test without over-torquing / damaging the drill
stem joints. No further break-out tests will therefore be executed through this sequence.
Result:___________________
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 21
Interlock tests:
While in “SPIN IN” mode:
Result:___________________
Activate grabber “ON” or “OFF”. The function shall remain as before attempt running
the grabber. Furthermore the alarm “Operation Error” shall be activated. The alarm
“source” will be rest as soon as the button is released.
Result:___________________
While in “MAKE-UP” mode:
Result:___________________
Result:___________________
While in “BREAK-OUT” mode:
Result:___________________
Result:___________________
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 22
While being in “SPIN-IN”, “MAKE-UP”, - or - “BREAK-OUT” mode:
Activate “EMERGENCY STOP” while any of the functions are running and the Grabber
is “ON” (Lamp to illuminate”). Re-start the system and try to switch selector to “DRILL”.
The function shall remain as before attempt changing. The Grabber “OFF” must be
activated at lamp switch off before it is allowed to turn the speed potentiometer out of
zero. The alarm “Operation Error” shall be activated until the mode is switched back to
previous position.
Result:__________________
Activate link tilt “Float” while any of these modes are active in combination of the
weight compensating is active. The function shall remain as before attempt running
float. Furthermore the alarm “Operation Error” shall be activated. The alarm “source”
will be rest as soon as the button is released.
Result:___________________
Comments:
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 23
3.2.4 Brake
Functional tests:
motor to be in “ON” mode. Turn the air brake switch to “ON”.
Verify that lamp in control button start illuminate. (For torque test of brake – ref break-
out torque test through previous text.
Result:___________________
Push button again. The brake shall be de-engaged and the lamp shall shut off.
Result:___________________
The air brake function shall be “fail-safe” terminated. This means that the brake shall be
activated even if the electrical/PLC is powered off. Simulate shut-down of the PLC and
verify the brake engages.
Result:___________________
Activate the air brake several times and make sure that it operates correctly. The
system shall be thorough visual and examined with respect to leakages when it is
pressurized.
Result:___________________
Interlock tests:
Try to engage the brake while rotating w/speed >50RPM. The brake shall not be
activated. The function shall remain as before attempt changing. Furthermore the alarm
“Operation Error” shall be activated.
Result:___________________
Comments:
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 24
3.3 PIPEHANDLER FUNCTIONS
3.3.1 HPU Start/Stop
Functional tests:
the drilling motor to be in “ON” mode.
The HPU will automatically start if any of the hydraulic consuming functions are
activated. (ref. 3.6.2 for list). If not interrupted the HPU will automatically run for 5
minutes after last hydraulic valve solenoid was de-energized. Choose a couple of
functions any verify:
Result:___________________
The HPU is power compensated. This means that the pressure line out of the HPU will
be pressurized only if a solenoid is energized. The pressure will also correspond with
each consumers need (=specified working pressure – ref 3.6.2 for list). Run a couple of
arbitrary functions any verify corresponding pressure on test point “H12-2”
Result:___________________
After any solenoid is de-energized and the timer starts the pressure out of the HPU shall
be “zero”. Run a couple of arbitrary functions any verify pressure on test point “H12-2”
to be less then 10barg.
Result:___________________
Interlock tests:
When running the HPU
Simulate oil level “LOW-LOW”. (This test is described and may be already executed.
Ref. test no. 3.1.3 for details).
Comments:
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 25
3.3.2 Pipehandler Rotation
Functional tests:
the drilling motor to be in “ON” mode + Link Tilt to be in “FLOAT”.
The pipehandler rotation is activated by a 3-way switch with spring return. Activate the
switch towards “CCW”. Verify that pipehandler rotates counter-clockwise. Monitor
rotation speed to be within 5 to 8 RPM.
Result:___________________
Repeat for “CW”.
Result:___________________
Interlock tests:
Try switching to “CCW” or CW” mode:
While the link tilt cylinders is parked in mode out of “vertical” (ref. pressure switch). The
function shall remain as before attempt changing. Furthermore the alarm “Operation
Error” shall be activated.
Result:___________________
While rotating the pipehandler “CCW” or CW”:
Push pipehandler “LOCK”. The function shall remain as before attempt running the
cylinder. Furthermore the alarm “Operation Error” shall be activated. The alarm
“source” will be reset as soon as the button is released.
Result:___________________
Comments:
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 26
3.3.3 Rotate “ZERO POSITION”
Functional tests:
Have the pipehandler turned 90deg respectively to the “machine front”. Activate button
for rotate “ZERO POSITION”. Verify that pipehandler rotates in clockwise direction.
The rotation shall stop immediately when the elevator open matching the “machine
front”.
Result:___________________
Verify lamp in actuator button starts flicking simultaneously as the button is activated.
When reaching “zero position” and the rotation stop, the lamp mode shall switch to
constant illumination.
Result:___________________
Verify that rotate “ZERO POSITION” function can be stopped/reset by activating any of
these buttons/switches:
Pipehandler rotate: “CW”
Pipehandler rotate: “CCW”
Rotate: “ZERO POSITION”
(The lamp shall switch off simultaneously as the zero position function is interrupted).
Result:___________________
Interlock tests:
When pushing button: Rotate “ZERO POSITION”.
Link tilt cylinders to be out of “vertical” mode (ref. pressure switch). The function shall
remain as before attempt changing. Furthermore the alarm “Operation Error” shall be
activated.
Result:___________________
While the sequence is running # Pipehandler rotates “CW”.
Push pipehandler “LOCK”. The function shall remain as before attempt running the
grabber. Furthermore the alarm “Operation Error” shall be activated. The alarm
Result:___________________
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 27
While running the pipehandler rotation – attempt to run the speed potentiometer out of
zero. The function shall remain as before attempt push for return to zero. Furthermore
the alarm “Operation Error” shall be activated.
Result:___________________
Comments:
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 28
3.3.4 Pipehandler “LOCK/UNLOCK”
Functional tests:
the drilling motor to be in “ON” mode. Make sure the pipehandler is parked in zero
position + lamp illuminates continuously.
Activate button for “LOCK”. Verify that lamp in control button start flicking. As soon as
the locking cylinder is fully engaged and the proximity switch confirms engaged the lamp
shall switch to continuous illumination. The lamp shall remain illuminating until activation
of “UNLOCK”.
Result:___________________
Activate button for “UNLOCK”. Verify that lamp in control button start flicking. As soon
as the locking cylinder is fully de-engaged the lamp shall switch to off.
Result:___________________
Interlock tests:
When activating button for “LOCK”:
Have the pipehandler in any position other then “ZERO POSITION”. Push button for
pipehandler “LOCK”. The function shall remain as before attempt changing.
Furthermore the alarm “Operation Error” shall be activated.
Result:___________________
When activating button for “UNLOCK”:
Have the grabber in “ON” mode. Push button for pipehandler “UNLOCK”. The function
shall remain as before attempt changing. Furthermore the alarm “Operation Error”
shall be activated.
Result:___________________
Comments:
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 29
3.3.5 Grabber “ON / OFF”
Functional tests:
the drilling motor to be in “ON” mode. The pipehandler to be in zero position and
genuine locked.
Activate button for grabber “ON”. Verify that both die holders moves toward center of
grabber. The die holder shall move all the way out until the cylinder ends. Opening
within dies shall be approx. 4inches (101mm).
Result:___________________
Verify that the lamp in the button starts illuminate as soon as the pressure switch
become energized (= hydraulic pressure in cylinder >50barg). The lamp shall remain
illuminating until the pressure switch is de-energized.
Result:___________________
Activate button for grabber “OFF”. Verify that both die holders retracts to fully open
grabber. The die holder shall move all the way out until the cylinder ends. Opening
within dies shall be ~9,5inches (240mm). Also verify that the lamp switch off
simultaneously as the grabber on pressure drops below 50barg.
Result:___________________
Interlock tests:
When activating button for grabber “ON”:
Have the pipehandler in “UNLOCK” and/or no feedback signal from proximity switch.
Push button for grabber “ON”. The function shall remain as before attempt changing.
Furthermore the alarm “Operation Error” shall be activated.
Result:___________________
Attempt push button for grabber “ON” while mode switch is turned to any other modes
then “DRILL”. The function shall remain as before attempt changing. Furthermore the
alarm “Operation Error” shall be activated.
Result:___________________
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 30
While grabber in “ON” and lamp is energized:
Activate the emergency stop button. Try to switch drilling motor selector to “DRILL”. The
(This test is also described as a part of the drilling motor tests. See test 3.3.1 for
details).
Result:___________________
Have the speed potentiometer out of 0-mode. Push button for grabber “ON”. The
Result:___________________
When activating button for grabber “OFF”:
Attempt push button for grabber “OFF” while mode switch is turned to any other modes
then “DRILL”. The function shall remain as before attempt changing. Furthermore the
Result:___________________
Comments:
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 31
3.3.6 Link Tilt “BWD / 0 / FWD”
Functional tests:
the drilling motor to be in “ON” mode and link tilt to be in “FLOAT”. This function is run
by a 3-way switch with spring return.
Turn switch towards “BWD”. Verify that the link tilt cylinders retracts and the elevator
links are pulled backwards. The movement shall be continuous and smooth as long as
the switch is activated.
Result:___________________
Release the switch. It shall automatically be positioned in “0”. The link tilt cylinders shall
extend and the elevator return to vertical mode.
Result:___________________
Turn switch towards “FWD”. Verify that the link tilt cylinders extend and the elevator
links are pushed forwards. The movement shall be continuous and smooth as long as
Result:___________________
retract # the elevator shall move to vertical due to the gravity force.
Result:___________________
Interlock tests:
When activating “BWD” or “FWD”.
While running the link tilt FWD or BWD – attempt to run the HPT speed potentiometer
out of zero. The function shall remain as before attempt changing. Furthermore the
Comments:
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 32
3.3.7 Link Tilt “FLOAT / HOLD”
Functional tests:
Push button to “HOLD” mode. Verify that light switch off.
Result:___________________
Turn switch towards “BWD”. Verify that the link tilt cylinders retract and the elevator
links are pulled backwards. The movement shall be continuous and smooth as long as
Result:___________________
Release the switch. The tilt cylinders + elevator links shall be parked as positioned
when the switch was released
Result:___________________
Turn switch towards “FLOAT”. Verify that the link tilt cylinders extend and the elevator
links moves to vertical.
Result:___________________
Repeat for “HOLD” & “FWD”.
Result:___________________
While being in “FLOAT” mode push the button for Weight Comp. “ACTIVE”. The
function shall switch to hold and the weight compensating system shall be activated.
Result:___________________
Interlock tests: None
Comments:
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 33
3.3.8 Link Tilt “CREEP”
Functional tests:
the drilling motor to be in “ON” mode + Link Tilt to be in “FLOAT”.
Push control button for link tilt “CREEP”. Verify that lamp is control button illuminate
continuously.
Result:___________________
Turn switch towards “BWD”. Verify that the link tilt cylinders retract and the elevator
links are pulled backwards with 70% reduced speed. The movement shall be continuous
and smooth as long as the switch is activated
Result:___________________
extend (be pulled out) by the elevator links # shall move to vertical due to the gravity
force.
Result:___________________
Push control button for link tilt “CREEP”. Verify that lamp is control button illuminate
continuously. Turn switch towards “FWD”. Verify that the link tilt cylinders extend and
the elevator links are pushed forwards with 70% reduced speed. The movement shall
be continuous and smooth as long as the switch is activated
Result:___________________
extend (be pulled out) by the elevator links # shall move to vertical.
Result:___________________
Repeat for link tilt Float/Lock in “LOCK” position. All function to be as for 3.4.7 and
3.4.8, but with 70% reduced speed.
Result:___________________
Interlock tests:
Only software function = No interlocks.
Comments:
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 34
3.3.9 Elevator Open:
Functional tests:
If available – make sure a pneumatic elevator is hooked up in the elevator links. (If open
- activate trigger to lock the elevator). Activate button (twice within one second) for
elevator “OPEN”. Verify that air flow to elevator remain active/constant for 5seconds.
Result:___________________
Interlock tests:
Push the button only once, or twice but with longer interval then 1 sec. The solenoid
shall not be energized and the elevator shall remain closed.
Comments:
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 35
3.4 Auxiliary Functions
3.4.1 IBOP “Open/Close”
Functional tests:
Push control button for IBOP “CLOSE”. Verify that the IBOP sleeve moves upwards
until the key indicator (slot in key) indicate “closed”. Use a flash light and visually inspect
the ball to be fully closed. (Note the movement shall be stopped be the internal IBOP
cam # The pneumatic cylinder shall remain with some “play stroke”
Result:___________________
As soon as the button is activated the lamp shall illuminate. The illumination shall be
continuous until the IBOP open solenoid has been energized. Furthermore the solenoid
shall be continuous energized until the push button is re-activated.
Result:___________________
Push button for IBOP “OPEN”. Verify that the IBOP sleeve moves downwards until the
key indicator (slot in key) indicate “open”. Use a flash light and visually inspect the ball
to be fully open. (This movement shall also be stopped be the internal IBOP cam # The
pneumatic cylinder shall remain with some “play stroke”.
Result:___________________
As soon as the button is activated the lamp shall shut off. The lamp shall remain de-
energized until the IBOP close solenoid has been energized. Furthermore check that
the solenoid is energized for 5sec. after actuation of the push button.
Result:___________________
Interlock tests:
When activating switch for IBOP “OPEN” or “CLOSE”
No interlocks.
Comments:
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 36
3.4.2 Weight Compensating “Active”
Functional tests:
Push button for weight compensating “ACTIVE”. Verify that the weight compensating
cylinders retracts and tighten the chain play length. The lamp in the control button shall
start illuminate simultaneously as the control is activated. The system is now activated
and the hydraulic cylinders compensates for approximately 95% of the top drive weight.
Result:___________________
Check that the function remains active for 5 minutes after the function was started. After
5 minutes the solenoid shall be de-energized and the lamp shall switch off.
Result:___________________
Activate weight compensating “ACTIVE” again. After some seconds – push the control
button again. The timer function shall be stopped, and the solenoid + lamp shall be de-
energized.
Result:___________________
While the weight compensating is active. Push button for link tilt “FLOAT”. The weight
compensating system shall be de-activated and the link tilt system shall float.
Result:___________________
Interlock tests:
When the Weight Compensating is running/active without being spin-in, make-up or

break-out mode: No interlocks.
Comments:
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 37
3.5 Pressure Tests
3.5.1 General
The Power Swivel has two separate pressure exposed systems:

The mud.
The hydraulic system.
These pressure tests were executed as a part of the work shop “Factory
Acceptance Test” prior to delivery. Following test description is therefore meant
to be a guideline how to perform a pressure test according to maintenance
recommendation # schedule as decided by the operator.
3.5.2 Mud Circuit
The pressure containing components in the mud circuit listed below shall be hydrostatic
tested in accordance with API 8C section 9.9.3.
NOTE: Since this pressure test will be carried out at 1,5times rated WP, the wash pipe
to be replaced by a dummy one in order to avoid permanent deformation of sealings.
Pressure tests:
Make sure all drill stem connections are properly tightened. Both lower sub and S-pipe
connections to be plugged. Fill the course with water and make sure all air is purged
prior to pressurization.
The hydrostatic test shall be carried out in four steps:

-The primary pressure holding period
-Reduction of the pressure to zero
-Thorough drying of external surfaces
-The secondary pressure holding period
The test pressure shall be equal to 1.5 times the maximum rated working pressure of
5000psi, which means 7500 psi test pressure. The pressure-testing period shall not be
less then 10 minutes. The timing period shall not start before the test pressure has
stabilized, and the pressure-monitoring device has been isolated from the energy
source.
Result:___________________
Comments:
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 38
3.5.3 Hydraulic system:
All components in the hydraulic system are to be pressure & leakage tested at a
minimum hydrostatic pressure 1.5 times the maximum rated working pressure of each
function
Pressure tests:
Before test, all the air in the system has to be purged. Adjust any respectively relief
valves, anti-shock valves, press.red. valves, etc. to settings as required to obtain
described test pressure. pipehandler rotation motor to be disconnected and in/out hoses
plugged. Before each test – adjust HPU pressure to > specified test pressure.
Test Record:
Activity Pressure Holding Res

(barg) Time (3min) ult.
Operating Test:
Pipehandler Rotate
90 135
“CW”
Pipehandler Rotate
90 135
“CCW”
Pipehandler “UNLOCK” 210 315
Pipehandler “LOCK” 210 315
Link Tilt ”FLOAT” 170 255
Weight Comp. ”ACTIVE” 170 255

Link Tilt “FWD”
210 315
Link Tilt “BWD”
210 315
Back-Up Grabber “ON” 250 375
Back-Up Grabber “OFF” 210 315
Comments:
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 39
3.6 Alignment Checks
3.6.1 Top Drive Alignment to Wellcentre
Have a stick up (approx 3ft high) landed in a slips in rotary table. Lower the top drive.
Check that saver sub pin is matching the stick-up box. (The deviation shall be within +/-
10mm (0,5in) in any horizontal directions.
Hoist the top drive up 10metres (30ft). Repeat alignment test.
Result:___________________
Comments:
3.6.2 Interference / Collision Checks
• Carefully hoist the top drive from drill floor to the crown. Follow the top drive
movement foot by foot and verify that no collision or interferences occurs
between the top drive system and the mast/derrick structure.
Result:___________________
• Carefully lower the top drive from crown to the drill floor. Follow the top drive
movement foot by foot and verify that no collision or interferences occurs
between the top drive system and the mast/derrick structure.
Result:___________________
Comments:
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 40
Notes:
A punches - significant punches, which has to be Cleared by
corrected before next phase.
Punch Item No.
B punches - minor punches thatPunch

may beList
left to a
Status Punch
Manufacturer
Cleared date
Responsible
later phase.
Executor
Responsible Executor is either National Oilwell
Hydralift
or manufacturer of equipment.
If punch is transferred to MC punch clear out,
write ”MC-PACK” in ”cleared date” box and repeat
description in MC punch list.
Description of punch.
National
Verified: Client/Owner: Class:
Oilwell:
Name:
Sign:
Date:
www.natoil.com
Page: 1 of 30
CHAPTER 5
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Chapter 5: Operating Instructions
www.natoil.com
Page: 2 of 30
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ......................................................................................... 3

5.1 Safety Summary ..................................................................................................... 3
5.2 Emergency Stop ..................................................................................................... 5
5.3 Description of Controls............................................................................................ 7
5.3.1 Operator Control Panel................................................................................ 7
5.3.2 AC Drive Controls ...................................................................................... 11
5.3.3 Local Control Valves and Indicators .......................................................... 11
5.4 Normal Operation.................................................................................................. 13
5.4.1 Basic Starting and Stopping Procedure ..................................................... 13
5.4.2 Stand Drilling ............................................................................................. 15
5.4.3 Drilling with Stands .................................................................................... 16
5.4.4 Tripping ..................................................................................................... 17
5.4.5 Support Procedures................................................................................... 18
5.4.5.1 Drill Mode Operation............................................................................... 18
5.4.5.2 Using the Air Brake................................................................................. 20
5.4.5.3 Releasing Trapped Back Torque in Drillstring ........................................ 21
5.4.5.4 Using the Pipehandler ............................................................................ 22
5.4.5.5 Elevator Operation.................................................................................. 26
5.4.5.6 Changing from One Drillpipe Size to Another ......................................... 26
5.4.5.7 Installing Elevator Links on Link Hanger................................................. 27
5.4.5.8 Operation of the IBOPs .......................................................................... 28
5.4.5.9 Using Wireline Conveyed Explosives ..................................................... 28
5.5 Disturbance of Operation ...................................................................................... 29
5.5.1 Dealing with Alarms ................................................................................... 29
5.5.2 Trip of Power to the Drilling Motors ........................................................... 29
5.5.3 Drilling Motors Cooling Failure .................................................................. 29
5.5.4 Gearbox Lubrication Failure ...................................................................... 30
5.6 Training Program for Operators ............................................................................ 30
www.natoil.com
Page: 3 of 30
5 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
The operating instructions of this chapter are based on the assumption that the top
drive already has been installed and prepared for ordinary routine operation.
In the different sections the top drive is frequently referred to by the HPT
abbreviation, which is a short version of the type code (see chapter 2).
5.1 Safety Summary
The following types of safety message may appear in various sections of this
chapter:
WARNING: Must be observed to prevent serious injury.

CAUTION: Must be observed to prevent damage of equipment and/or loss of
operating effectiveness.
NOTE: Must be observed for correct and efficient operation.
It is the responsibility and duty of all personnel involved in the operation and
maintenance of this equipment to fully understand the SAFETY measures, by which
hazards are reduced or eliminated. Personnel must become thoroughly familiar with
all aspects of safety and operation of the equipment before starting any operation or
maintenance.
The following points sum up the safety aspects related to operation:
• Only qualified and trained personnel are allowed to operate this equipment.
• The equipment must only be used for the prescribed purpose and in accordance
with the operating instructions.
• If the power to the AC drilling motors is tripped during drilling, the air flex brake
will automatically be engaged. (Requires air supply to be pressurized).
• If back torque is trapped in the drillstring after a spin-in or torque-up sequence
against a rig tong, the torque will be released and cause reverse rotation of the
tong.
• If possible, don’t turn the speed throttle quickly down to zero during drilling.
Rapid zeroing causes the drilling motor moment of inertia to try stopping the
rotation of the drillstring, and there will be a risk of the string tooljoints backing
off.
• In a critical situation, such as during uncontrolled reverse string rotation, the
operator must be aware of the risks of applying the air brake.
• Never rotate the drilling motors while the load in the link hanger exceeds ca. 10
tons. The link hanger will then be resting on the main shaft’s split collar, and the
result will be excessive wear of the main load carrying components. This may, in
due course, result in a hazardous situation.
www.natoil.com
Page: 4 of 30
• In conditions requiring free rotation of the main shaft, the speed throttle must to
be set to zero and the drilling rotation switch turned to “0”.
• The air brake is only intended for static locking of the main shaft.
• The link tilt is not designed to withstand lateral stresses or loads in upward
direction when tilted forwards or backwards.
• Special attention must be paid when drilling down to the floor. When the links
are tilted backwards it is of ESSENTIAL IMPORTANCE THAT NO PERSONNEL
ARE ENTERING THE AREA WITHIN THE ROTATION RADIUS OF THE
ELEVATOR/PIPEHANDLER.
• Too low makeup torque may result in loose pipe connections.
• Before starting any work involving the hydraulic system, the circuit breaker for
the onboard HPU must be shut down and isolated.
• Always ensure that the pipe is properly gripped or secured by other equipment
before opening the elevator!
• The HPT must be completely isolated from the electric supply before using
wireline conveyed explosives in the well. Otherwise there is a risk of premature
detonation when the wireline sheaves are near the electric parts of the HPT.
• Dropped objects are potential killers! Always ensure that tools and/or equipment
are not lost or forgotten at high places. If necessary, seal the area below.
• The equipment is powered by high-pressure (250 barg) hydraulic oil. Beware of
the risk of pipe/hose burst. Pipe/hose connections and filter bowls must not be
unscrewed before the hydraulic system is depressurised.
• If anyone gets hydraulic oil into the eyes or open wounds, wash at once with lots
of fresh water. Consult a doctor if necessary.
• In the case of a fire, be aware that hydraulic oil is flammable. The combustion
point is ca. 200 Deg. C. Oil fog is highly flammable!
www.natoil.com
Page: 5 of 30
5.2 Emergency Stop
An emergency stop button that shuts down the HPT is located at the control panel.
In addition there is a separate emergency stop in the control station. They both
switch off the main circuit breaker to the AC drive unit, resulting in shut down of
drilling motors, blower motors, HPU motor, and PLC. All solenoids, sensors etc in
the hydraulic control valve unit become de-energized.
Note that the air brake is automatically engaged when the emergency stop is
activated.
The operator must be aware of the risks by activating the emergency stop during
drilling. The AC drilling motors can no longer be controlled by ordinary operating
controls, and there is a risk of uncontrolled reverse rotation of the drillstring (if the air
supply inlet is not pressurized). For this reason the emergency stop should only be
activated when an immediate uncontrolled stop of the rotating equipment is
required. Otherwise the stop should be by the ordinary operating controls.
Restarting HPT after Emergency Stop
After the cause of the emergency stop has been remedied, the HPT can be
restarted as follows:
• Verify that the air brake is on.

• Set the speed throttle to zero.
• Reset (turn/pull) the emergency stop button.
• Acknowledge and remedy any unacknowledged alarms. It is not possible to
restart the VFD or run the AC drilling motors if any of the following alarms are
present:
• Motor temp high

• Gear oil temp high
• AC drive fault
• HPU temp high
• HPU level low-low
• All controls on the operator panel to be set to neutral.

• Reset the AC drive main circuit breaker.
• If the emergency stop interrupted an ongoing spin-in or makeup, the Grabber Off
function has to be reactivated before repeating the sequence.
www.natoil.com
Page: 6 of 30
• If a pneumatic elevator is used: If the emergency stop interrupted an ongoing

opening of the elevator, the time needed for a successful opening has been
interrupted and the elevator may be locked in an incorrect position. Special
attention is needed to verify proper opened /closed position.
• If the emergency stop was activated during rotation of the drillstring, the air
brake will be activated and locking the drillstring. Before opening the brake, turn
selector switch to CW. Turn mode selector to Drill. Push the Activate Mode
button. Turn Speed potentiometer to 10-50 RPM. The preset torque will be built
up by the drilling motors and the brake can be released without risking
uncontrolled spin back.
www.natoil.com
Page: 7 of 30
5.3 Description of Controls
5.3.1 Operator Control Panel
This section describes the operator control panel normally used for operation of the
HPT.
Operator Control Panel
Lamp Test: Pushing the Lamp Test button activates all panel lamps. Keep the
button pushed while verifying that all lamps are functioning.
Emergency Stop: The emergency stop was described separately above. Be aware
of the consequences of emergency stopping the HPT during drilling, and use it only
when absolutely necessary!
Speed Throttle: The speed throttle wheel is used for adjusting the speed of the top
drive main shaft. The speed setting must be turned to ZERO before activating any
of these functions:
• The frequency converter during starting

• Attempting activating the directional selector switch
• Attempting switching the mode selector switch
• Attempt starting the Activate Mode switch
• Attempt activating Grabber ON
www.natoil.com
Page: 8 of 30
Speed Indicator: The speed indicator shows the present main shaft speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm)
Torque Indicator: The torque indicator shows the applied and setpoint torque of the
drilling motor and torque wrench in Nm and ft-lbs as follows:
• During adjusting/setting either Drilling Torque set point or the Make-Up

Torque set point, the indicator shows the presently applied torque set point.
(Requires activating of the Torque Setting button).
• During drilling the indicator shows the presently applied drill torque.
• During spinning in the indicator shows the presently applied spin torque.
• During make-up with the drilling motor (Make Up Mode) the indicator shows
the presently applied make-up torque.
• Activating of the Torque Setting button will confirm present set point for the
position as indicated by the mode switch.
WARNING:
THE TORQUE INDICATOR DOES NOT SHOW BACK TORQUE TRAPPED IN
THE DRILLSTRING!
DRILLING MOTOR FIELD:
On/Off Button/Lamp: The (impulse type) On/Off button is used for: starting the
blower motors plus enabling the HPU + AC-motors to start. After the button has
been pushed, the white button lamp will illuminate.
CCW/ 0 / CW Selector: Three-position stay put switch for selecting counter-

clockwise (CCW), free, or clockwise (CW) direction of shaft rotation. (In free mode
the main shaft is free to be rotated by hand in both directions).
Mode Selector Switch: A 4-position switch for selecting top drive motors to enable to
perform a break-out, drilling, spin-in, or a make up activity.
Activate Mode: A pushbutton with lamp, used for starting any of the selected and
enabled modes above. The lamp will illuminate if all premises are fulfilled and
remain illuminating until the ongoing mode is correctly stopped. When switching
from Spin-In to Make-Up the lamp will start flicking until the activate mode switch is
pushed again and the Make-Up sequence starts. (If starting any other mode then
drilling the weight compensating system will automatically start and run as long as
the mode is running).
NOTE:
IF THE SELECTOR SWITCH IS TURNED WHILE ANY OF THE MODES ARE
ONGOING THE OPERATING ERROR ALARM WILL BE ACTIVATED AND THE
LAMP WILL SWITCH OFF. IN ORDER TO RESET THE ALARM THE MODE
SELECTOR HAS TO BE TURNED TO ONGOING MODE AND THE LAMP WILL
AUTOMATICALLY START ILLUMINATE AGAIN.
www.natoil.com
Page: 9 of 30
Make-Up Completed: A lamp that will illuminate for 3 seconds after predetermined
make-up torque is reached.
Torque Setting: A push button with two functions:

To shown actual torque set point on the torque gauge for the mode as positioned by
the mode selector switch.
If pushed together with turning the torque setting towards Increase or Decrease the
torque set point will be adjusted as selected.
Torque Setting, Increase/Decrease: A switch allowing changing the Drilling or Make-

Up torque set points. For changing set point the switch must be activated
simultaneously as activating the torque setting push button.
Brake On: A push button with lamp, used for activate / reactivate the air brakes.
PIPEHANDLER FIELD:
Rotate CCW / 0 / CW: A three position selector switch with spring return to zero. By
turning the switch (in either of the directions) the pipehandler will rotate in direction
as selected. The rotation will continue as long as the switch in activated. When
releasing the switch the pipehandler will stop.
Rotate Zero Position: A push button with light. When pushing the button the
pipehandler will rotate in CW direction towards “zero”. When rotated to position
where the elevator opening is facing from of the top drive, (normally towards
mousehole & V-door), the rotation will automatically stop. A proximity switch will
then sense a signal from a target flag and confirm correct zero position by
energizing the lamp.
Pipehandler Lock: A push button with light. When pushing the button a locking
cylinder will extend and prevent the rotating head from rotating. This function must
be active when using the grabber as back up through make up and break-out. A
proximity switch senses when the cylinder is fully engaged – that again make the
lamp start illuminate. (Pushing the button once more will reverse the function).
Grabber ON / OFF: A push button with light. When pushing the button, (and feed
back signal confirms pipehandler locked), the clamp cylinders inside the grabber
body will move towards the pipe and create a high clamping force on the tool joint.
The light will illuminate as soon as the pressure inside the cylinders exceeds the
pressure switch set point. (Pushing the button once more will reverse the function).
www.natoil.com
Page: 10 of 30
Link Tilt BWD/0/FWD: A three way selector switch (with spring return) that when
turned in selected direction will run the bails & elevator either forward, (pick-up
mode - towards i.e the mousehole or the V-door), or backwards clear of the drill
string (drilling mode). When releasing the selector switch the elevator and links will
remain in position or return to vertical position – all depending on the link tilt float
control.
Link Tilt Float: A push button with light used for either stop/park the elevator in
position as when releasing the link tilt directional switch, or allows the elevator and
links to return to vertical automatically. The lamp will illuminate if float mode is
activated.
Link Tilt Creep: A push button with light used for activating an automating speed
reduction of the link tilt speed/movement. The purpose of this function is to reduce
the hazard when running the link tilt simultaneously as manual elevator assistance
is performed. The light will illuminate when the creep mode is active.
Elevator Open: A push button used for activating the (pneumatic) elevator open
function. The button must be pushed twice within one second in order to energize
the valve. Furthermore, the signal will automatically energize the valve for 5
seconds that normally is sufficient for opening the elevator.
NOTE:
THERE IS NO POSITIVE FEEDBACK SIGNAL FROM THE ELEVATOR TO THE
CONTROL SYSTEM, CONFIRMING THAT THE ELEVATOR REALLY IS OPEN.
AUX FIELD:
IBOP Open/Close: A push button used for opening or closing of the remote
operated IBOP.
Weight Compensating System: A push button with light used for activating the
weight cushioning cylinders. When activated the lamp will illuminate and the
function will be active for 5 minutes. If the button is pushed within these five minutes
the cylinders will extend and the system will be off.
GENERAL (ALARM) FIELD:
System Failure: An alarm is trigged if there is loop error on the gear oil temp
transmitter or loop error on the HPU oil temp transmitter.
Loop error is broken wire or short circuit on loop.
Blower Loss: An alarm trigged if the blower starter feed back confirms blower not
running.
www.natoil.com
Page: 11 of 30
Motor Temp. High: An alarm trigged if any of the AC-drilling motors becomes over
heated.
Gearbox Temp. High: An alarm trigged if the gear box oil becomes over heated.
Gear Oil Pressure Low: An alarm trigged if the gear oil circulation pressure drops
below set point.
HPU Temp. High: An alarm trigged if the oil in the HPU tank becomes overheated.
HPU Level Low: An alarm trigged if the oil level in the oil tank becomes low. This
alarm has two levels. Level one alarm is for “Low” level (in order to make the driller
observed that more oil must be filled into the tank. If the level sink further the “Low
Low” stage of the alarm will be activated and an automatic shut down of the HPU
motor will be done.
AC-Drive Fault: Several causes may activate this alarm. See AC-Drive manual,
chapter 9.1 (Protective and Diagnostic Function) for details.
Operating Error: An alarm trigged if the operator/driller attempt to start functions that
may results in hazard situations or may damaging the equipment. (For further
description, see chapter 5 # “Dealing with alarms”).
5.3.2 AC Drive Controls
The AC-Drive controls are described in a separate user manual.
5.3.3 Local Control Valves and Indicators
Drawing: HPT, Hydraulic Flow Diagram
The local controls are mostly for service/maintenance and emergency use, such as
if the electric supply to the ordinary remote controls blacks out. Some less frequent
operations can only be carried out manually by local controls. The controls, which
mostly are located at the rear of the HPT, are the following:
Pressure Gauge: For local monitoring of the gearbox oil pressure.
Level Gauge: On gearbox, showing gearbox oil level.
Level Glass: On HPU tank, showing tank level.
Tank Thermometer: On HPU tank, showing oil temperature.
www.natoil.com
Page: 12 of 30
Air Lubricator Level/Sight Glass: Oil fog type lubricator in air supply line to the HPT
air consumers; for verification of correct lubrication of the supplied instrument air.
Hydraulic Filter Clogging Indicator: The filter with indicator is located on the HPU
tank top cover, and indicates if the filter is clogged (unacceptable high pressure
drop across the filter).
A Hydraulic Manual Isolation Valve: See the hydraulic flow diagram. For isolating
the hydraulic pressure line between the pump and the control valve in case the HPU
has to be removed for service etc. (Shall normally always be left open).
Manual IBOP Operation: Both the (upper) remote operated IBOP and the (lower)
manually operated IBOP can be opened and closed manually by a supplied 22 mm
Allen key/wrench.
Row of Hydraulic Control Valves: The valves listed below are installed in a row at
the rear of the HPT. Each valve has a manual control lever for local operation. The
levers are operated along a single axis. When released, the levers automatically
return to neutral, and the function stop.
Row of Local Control Valves at Rear of HPT
www.natoil.com
Page: 13 of 30
5.4 Normal Operation
5.4.1 Basic Starting and Stopping Procedure
Before starting the HPT, the operator must be familiar with the AC drive, and the trip
interlocks and shutdown conditions. He must also be aware of the hazards following
a trip of the AC drive during drilling. These hazards include (in case of lack of air
pressure/supply) uncontrolled reverse rotation upon release of back torque, and
back-off of tooljoints.
Preparations
• Starting point: The HPT to be suspended/connected to a hook or a travelling

block, tended to the wellcentre. The top drive to be properly aligned to well
centre – normally done fine tuning the position of the torque tube.
• All plugs & receptacles for: Service loops & Interconnection cabling between the
Control Station – the Operator Control Panel, the Plug Split Point in
derrick/mast, and at the Plug Board at the top drive – to be properly connected
and fastened.
• The Control Station Incoming cables to be properly connected/terminated.
• Verify proper gear oil in gearbox + hydraulic oil in HPU tank.
• Verify that the HPT has been lubricated according to the daily/weekly
maintenance schedule.
• Inspect the HPT to verify that it is ready for operation (no obstructions, the
umbilicals moving freely and in good working condition, no damage caused by
collision with other equipment, no maintenance going on, etc, etc).
• Verify that the ~7 barg rig air supply to the HPT is on.
• Verify that the air lubricator (A3) contains sufficient oil.
• Verify that isolation valve on pressure line is open.
• Verify that oil breather (at the HPU tank cover) is open.
• Verify that air ventilation plug on the gear box is open.
• At the main switchboard in the control house, preset the 2ea auxiliary circuit
breakers. (One circuit breaker is for the two blowers and the HPU motor.
• The other circuit breaker is for lightning, Air Conditioner, socket outlets, control
system etc).
• Activate the AC-drive, with switch on the main circuit breaker in the HPT control
house.
• If the start takes place in cold surroundings, special attention must be paid to the
gearbox lube oil system and the Hydraulic Power Unit. (Oil viscosity may be too
high to allow circulation that may result in damages top drive).
www.natoil.com
Page: 14 of 30
Starting
• Check incoming power to be on. (Normally from SCR-control station).

• Engage main circuit breaker
• Check Emergency Stop Switch to be off.
• Activate push button on operator control panel to ON.
• Check that blowers on AC motors starts.
• Set the speed throttle to zero (if not zero already).
• Acknowledge and remedy any HPT alarms.
• Push button for lamp test and verify illumination of all lamps on operator control
panel.
Activating the ON function, the following start-up sequence will take place:
• The AC-Drive runs through its startup sequence.

• The blower motors starts.
• The AC-Drive is enabled to start rotation of the AC-motors.
• The HPU motor is enabled to start.
• The HPT ON button turns steady light grey.
The following interlocks/inhibits will interrupt the startup sequence:
• Drill mode not selected on mode switch.

• Motor selected CW
• Motor selected CCW
• Activate mode button activated.
• Torque setting button activated.
• Torque increase button activated.
• Torque decrease button activated.
• Weight compensator button activated.
• IBOP close button activated.
• Brake off button activated.
• Pipehandler rotate to zero button activated.
• Open elevator button activated.
• Link tilt creep button activated.
• Link tilt forward switch activated.
• Link tilt backward switch activated.
• Pipehandler lock button activated.
• Grabber button activated
• Link tilt float button activated.
www.natoil.com
Page: 15 of 30
Operation
• The HPT now operates in ordinary drill mode. The drilling motors can be
operated by the speed throttle and switches & buttons as available in the drilling
motor field on the operator control panel. The different pipehandler functions can
be controlled by buttons & switches the pipehandler field on the same panel.
Continue at the one of the below procedures that describes the operation to be
carried out.
• In the case of disturbances, consult the Disturbance of Operation section later in
this chapter.
• It is recommended to deselect the HPT ON button when the drilling motors no
longer are needed. This saves wear the blowers, which otherwise runs
continuously.
Stopping
Normal stopping takes place as described below.
• Postulation: The HPT has been operated in normal drill mode. The main shaft is
disconnected from the string, and the pipehandler is unloaded (links straight
down).
• Verify that the speed is turned to zero.
• Rotate the pipehandler to the most convenient position (convenient for
maintenance, or just out of the way).
• Position the HPT at the preferred height (by the drawworks controls).
• Deactivate the drilling motors by deselecting the HPT ON keypad button. This
initiates the following shutdown sequence:
• The blowers stops (5 minutes delay)

• The HPU motor is dis-enabled from being started.
• The AC-drilling motors are dis-enabled from start rotating.
• The HPT ON button lamp switch off.
• For longer term shutdown, shut down the by switch off the main circuit breaker
as described in the AC-drive user manual
• Shut off the circuit breaker in the SCR station (that’s used for feeding the top
drive control station (AC-drive).
• Close the air valve inlet (normally a shut of valve at racking board level)
5.4.2 Stand Drilling
Stand drilling is assumed to be done by manual racking and use of rig tongs at
drillfloor. It is also assumed that a pneumatic elevator is installed.
www.natoil.com
Page: 16 of 30
5.4.3 Drilling with Stands
• Make sure the elevator is open and that pipehandler is returned to “Zero”.
• Push button for pipehandler “Close” and verify that the lamp start to illuminate.
• Check that preferred make-up torque set point is correct.
• Hoist the top drive to a couple of meters above racking board level. (A CCTV
system should always be installed at racking board level where top drives are
used).
• Derrick man to bring the top of the stand into the elevator and make sure the
latch is closing completely.
NOTE:
THE ELEVATOR MAY BE TILTED CAREFULLY FORWARD TO ASSIST THE
DERRICK MAN. IF SO – ALWAYS USE THE CREEP FUNCTION TO MINIMIZE
THE RISK OF HAZARD!
• Carefully hoist the top drive.

• Run the links to vertical by push button for “Float”.
• Drill crew on drill floor to carefully guide the lower end of the stand towards well
centre.
• When the stand is hoisted above the stick-up - start the “Spin-In function”. (The
weight compensating system will automatically be activated for 5 minutes).
• Carefully lower the block until the drill stand start to spin in. (Both the upper and
lower stand connection are spun in simultaneously. It’s important that the
drawwork lower the top drive a few inches fore to allow the vertical movement of
the spin in. (The weight compensating system will if needed, compensate for
6inches of vertical movement).
• When the spin in stops – Push button for grabber “ON”. Verify that lamp starts
illuminate.
• Switch to make up and push button for “Activate Mode”. Visually inspect the
“Make-Up Completed” lamp. The lamp will illuminate for 3 seconds after make
up set point is reached.
• If pneumatic elevator is used: Push button for open elevator, Switch off the link
tilt float function and run the links BWD – clear of the drill string.
• Push grabber “OFF”.
• Switch mode switch to drill.
• Hoist the block and remove the slips.
• If manual elevator is used: Hoist elevator to position for derrick man to open the
elevator. Switch off the link tilt float function and run the elevator BWD - clear of
the drill pipe.
• Open the IBOP and start the mud pumps.
• Start rotation by turning the speed potentiometer to preferred RPM.
• Lower the block and continue drilling.
• Check drilling torque set point to as preferred.
www.natoil.com
Page: 17 of 30
• When the stand is drilled close to drill floor – rotate the pipehandler 180deg.
Push button for Link Tilt BWD and run the bails + elevator out as far as possible.
NOTE: MAKE SURE NO PERSONAL ARE PRESENT WITHIN THE
OPERATION RADIUS OF THE ELEVATOR WHILE DRILL WITH THE LINK
TILT IN THIS POSITION.
• Drill down as far as possible.
• Stop rotation by reducing the speed pot.meter to zero.
• Hoist the block and set the slips so the stick-up is 3-4ft above drill floor.
• Lower the elevator back and stop it just behind the stick-up.
• Stop the mud pumps and close the IBOP.
• Push button for rotate to zero. Wait for lamp to illuminate.
• Push button for pipehandler lock. Wait for lamp to illuminate
• Push button for grabber ON. Wait for lamp to illuminate.
• Switch to Break-out and push button for Activate Mode. (weight compensating
system will automatically be activated).
• When the spin out is completed, push grabber OFF.
• Hoist the block to racking board for insertion of a new stand.
5.4.4 Tripping
Tripping in or out involves only the link tilt system of the HPT. On rigs with manual
racking system the operator and drill crew have to pay extra attention to the link tilt
movement. IT IS RECOMMENDED TO ADJUST THE LINK TILT CLAMP AS LOW
AS POSSIBLE ON THE ELEVATOR LINKS. BY DOING SO THE KICK-OUT
LENGTH CAN BE REDUCED TO MINIMUM, AND THEREBY MINIMIZE THE RISK
OF INJURE ANY OF THE CREW.
www.natoil.com
Page: 18 of 30
5.4.5 Support Procedures
5.4.5.1 Drill Mode Operation
Drill Mode
After Drilling Motor ON has been selected, the drilling motors automatically enter
drill mode. Drill mode remains as long as the selector is not being turned to another
mode. In order to start the drilling mode function the “ACTIVE MODE” mode button
must be activated and the lamp will illuminate.
If the mode selector switch is turned to another mode while drilling/rotation is going
on, the operating error alarm will be energized and the activate mode lamp will shut
off. The drilling mode function will remain as before attempt switching mode. If
pushing the alarm acknowledgement button without first turning the selector back to
drill the lamp will remain off. In order to make the lamp illuminate again the selector
switch must be turned back to drilling mode.
Pipehandling operations can be carried out while in drill mode.
In drill mode the drilling motors are controlled by the speed throttle (for setting main
shaft speed) and the torque setting switch/button (for setting the drill torque limit).
Before start rotation (by pushing the button “Activate Mode”) the speed throttle must
be in zero. The normal direction of rotation is CW (clockwise) when viewed from
above. The direction can be changed at zero speed only.
WARNING:
THE LUBRICATION PUMP WILL NOT PERFORM OIL CIRCULATION WHEN
ROTATING CCW. ROTATING IN CCW DIRECTION MUST BE DONE FOR
SHORT PERIODS ONLY.
WARNING:
IF POSSIBLE, DON’T TURN THE SPEED THROTTLE QUICKLY DOWN TO
ZERO DURING DRILLING. RAPID ZEROING CAUSES THE DRILLING MOTOR
MOMENT OF INERTIA TO TRY STOPPING THE ROTATION OF THE
DRILLSTRING, AND THERE WILL BE A RISK OF THE STRING TOOLJOINTS
BACKING OFF.
Never rotate the main shaft when the load in the link hanger is more than ca. 10
tonnes. The spring washer packages of the torque arrestors will then be
compressed, and the load is transferred through the split collar to the main shaft.
Shaft rotation in this condition causes significant wear. (The load in the link hanger
includes links, elevator and the load in the elevator.)
www.natoil.com
Page: 19 of 30
Spin-in Mode
After stabbing in, the pipe connection can be spun in by operating the drilling
motors. The motors are programmed to a fixed speed and torque in Spin-In mode =
40RPM # 3000ft.lbs.
The back-up can be obtained by using rig tongs (for spinning in singles or stands at
drill floor level), or by using the back-up grabber on the top drive if spinning in top
drive connections only.
Makeup Mode
After the pipe connection is spun in by the drilling motors (as described above), a
natural continuation is to make up the connection by the same motors. This is done
by:
• Switch from Spin-In to Make-Up. The activate mode lamp will start flicking.
• If not already done - Adjust the torque limit to the makeup torque recommended
by the pipe manufacturer.
• Push button for “Activate Mode”. The lamp will illuminate and the top drive
motors will make-up the connection to the torque set point as preset. (Speed is
fixed at 20RPM). When the torque set point is reached the “Make-up Completed”
lamp will illuminate for 3 seconds and the torque will automatically return to zero.
• The mode switch to be turned to drill mode for enable to start drilling operation.
Breakout Mode
After completed a drilling sequence (I.e drilled down a stand), the pipe connection
can be broken out by using the drilling motors. The breakout is normally always
done by using the grabber as back-up.:
• Push button for rotate to zero. Wait for lamp to illuminate.

• Push button for pipehandler lock. Wait for lamp to illuminate
• Push button for grabber ON. Wait for lamp to illuminate.
• Switch to Break-out and push button for Activate Mode. (Weight compensating
system will automatically be activated).
• The top drive will break the connection and reverse out at a fixed speed
(=20RPM). The top drive is programmed to automatically give maximum break-
out torque.
• When the spin out is completed, push grabber OFF.
• Switch to next mode for further operation.
www.natoil.com
Page: 20 of 30
5.4.5.2 Using the Air Brake
The Airflex type air brake consists of an air-actuated brake unit at the non-drive end
of each drilling motor. It is engaged (turned on) and disengaged by a push botton.
They are designed for static locking of the main shaft only!.
The shaft speed shall be zero or near zero when the brake is engaged, or it will be
subject to wear and possible damage.
WARNING:
THE AIR BRAKES ARE CONNECTED TO BE “FAIL SAFE” WHICH MEANS
THAT THE BRAKES AUTOMATICALLY WILL BE ENGAGED IN CASE OF PLC
POWER LOSS AND/OR ACTIVATION OF THE EMERGENCY STOP.
The air brake must be off when free rotation of the main shaft is required, such as
during makeup/breakout by the torque wrench, during tripping, and during
positioning of heavy loads by the pipehandler.
WARNING:
IN A CRITICAL SITUATION, SUCH AS DURING UNCONTROLLED REVERSE
ROTATION, THE OPERATOR MUST BE AWARE OF THE RISKS OF APPLYING
THE AIR BRAKE.
WARNING:
THE AIR BRAKE MUST BE OFF DURING SPIN-IN, MAKEUP AND BREAKOUT
OPERATIONS
www.natoil.com
Page: 21 of 30
5.4.5.3 Releasing Trapped Back Torque in Drillstring
When back torque is trapped in the drillstring during drilling, the torque can be
released in one of the following ways:
1) Torque Release through the bottom hole assembly
• Before stopping the string rotation of the drill string, hoist the block up and down
a few feet to clean the hole. Adjust the speed to zero and let the torque be
released at the bottom of the drill string.
2) Torque Release by the Top Drive Motor Controls
• Stop the string rotation by setting the speed throttle to zero.

• If the speed potentiometer is turned completely to zero the trapped torque will
carefully be released through the top drive AC-system. All trapped energy will be
“burned off” over the breaking resistor.
• If necessary turn directional switch to zero. The drilling motors will the be free
from any torque.
3) Torque Release if AC Drilling Motor Blackout
If the drilling motors or the AC-drive for some reason black out during drilling, the air
brake automatically be applied. The trapped back torque will then be locked in the
drill string.
If possible – release the trapped torque via the bottom hole assembly.
If possible – restart the AC-Drive and enable the top drive in drill mode + CW
direction. Check drilling torque set point to be equal as before the blackout.
Carefully adjust the speed potentiometer out of zero. The torque will be re-built and
the brake can be released without risk of uncontrolled back-spin.
www.natoil.com
Page: 22 of 30
5.4.5.4 Using the Pipehandler
Pipehandler Rotation
The entire pipehandler can be rotated 360 degrees CW or CCW by its rotating
head. The rotation is on a continuous basis, and independent of the main shaft
rotation. You can rotate manually to an arbitrary position, or activate a sequence
that rotates to the pre-selected position (= Zero Pos). The operation “Rotate to Zero
Position” can be interrupted by activating the rotate switch or push the rotate to zero
button once more.
Free rotation of the pipehandler is allowed if it is subject to external forces or torque,

and hydraulically actuated rotation is not performed.
When the load in the link hanger (weight of links, elevator and load in elevator)
exceeds ca. 10 tonnes, the spring washer packages of the torque arrestor will be
compressed, and the load is then carried by the main shaft. Before rotating the
pipehandler in this condition, the main shaft must be preset for “0” zero direction..
(The shaft rotates freely when the speed potentiometer is turned completely to zero,
and the air brakes and the grabber is off.)
Tilting the Elevator Links
The links can be tilted forwards or backwards by the link tilt BWD/0/FDW switch.
There are two options for the movement speed.
By pushing “Creep” the movement speed will reduced to only 10% of the normal
speed as tilting with the creep function of.
WARNING:
THE LINK TILT CREEP FUNCTION IS RECOMMENDED TO BE USED ALWAYS
IN OPERATIONS WHERE MANUAL ELEVATOR ASSISTANCE IS NEEDED.
If the Link Tilt FLOAT button is activated the links will return to vertical every time
the selector switch is release.
If the float function is of the link locking mode will be active. The elevator and links
will then remain where they are when the selector switch is released.
If the link tilt system becomes overloaded during hoisting the block with links tilted
out of vertical, they will automatically be pulled to vertical position.
CAUTION:
THE LINK TILT IS NOT DESIGNED TO WITHSTAND LATERAL STRESSES OR
LOADS IN UPWARD DIRECTION WHEN TILTED FORWARD OR BACKWARD.
www.natoil.com
Page: 23 of 30
Kick-out Clamp Position

Feet Millimeter Inches Millimeter
1 305 41 1040
2 610 43 1100
3 915 46 1160
4 1220 48 1220
5 1525 50 1280
Table Showing Elevator Clamp Positioning Relative to the Lower Link Eye
(for a Set of 108” Elevator Links:
1 ft Kick-out
www.natoil.com
Page: 24 of 30
2 ft Kick-out
3 ft Kick-out
www.natoil.com
Page: 25 of 30
4 ft Kick-out
5 ft Kick-out
www.natoil.com
Page: 26 of 30
5.4.5.5 Elevator Operation
The HPT is prepared for operation with a pneumatic elevator. Elevators are
normally supplied by others, and detailed installation and operating instructions
must be sought in the user manuals from the elevator suppliers. The following
general instructions apply for the use of each type of elevator:
Pneumatic Elevator
The pneumatic elevator closes automatically when a new pipe hits the local trigger
mechanism correctly.
The elevator is opened, and the pipe released, by double-pushing the ELEVATOR
OPEN button. This initiates 5 seconds of air supply to the elevator, which normally
is sufficient to open it. After the opening the air supply solenoid valve is de-
energized, and the elevator is kept open by its trigger mechanism. Correct opening
and closing must always be confirmed visually, as there is no feedback status signal
from the pneumatic elevator.
WARNING:
ALWAYS ENSURE THAT THE PIPE IS PROPERLY GRIPPED OR SECURED BY
OTHER EQUIPMENT BEFORE OPENING THE ELEVATOR! NO INTERLOCK
PREVENTS INADVERTENT OPENING.
If a casing spider elevator with local actuation is used, a continuous air supply to the
elevator can be arranged by connecting a hose directly from the service loop
incoming air hose (quick connection) to the spider elevator.
5.4.5.6 Changing from One Drillpipe Size to Another
When changing drillpipe size, the operator should be observant of the following:
Saver Sub: Verify that the existing saver sub is suitable for the new size, and
change the sub if necessary. See the main shaft assembly drawing.
Make-Up Torque Setpoint: The makeup torque setting must be adjusted to tooljoint
size to be used.
www.natoil.com
Page: 27 of 30
5.4.5.7 Installing Elevator Links on Link Hanger
• Starting point: No links are installed on the link hanger.

• Rotate the pipehandler to a suitable position for the link installation, and lower
the HPT to the drillfloor.
• Remove upper bolt in locking arms and lower the locking arm to horizontal.
• Select and bring the preferred pair of elevator links. The minimum length of
elevator links to be installed is (96”).
• Frequently grease the contact surfaces of the elevator links and the link
hangers with grease.
• Hoist the first elevator link in a balanced horizontal position to link hanger level,
using a utility winch and a suitable sling.
• Manoeuvre the hole of the elevator link onto the link hanger.
• Secure the elevator link to the link hanger by closing the locking arm, and re-
install the bolt.
• Lower the sling until the elevator link hangs freely (straight-down) from the link
hanger, and remove the sling.
• Install the second elevator link in the same way as the first one.
Catalogue Extract from Elevator Link Manufacturer
www.natoil.com
Page: 28 of 30
5.4.5.8 Operation of the IBOPs
The main shaft is equipped with an upper and a lower IBOP (kelly valve). The upper
IBOP is remote operated from operator control panel. A yoke & sleeve mechanism
operated by an air cylinder provides rotation of a key – resulting internal ball to
rotate 90 degrees for opening/closing of the valve. The air cylinder is actuated by
two air solenoid valves located on a manifold at the rear of the HPT. No status
feedback signal is returned from the IBOP.
In open mode the solenoid is active for 5 seconds after activating of the “Open”
button. In closed mode the solenoid is energized continuously and cylinder
pressurized until the open sequence is repeated.
The lower IBOP can only be opened manually by using a supplied 22 mm Allen
key/wrench directly on the valve stem. The torque required for closing the valve is
ca. 50 Nm. The key is for emergency and maintenance/service use. If necessary the
upper IBOP can also be opened/closed by the Allen key.
5.4.5.9 Using Wireline Conveyed Explosives
When the HPT is supplied with a standard gooseneck, the top of the gooseneck will
include a 2 ¾” BSPP plug for wireline entry into the well.
In case wireline shall be ran through the gooseneck, a wear bushing is

recommended to be mounted in the tapped hole to prevent wear of the threads. A
wireline guide must be arranged above the gooseneck.
When wireline conveyed explosives are entered via an electrically driven HPT, the
wireline sheaves will be close to the electrical system of the HPT. Unless the HPT
first is completely isolated electrically, there will then be a risk of premature
detonation of the explosives.
WARNING:
ISOLATE THE HPT ELECTRICALLY BEFORE ENTERING WIRELINE
CONVEYED EXPLOSIVES.
www.natoil.com
Page: 29 of 30
5.5 Disturbance of Operation
If the equipment does not function as intended, consult the below sub-sections.
Reference is also made to the Fault Finding guide in the Maintenance chapter.
5.5.1 Dealing with Alarms
Alarms are generally to be dealt with as described in the user manual by the
supplier of the operator stations. The setpoints of the HPT alarms are listed in
chapter 2.
When an alarm is activated, the operator must evaluate the situation and act so that
risk and damage is minimized. Also see the remedies recommended after an
emergency stop (at the beginning of the chapter).
After a motor temperature high alarm, or a low gearbox oil pressure or level alarm, it
is important that the HPT is shut down as soon as possible. If possible the shutdown
should be in a normal manner, using the ordinary operation controls. The cause
must then be examined and remedied. If the operations continue with one these
alarms on, there is an increasing risk of flashover, sparks, total destruction of
motors or gearbox, and uncontrolled stop of the HPT.
5.5.2 Trip of Power to the Drilling Motors
If the power to the drilling motors is tripped during drilling, the effect on the HPT is
the same as if the emergency stop was activated. See the Emergency Stop section
for description and recommended action.
5.5.3 Drilling Motors Cooling Failure
Each drilling motor is air cooled by a blower. The blowers are automatically
switched on when the HPT is switched on (see the Basic Starting and Stopping
Procedure), and run until the HPT is shut down. If a blower stops due to blower
motor failure, the alarm “Blower Loss” will be activated.
www.natoil.com
Page: 30 of 30
5.5.4 Gearbox Lubrication Failure
The conditions under which a gearbox oil/lubrication alarm will be activated are
specified in the Alarm and Setpoint Schedule in chapter 2. If an oil temperature or
oil pressure alarm is activated, the following insight will help the operator to remedy
the fault correctly:
The gearbox is lubricated by a combination of oil bath and forced lubrication. The
main trust bearing, lower bearings on the main shaft and pinion shafts are placed in
the oil bath. Lubrication of the upper bearings of the main shaft and pinion shafts
are provided by an oil pump that feeds gear oil through the lube oil circuit. The
circuit includes an oil filter, pressure gauge, pressure switch, temperature
transmitter, cooling fan motor, and oil cooler. The oil pump is directly driven by one
of the high speed pinions, while oil cooler fan is driven by the lube oil pressure line.
The pump speed (oil flow) is symmetric with the drilling motor speed, and rotating at
slow speed over longer time may result in lack of lubrication. A relief valve bypasses
the oil cooler when the pressure drop across the cooler exceeds 0.25 MPa (2.5
barg), which may happen at a cold start and when the filter element has grown
clogged. After reaching normal operating temperature, ca. 70 oC, the oil pressure
should be ca. 0.2 MPa (2 barg).
5.6 Training Program for Operators
Training programs are available from National Oilwell as required, but subject to
separate agreement and described separately.
www.natoil.com
User Manual No.: T3035-Z-MA-001
Equipment: 1
Page: 1 of 74
CHAPTER 6
MAINTENANCE
Chapter 6: Maintenance
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 2 of 74
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6 MAINTENANCE ................................................................................................................ 4
6.1 Safety Summary ..................................................................................................... 6
6.2 Routine Inspections ................................................................................................ 7
6.3 Periodic Maintenance Schedule.............................................................................. 8
6.3.1 Routine Field Inspections & Maintenance Data Sheet ................................. 8
6.3.2 Periodic Field Inspection & Maintenance Data Sheet ................................ 12
6.3.3 Critical Load Inspection Data Sheet........................................................... 17
6.3.4 Disassembly Inspection Data Sheet .......................................................... 21
6.4 Periodic Maintenance Procedures ........................................................................ 25
6.4.1 Lubrication ................................................................................................. 25
6.4.2 Changing the Gearbox Oil ......................................................................... 34
6.4.3 Changing Gearbox Oil Filter Element ........................................................ 36
6.4.4 Changing the Hydraulic Oil ........................................................................ 37
6.4.5 Changing Hydraulic Oil Filter Element ....................................................... 38
6.4.6 Analyzing Quality of Hydraulic and Gearbox Oil ........................................ 39
6.4.7 Wash Pipe Maintenance ............................................................................ 40
6.4.7.1 Removal and Installation of Wash Pipe .................................................. 41
6.4.7.2 Dismantling, Inspection and Reassembly of Wash Pipe ......................... 42
6.4.8 Drill Stem Maintenance (IBOP w/ Hydrallock)............................................ 44
6.4.8.1 Disassembling the Drill Stem .................................................................. 45
6.4.8.2 Reassembling the Drill Stem................................................................... 48
6.4.8.3 Adjusting the Remote IBOP Actuator ...................................................... 51
6.4.9 Testing the Drill & Makeup Torque Calibration .......................................... 52
6.4.10 Verifying the X-dimension ........................................................................ 53
6.4.11 Verifying Alignment of Wash Pipe ............................................................ 55
6.4.12 Removal & Inspection of Split Collar ........................................................ 56
6.4.13 Tightening the Bondura Bolts................................................................... 57
6.4.14 Bolt Torque and Locking Devices ............................................................ 58
6.5 Corrections and Minor Repairs ............................................................................. 59
6.5.1 Venting the Hydraulic System .................................................................... 59
6.5.2 Replacing Hydraulic Hoses ........................................................................ 59
6.5.3 Changing Dies in Grabber ......................................................................... 60
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 3 of 74
6.5.4 Adjusting the Weight Compensator ........................................................... 61

6.5.5 Replacing Disc Spring Packages in Rotating Head ................................... 63
6.5.6 Changing Upper Seals of Main Shaft......................................................... 65
6.6 Major Repairs and Modifications ........................................................................... 66
6.7 Fault Finding ......................................................................................................... 66
6.8 Storage and Preservation ..................................................................................... 72
6.9 Special Tools ........................................................................................................ 74
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 4 of 74
6 MAINTENANCE
This chapter gives maintenance instructions for the top drive. In the different
sections the top drive is also frequently referred to by the HPT abbreviation, which is
a short version of the type code (see chapter 2).
It is recommended that a Maintenance Log be established for this equipment. All

maintenance, abnormal observations and repairs should be logged. Upon request,
the log should be made available for the National Oilwell service personnel.
A number of procedures are made more precise by referring to drawing position

numbers, often in parenthesis: Examples: (03) or (pos 03). The position numbers
are shown at the drawings and the belonging parts lists (in chapter 10). The drawing
referred to is generally the one listed after the section headline. Where more than
one drawing is listed, the text will clarify which drawing the position number belongs
to.
API RP 8B (Recommended Practice for Procedures for Inspection, Maintenance,

Repair and Remanufacture of Hoisting Equipment) has served as a guideline during
the preparation of the maintenance program. The objective of API RP 8B is stated in
its section 1, pt 1.1: “The objective of this publication is to provide users of hoisting
equipment manufactured under API 8A & API 8C means whereby inspection and
maintenance procedures may be applied and followed to assure integrity of the
equipment”. From this standard the following four types of inspection are
recommended:
 Routine Field Inspection: The routine field inspection is an inspection that shall
be done while the equipment is in operation and on a regular basis. In practise
this means visual inspections & lubrication routines only.
 Periodic Field Inspection: The periodic field inspection is to be carried out while
the drilling rig is "on-the-job" shutdown - and periodically, typically on a 90-120
days interval - or as special circumstances may require. So, what does this
mean? Nobody can do such inspections every 3-4 months, but is this really what
is meant? Depending on the operating conditions, any type of operations
executed, the operators must decide themselves what interval that should be
used. E.g: If the top drive has been used for "light" type of drilling, or down hole
motor has been used, the interval can be extended. Furthermore, if service jobs
like pressure testing, cementing, logging etc. are done, the interval can be
extended.
 Critical Load Inspection: The critical load inspection does not involve any
intervals, but should be considered necessary if rough top hole jarring or rough
pulling on stuck pipe is executed. Depending on the severity of the jarring/
pulling, the amount of inspection must be determined by the drill crew
management. If not so rough, visual inspection is enough. If very rough, visual +
MPI inspection should, where applicable, be executed on load carrying parts.
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 5 of 74
 Disassembly Inspection: The disassembly inspection is normally executed when

the rig in going through a re-classification. The top drive is recommended to be
shipped onshore and fully dismantled, inspected, overhauled, and tested. All
load carrying parts will be NDE-inspected.
Conclusion: The periodic field inspection frequency of load carrying parts is much
depending on the executed drilling process/stress. As typical we recommend NDE
inspection of API threaded connections, LS-shaft, split collar, elevator links, and link
hanger ears. Also visual inspection of gearbox + bail should be done without
dismantling the top drive. Practical inspection intervals for the Periodic Field
Inspection should be +/-12 months. (If special circumstances allow, the bail pins
should be dismantled and checked together with the gearbox and the travelling
block pin hole areas). Further periodic inspection requiring full dismantling should be
extended to rig classification = +/-60 months intervals.
The below maintenance data sheets (in the next sections) combine the inspection of
load exposed components and regular maintenance for sub-assemblies at intervals
given in API RP 8B. If the intervals specified don’t fit the actual rig program, the
operator and owner of the top drive is to adjust the intervals and scope of work
accordingly. Severe deviation to the recommendation will affect the warranty plus
the operability of the machine.
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 6 of 74
6.1 Safety Summary
The following types of safety message may appear in various sections of this
chapter:
WARNING: Must be observed to prevent serious injury.

CAUTION: Must be observed to prevent damage of equipment and/or loss of
operating effectiveness.
NOTE: Must be observed for correct and efficient operation.
It is the responsibility and duty of all personnel involved in the operation and
maintenance of this equipment to fully understand the SAFETY measures, by which
hazards are reduced or eliminated. Personnel must become thoroughly familiar with
all aspects of safety and operation of the equipment before starting any operation or
maintenance.
The following points sum up the safety aspects related to maintenance:
 Keep the machinery clean! Machinery full of dirt is difficult (or impossible) to
inspect for indication of defects that may result in hazardous situations.
 Only qualified personnel are allowed to carry out maintenance and fault finding.
 Only the prescribed maintenance may be carried out by user. Anything else
must be approved by the National Oilwell LCM department before carried out.
 All adjustable valves set and sealed by the supplier are not to be adjusted by
user without approval and guidelines from the manufacturer.
 Dropped objects are potential killers. Make sure that no loose objects (tools or
equipment) are dropped from or forgotten on the top drive.
 The main circuit breaker in the control station to be shut off and isolated before
any jobs involving moveable or rotating parts starts. NOTE: The hydraulic power
unit is powered from the same breaker.
 Isolate the top drive from the air supply, either by disconnecting the quick
connector on the top drive, or (if installed) close the isolation valve in derrick.
 The onboard power unit generates a pressure up to 250 barg (3600 psig). Make
sure that the pressure is thoroughly vented before hydraulic pipes/hoses or filter
bowls are unscrewed.
 In the case of a fire, be aware that hydraulic oil is flammable. The combustion
point is ca. 200 Deg. C. Oil fog is highly flammable!
 Beware of the risk of pipe/hose burst. If anyone gets hydraulic oil into the eyes
or open wounds, wash at once with lots of fresh water. Consult a doctor if
necessary.
 Hydraulic oils and lubricants may contain toxic additives that by repeated skin
contact or inhalation can be dangerous to your health. Study the safety data
sheets of the different compounds, and protect yourself as required.
 In case of making-up or breaking out drill stem connections by means of a rig
tong, always support the drill stem components in the rotary/slips.
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 7 of 74
 Bolts shall be properly secured by means of locking device after re-assembly.

Locking nuts that have lost their locking effect shall be replaced. Bolts locked by
split pins or locking wire shall be reinstalled with new wire or split pins.
 No welding of lugs, brackets etc. must take place on the equipment.
 Heat or excessive force must not be used to move a part, unless it is beyond
repair.
 Only original spare parts must be used.
6.2 Routine Inspections
The routine inspections are included in the Periodic Maintenance Schedule section.
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 8 of 74
6.3 Periodic Maintenance Schedule
6.3.1 Routine Field Inspections & Maintenance Data Sheet
The frequency of these inspections depends on the operation, but if practical the
inspections to be done daily.
Assembly Dwg Reference Description
General D1400-AXXX  Observe the top drive during

arrangement/ operation for indication of
assembly inadequate performance. Listen for
abnormal noise or vibration.
 Check visually for any sign of
hydraulic or gear oil leakage.
 Grease items according to the
Lubrication section.
 Keep the machinery clean.
Hydraulic system D1400-HXXXX  Check visually for signs of hydraulic

or gear oil leakage.
 Check visually the HPU oil tank
level, and refill if necessary.
 Run the grabber on/off a couple of
times to create oil flow for visual
inspection of clogging indicator. (If
the needle turns to red while
running the function, the filter
element should be replaced
soonest.)
Electrical system D1400-EXXXX  Push Lamp Test button on operator

control panel. Check that all buttons
with lamp are lit.
 Check Control Station according to
description in separate manual.
 Check the temperature inside the
AC Control Station (To be < +30°C/
+86°F)
 Check air conditioner unit for proper
operation.
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 9 of 74
Service loop D1401-AXXXX  Check visually for external

damages.
 Check plugs & receptacles for
proper installation.
Torque tube D1402-AXXXX  Check visually tightening of the

bolts & nuts keeping the sections
tensioned. Retighten if necessary.
Gearbox & motor D1410-AXXXX See sub-assemblies

assembly
Suspension system D1411-AXXXX  Check visually that all bolts &

fasteners are secured with wire or
split pins – acc. to assembly dwg.
Weight D1412-AXXXX  Check visually that all bolts &

compensating fasteners are secured with wire or
system split pins – acc.to assembly dwg.
 Check visually chains with
accessories for proper installation.
Water course D1413-AXXXX  Ref. general arrangement/assy.
Gearbox D1414-AXXXX  Check visually the gearbox oil level,

and add oil if necessary:
 Check oil filter indicator for clogged
filter. (At cold days/low oil
temperatures, the filter indicator
may pop up even without filter
being clogged. Then push the
indicator back in and check again
when the oil temperature exceeds
+ 40 deg C.
AC motors D1415-AXXXX  Ref. general arrangement/assy.
Parking brakes D1416-AXXXX  N/A
Motor cooling D1418-AXXXX  Check visually that the air inlet

system/blowers filters are free from dust and large
particles. If necessary clean by
brush.
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 10 of 74
Drill stem & IBOP D1419-AXXXX  Check visually that expansion

screws on Hydrallock rings are fully
extended and that the teeth are
fully engaged.
Onboard HPU D1420-AXXXX  See description of hydraulic

system.
Torque carriage/ D1421-AXXXX  Check visually that all bolts &

wheel brackets fasteners are secured with wire or
split pins – according to assembly
drawing.
Pipehandler D1430-AXXXX  See sub-assemblies
Rotating head D1431-AXXXX  Check visually that all bolts &

fasteners are secured with wire or
split pins – according to assembly
drawing.
Link hanger D1432-AXXXX  Check visually opening between

link hanger and rotating head to be
equal around the body. (If not a
disc spring package is damaged
and must be repaired ASAP.)
Drilling further ahead may result in
severe damage!
Link tilt system. D1433-AXXXX  Check position of elevator link

clamps. (The clamps to be equally
positioned on both links.)
 Check position of the clamps in
respect of operation going on. If the
bolts are not tightened properly the
clamps may creep on the link rod –
resulting in unexpected kick-out.
Torque column D1434-AXXXX  Ref. general arrangement/assy.
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 11 of 74
Back-up grabber D1435-AXXXX  Inspect quality of dies. If severely

worn – replace.
 Check rubber funnel for damage.
 Check grabber compensators (gas
springs) by measuring spacing
between grabber body and funnel
support plate.
IBOP actuator D1436-AXXXX  Check that rollers rotate properly as

system rotation of the sleeve.
 Check locking of the lever arm.
Ref. general Ref. general  Ref. general arrangement/assy.

arrangement/assy. arrang./assy.
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 12 of 74
6.3.2 Periodic Field Inspection & Maintenance Data Sheet
The periodic field inspection & maintenance activities are to be carried out at the
intervals specified below for each activity. The intervals are:
M: Monthly maintenance
3M: 3-monthly maintenance
Y: Yearly maintenance
These activities are then additional to the activities specified above at the Routine
Field Inspections & Maintenance Data Sheet.
Note that due to lack of spacing, the periodic field inspections and maintenance are
recommended to be performed while the top drive is placed in the cradle (not
connected to the hook/block). If not, due to limited access, the top drive must be
placed vertically in the transport cradle and pulled forward/out and away from the
torque tube. If needed – it also has to be disconnected from the hook/block - before
the job can take place.
General D1400-AXXX  (Y) Replace all grease nipples once

arrangement/ a year.
assembly  (6M) Run a check through the
Commissioning test procedure and
verify operation acc. to description.
 (6M) Verify that makeup & drilling
torque readouts are correct.
Hydraulic system D1400-HXXXX  (3M) Check oil cleanness. Oil

samples to be sent to a laboratory
for verification oil water content and
contamination. Quality to be in acc.
to NAS Class 8 or better.
 (6M) Visually inspect quality of
compensator at suction inlet.
 (Y) Replace breather filter.
 (Y) Perform a pressure test of all
hydraulic lines/ports and check for
leaks.
 (Y) Change oil in reservoir.
 (Y) Change return line oil filter
insert.
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 13 of 74
Electrical system D1400-EXXXX  (3M) Inspect all interconnection

cables for damages. If damages on
jackets – repair by use of heat-
shrinkable tubing or similar.
 (6M)Check for damaged electrical
plugs and receptacles. If damages,
replace with new ones.
Service loop D1401-AXXXX  Ref. Routine Inspections.
Torque tube D1402-AXXXX  (3M) Check visually flanges along

the torque tube sections for
damage.
 (3M) Grease the torque tube
flanges (where the wheels are
running) by use of standard grease
or pipe dope.
 (3M) Check visually the suspension
chain system.
 (3M) Check visually the safety
chain between the sections for
correct installation.
 (3M) Retighten all bolts between
sections.
 (3M) Retighten all bolts in the
torque transfer beam system.

assembly
Suspension system D1411-AXXXX  (6M) Check visually the bail for sign
of wear and cracks.
Weight D1412-AXXXX  Ref. Routine Inspections

compensating
system
Water course D1413-AXXXX  (3M) Perform pressure test of the

mud line & S-pipe system according
to rig practice or every 3rd month,
whichever comes first.
 (6M) If the mud hose is frequently
disconnected from the S-pipe,
replace seal in hammer lug union.
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 14 of 74
Water course D1413-AXXXX  (6M) If the gooseneck plug

frequently is disconnected/used,
replace the O-ring
 (Y) Perform NDE check of the S-
pipe and gooseneck for verification
of wall thickness due to wash-out /
erosion.
Gearbox D1414-AXXXX  (M) Inspect the elastic buffers in the

motor couplings. Replace if sign of
wear.
 (M) After first time start-up, change
oil after 500 hours of operation.
 (3M) Unscrew the air vent plug and
clean it free from mud & dirt.
 (6M) Oil samples to be taken from
the gear oil reservoir and sent to a
laboratory for verification of water
content and possible
contamination.
 (6M) Perform NDE inspection of the
main shaft pin.
 (Y) Perform NDE inspection of split
collar and mating grooves in the
main shaft.
 (Y) Change gear oil once a year or
every 5000 operating hours,
 (Y) Change gear oil filter element.
 (Y) Unscrew the two inspection
covers at the back side of the
gearbox. Inspect gear wheels for
sign of wear or damage.
(Y) Check sign of wear of tapered
roller thrust bearing by measuring
the X-dimension.
 (Y) Unscrew and clean gear lube oil
orifices. NOTE: The orifices/
throttles are calibrated to oil flow
rate as calculated for each bearing.
It is therefore important to re-install
them back into their original
location.
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 15 of 74
AC motors D1415-AXXXX  Ref. Routine Inspections.
Parking brakes D1416-AXXXX  (Y) Disassemble the blowers and

air brakes from top of the motors.
Check visually the brake shoes.
Inspect brake drum for rust. Verify
drum diameter to be more than
353 mm (13.90 inches).
 NOTE: Never apply air pressure to
the brakes without being mounted
over the drum.
Motor cooling D1418-AXXXX  (M) Disassemble the blowers from

system/blowers top of the motors. Take out the filter
inserts and clean them with soap
and water.
 (6M) Replace the filter inserts.
Drill stem & IBOP D1419-AXXXX  When overhauling the IBOP valves,
perform visual inspection of threads
and the hex crank area. Grind/
remove any burr from tong dies.
 Perform pressure test according to
rig specification or once a month,
 (6M) Perform MPI inspection of drill
stem threads.
 (6M) Perform MPI inspection of
hex. crank area.
 (Y) Perform NDE inspection of split
collar and mating grooves on main
shaft.
Onboard HPU D1420-AXXXX  Ref. deescription of hydraulic

system.
Torque carriage/ D1421-AXXXX  (Y) Measure diameter of the main

wheel brackets rollers.
New OD = 155 mm (6.1 inches)
Minimum OD = 150 mm
(5.9 inches).
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 16 of 74
Pipehandler D1430-AXXXX See sub-assemblies
Rotating head D1431-AXXXX  (6M) Check visually the slew ring

bearing
 (Y) Replace all four disc spring
packages.
Link hanger D1432-AXXXX  (6M) Perform MPI inspection of link

hanger ears.
Link tilt system. D1433-AXXXX  Ref. Routine Inspections
Torque column D1434-AXXXX  (3M) Retighten Bondura bolts

according to sub-vendor
specification.
Back-up grabber D1435-AXXXX  (3M) Replace rollers on centralizer

ring.
 (6M) Replace rubber funnel.
 (6M) Replace gas springs.
 (Y) Disassemble the sleeve locking
plates and inspect the vertical keys.
IBOP actuator D1436-AXXXX  When the sleeve is removed from

system the upper IBOP – inspect actuator
finger.
 (3M) Replace ball bearings/rollers.
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 17 of 74
6.3.3 Critical Load Inspection Data Sheet
Note that the amount of inspection depends on the toughness of the pulling/jarring.
User/operator to decide if NDE shall be executed, or if visual inspection is sufficient.
General D1400-AXXX  Run the top drive at no load and

arrangement/ check for vibrations and abnormal
assembly noise.
 Run through all pipehandler
functions and check the operability.
 Check for mud, gear oil, hydraulic
oil, or air leaks.
 Check visually the complete
machine with accessories and
check for damage and loose
components.
Hydraulic system D1400-HXXXX  Check for leaks.

 Retighten all hydraulic hoses.
Electrical system D1400-EXXXX  Check “onboard” cables for

damage.
 Check covers on junction boxes.
 Check “onboard” cables and
receptacles. If loose, tighten up.
 Check for loose cables in glands,
and tighten up if necessary.
Service loop D1401-AXXXX  Check service loop support flanges

versus jackets. Check for rifts.
Torque tube D1402-AXXXX  Inspect top suspension flange with

treaded rods, back-up plates, and
suspension shackles.
 Check each connection between
sections. Verify that no connections
have “opened”. If needed – replace
bolts & nuts.
 Inspect torque transfer beam for
loose bolts and nuts.
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 18 of 74

assembly
Suspension system D1411-AXXXX  Inspect bail lugs and bow for sign of
cracks. If severe jarring, perform
NDE of the same areas.
Weight D1412-AXXXX  N/A

compensating
system
Water course D1413-AXXXX  Check painting to see whether the

S-pipe has crept in the clamp. If
needed, reposition the S-pipe.
 Inspect mud hose safety clamp and
chain.
Gearbox D1414-AXXXX  Inspect area around bail pins.

 Pull and inspect bail pins.
 If severe pulling/jarring has been
done, perform NDE. Check end
hole area for bail pins plus on-bail
pins.
 Inspect threads on main shaft. If
needed check by NDE.
AC motors D1415-AXXXX  Inspect opening between coupling

halves to be more than 4 mm
(0.15 in). If not, the motor(s) has
crept down from its original position
and must be re-positioned to
correct level. Ref motor assembly
drawing for details.
Parking brakes D1416-AXXXX  N/A
Motor cooling D1418-AXXXX  Check visually ducts and blowers

system / blowers for deformation.
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 19 of 74
Drill stem & IBOP D1419-AXXXX  If severe pulling/jarring has been

done while the top drive was
connected to the drill string via the
drill stem, perform MPI inspection of
all drill stem sub connections/
threads. Also perform MPI
inspection of the IBOP crank area.
 If severe pulling/jarring was been
done by pulling via the elevator,
perform MPI inspection of split
collar and mating grooves, and
perform MPI inspection on the
elevator link eyes.
Onboard HPU D1420-AXXXX  Ref. general arrangement/assy.
Torque carriage/ D1421-AXXXX  Ref. general arrangement/assy.

wheel brackets
Rotating head D1431-AXXXX  Ref. general arrangement/assy.
Link hanger D1432-AXXXX  If severe pulling/jarring was been

done by pulling via the elevator,
perform MPI inspection of link
hanger ears.
 Perform visual inspection all over
the link hanger surface, and check
for cracks or deformation.
Link tilt system. D1433-AXXXX  Check position of elevator link

clamps. (The clamps to be equally
positioned on both links.)
 Check position of the clamps in
respect of operation going on. If the
bolts are not tightened properly, the
clamps may creep on the link rod,
resulting in unexpected kick-out.
Torque column D1434-AXXXX  Retighten the Bondura bolts

according to sub-vendor
specification.
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 20 of 74
Back-up grabber D1435-AXXXX  Inspect front suspension chain.

 Inspect centralizer ring rollers.
 Check spacing between underside
of grabber body and top of guide
funnel plate to be 75 mm (+/-5 mm)/
3 in (+/- 0.2 in). If less, the gas
spring(s) are damaged and must be
replaced.
IBOP actuator D1436-AXXXX  Check rollers.

system  Check locking of the lever arm.
 Check actuating finger.
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 21 of 74
6.3.4 Disassembly Inspection Data Sheet
Observe and record any indication of wear or poor performance. It is essential for
National Oilwell as vendor to be aware of any items that may have long delivery
time, or require special planning in order to minimize the overhaul time.
Many activities listed in the disassembly inspection require the presence of a

National Oilwell service engineer. The job may also have to be done in a suitable
workshop where relevant tools and lifting devices are available.
General arrangement/ D1400-AXXX  After completion of the overhaul,

assembly perform a complete run-trough of
the commissioning test procedure,
including pressure test of all
pressure exposed components.
 Repaint as applicable.
Hydraulic system D1400-HXXXX  Replace all hydraulic hoses.

 Replace seals as described in sub-
assembly descriptions.
Electrical system D1400-EXXXX  Check for damage on junction

boxes. Replace damaged junction
boxes.
 Replace any cables with severely
damaged jackets.
 Check for damage on plugs and
receptacles, and change where
damaged.
 Check if onboard cables and
receptacles are loose, and tighten
up if necessary.
 Check for loose cables in glands,
and tighten up if necessary.
Service loop D1401-AXXXX  Check jackets for damage.
Torque tube D1402-AXXXX  Perform an MPI inspection of all

section end flange welds.
 Replace top suspension shackles.
 Replace all bolts & nuts used for
assembling the vertical sections.
Inspect roller exposed areas for
wear.
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 22 of 74

assembly
Suspension system D1411-AXXXX  Sandblast the bail where needed,

and perform MPI inspection of lugs
and top bow. Repaint where
needed.
Weight compensating D1412-AXXXX  Replace seals in hydraulic

system cylinders.
 Replace cylinder bearings.
Water course D1413-AXXXX  Perform NDE check of the S-pipe

and gooseneck for verification of
wall thickness (due to wash out/
erosion).
 Replace all soft seals.
Gearbox D1414-AXXXX  The complete gearbox to be

disassembled and inspected
visually.
 Operator to decide whether
bearings shall be replaced.
 Replace soft seals.
 If worn, replace all wear rings.
 Perform NDE inspection of all
highly stressed areas.
 Replace elastic buffers in motor
couplings.
 Assemble and repaint as
necessary.
AC motors D1415-AXXXX  Replace bearings at drive end and

non-drive end. (See sub-supplier
documentation for details.)
 Inspect motor varnish/VPI
insulation.
Parking brakes D1416-AXXXX  Ref. periodic field inspection &

maintenance.
Motor cooling system/ D1418-AXXXX  Visually inspect ducts and blowers

blowers for deformation.
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 23 of 74
Drill stem & IBOP D1419-AXXXX  If necessary, replace seal kit or rep
kit in IBOP.
 Check quality of threads & surface
of the drill stem components.
Replace if significant wear or
damages.
Onboard HPU D1420-AXXXX  Repeat periodic field inspection &

maintenance.
 Open the tank and clean internally
by means of thinner or similar.
Torque carriage/wheel D1421-AXXXX  Replace all torque & side rollers.

brackets
Rotating head D1431-AXXXX  Disassemble the complete unit.

Clean all parts and inspect for wear
& damage.
 Inspect swivel inner sleeve
(diamond coating) for wear. If
necessary, provide new coating or
new inner sleeve.
 Inspect slew ring bearing. Open the
bearing and inspect the rollers.
 Replace seal kit and slydrings in
swivel.
 Replace all stud seals and back-up
rings.
 Replace all disc spring packages.
 Replace seal kit in locking cylinder.
 After re-assembly, perform
pressure test of each hydraulic line
through swivel. (While performing
the pressure test, it is essential that
one line is pressurized at a time,
while the neighbouring lines are
kept open in both ends (at
atmosphere pressure).)
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 24 of 74
Link hanger D1432-AXXXX  Perform MPI inspection of link

hanger ears, middle part, and split
collar support face.
 Repaint as necessary.
Link tilt system. D1433-AXXXX  Replace seal kit in hydraulic

cylinders.
 Replace cylinder bearings.
 Inspect elevator link clamps for
cracks.
Torque column D1434-AXXXX  Replace Bondura bolts.

 Inspect roundness of holes for
grabber bolt.
Back-up grabber D1435-AXXXX  Disassemble the grabber and

inspect all parts for wear and
damage.
 Inspect front suspension chain.
 Replace centralizer.
 Replace gas springs.
 Replace dies.
 Replace rubber funnel.
 Replace seal kits in cylinder.
IBOP actuator system D1436-AXXXX  Replace cam rollers.

 Replace the actuating finger.
 Replace seal kit in pneumatic
cylinder.
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 25 of 74
6.4 Periodic Maintenance Procedures
6.4.1 Lubrication
This section describes the lubrication of the top drive. The location of the lubrication
points are shown at the below illustrations, and the belonging lubricates and
intervals are listed at the next page. Note that some lubrication points have more
then one grease nipple.
Lubrication Points on Top Drive

www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 26 of 74
LP1 WHEEL BRACKET 12 off Grease nipple Texaco Multifak EP2 1g X

LP2 BACK UP GRABBER 10 off Grease nipple Texaco Multifak EP2 2g X
LP3 WASH PIPE 1 off Grease nipple Texaco Multifak EP2 X
LP4 GEAR BOX SEALS 1 off Grease nipple Texaco Multifak EP2 2g 3M
LP5 ROTATING HEAD 1 off Grease nipple Texaco Multifak EP2 20g X
LP6 IBOP ACTUATOR 2 off Grease nipple Texaco Multifak EP2 1g X
LP7 GEAR OIL 1 off Oil level Texaco Synlube CLP 150 180 l X (5000)
LP8 DRIVE MOTOR 4 off Grease nipple Chevron SRI-2 28g X
LP9 IBOP PNEUMATIC CYLINDER 2 off Grease nipple Texaco Multifak EP2 1g X
Lubrication Schedule
The following codes are used in the lubrication schedule:
D: Daily maintenance
W: Weekly maintenance
M: Monthly maintenance
Y: Yearly maintenance
2Y: 2-yearly maintenance
H: Maintenance on running hours basis (if this comes before periodic
maintenance interval)
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 27 of 74
Oil & Grease Conversion Chart
Lubrication codes:
1 Hydraulic oil
2 Synthetic gear oil
3 Synthetic grease for gear box seals and motor / gear coupling
4 Grease for open gears, slew pinions
5 Grease for lubrication of general applications
6 Grease for assembling purposes
7 Air lubricator
Brand 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
BP Energol SHF 32 Energol Energrease Energrease OG Eneergrease
SGXP 150 GSF MM-EP 2
ELF Hydrelf 32 Syntherma P Statermelf Elferna 430W Epexa 2 Epexa MO 2
Olna 32 125 EP2 Cardrexa DC1 Epexa MO2
EXXON Univis HP 46 Beacon 352 Surret Fluid 4K Beacon EP2
Nuto H 32
ATF Dexron
FINA Hydran HV 32 Persane S 53 Marson L Caberline 1630 Marson EPL 2 Bimax 70
Super CaberlineFl.
MOBIL Mobil DTE 13M Glygoyle 22 Mobilith SCH Mobiltac 81 Mobilux EP 2 Mobil DET 21
Mobil DTE 15M 1500
SHELL Tellus T 37 Tiwela WA Tivela Cardium EP fl. H Alvania R3
Compound A Malleus fluid C Alvania EP2
Calithia EP2
TOTAL Azollo 32-46 Cortusa SY Aerogrease ENS EP 700 Multis EP2 Spacis EC
Equivis 32-46 150 22 Specis EC
TEXACO Rando HDZ 32- Synlube CLP Multifak EP2 Rando
46 150 HDZ 15
KLUBER Stabuags
NBU 30 PTM
The below photos show some of the lubrication points in greater detail.
Lubrication Point LP1: Grease Nipples on Wheel Brackets

www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 28 of 74
LP2: Grease Nipples on Grabber. Side View
LP2: Grease Nipples on Grabber. Top View
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 29 of 74
LP2: Grease Nipples on Grabber. View from Below
LP3: Grease Nipple on Wash Pipe

www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 30 of 74
LP4: Grease Nipple on Gearbox (Lip Seals)
LP5: Grease Nipple on Rotating Head
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 31 of 74
LP6: Grease Nipples on IBOP Sleeve & Actuator
LP7: Unscrew Vent Plug Before Filling Gear Oil
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 32 of 74
LP7: Level Glass on Gearbox
LP8: Upper Grease Nipple on AC Motors
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 33 of 74
LP8: Lower Grease Nipple on AC Motors
LP9: Grease Nipples on IBOP Pneumatic Cylinder
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 34 of 74
6.4.2 Changing the Gearbox Oil
The gear oil must be changed when the conclusion from the laboratory analysis
(see the maintenance schedule) is negative, or every 5000 running hours or yearly,
whichever comes first. The oil type and quantity is specified in the lubrication chart.
It is recommended to change the oil while it is warm. If the oil level falls below the
lower line on the oil level glass, oil must be topped up to the upper line while the
drilling motors are shut down. Change the oil as follows:
 Lower the top drive to near drillfloor level.

 Shut down & isolate main circuit breaker in the AC control station.
 Bring an empty barrel and place it below the gearbox.
 Verify that the oil drain valve is shut, and unscrew the drain plug downstream of
the valve.
 Connect a drain hose between the drain valve and the barrel. Open the valve
and drain until the oil stops flowing. Then close the valve and remove the hose.
Reinstall the drain plug.
 Connect the drain hose to the ¼” BSP port (in lower gearbox flange) for
drainage of the lower bearing area. Drain until the gearbox is empty. Then close
remove the hose and reinstall the drain plug.
 Clean the area around the gearbox air vent plug, and unscrew the vent plug.
 Bring a barrel with fresh oil of the specified type, and connect a clean filling hose
between the barrel pump and the vent plug hole.
 Add oil to the gearbox until the upper level mark on the gearbox is reached.
Then remove the hose and reinstall the vent plug.
 Restart the top drive and run the gearbox for a while. Then stop and check the
oil level. Add more oil if required.
Gearbox Oil Drain Valve

www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 35 of 74
Lower Bearing Drain Plug
Air Vent Plug Installed (To Be Installed Before Top Drive Operation)
Standard Plug Installed (To Be Installed Before Transport)

www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 36 of 74
6.4.3 Changing Gearbox Oil Filter Element
An oil filter is installed in the gear oil circulation line, between the oil cooler and the
gearbox housing. The filter has a local pressure drop indicator of the “pop-up” type.
As the filter grows clogged, the pressure drop across it increases, and at a preset
pressure drop the red-colored indicator pops up. If the warning is neglected, the oil
will increasingly bypass the filter in unfiltered condition, which significantly increases
the wear of the gearbox bearings & gear wheels.
The filter element must be changed when it is clogged or at the intervals specified in
the maintenance schedule, whichever comes first. The following points should be
noted during the change:
 Before the filter bowl is loosened/unscrewed, shut off and isolate the relevant
circuit breaker.
 Have a bucket placed underneath the filter bowl.
 Carefully unscrew the bowl. (Note: The bowl might be extremely slippery and
caution must be taken to avoid dropping.)
 After the old element is removed, check it for abnormal contamination.
 Install a new element of the original type, along with any new seal rings supplied
with it. (Note: Be carefully when re-entering the bowl. The fine threads must be
100% aligned when entering. If not, the bowl might be stuck and the threads
damaged).
 Attach a note to the filter, stating date of change.
 Check the element inventory, and order spare elements as required.
Gearbox Oil Filter

www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 37 of 74
6.4.4 Changing the Hydraulic Oil
This section describes how to change the hydraulic oil in the HPU tank. Due to lack
of space, all HPU maintenance must be performed while the top drive is removed
from the hook and placed vertically in the transport frame/cradle.
Draining the Tank
 Make sure that all hydr. cylinders are in retracted position before the oil change.
 Make sure the HPU is stopped, and relevant circuit breaker shut off and isolated.
 Place an empty barrel beside the top drive.
 Connect a drain hose to the ball valve at the bottom of the tank.
 Open the drain valve and drain the oil into the barrel. Then close the valve.
Filling the Tank
 Open the breather filter on top of the HPU tank.

 Add oil through the opening in the filter until the tank is filled to the top of the
level gauge. National Oilwell recommends Texaco Rando HDZ 46 type hydraulic
oil. The cleanness of the oil must minimum be according to NAS 1638 Class 8.
 After the filling, open the hose to drain connection "T air" on the HPU pump.
Vent here until oil starts coming out. Make sure that all air is evacuated from the
pump housing. The pump will then be completely oil filled and ready for restart.
HPU Pump, Here Shown with Shaft Down

www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 38 of 74
6.4.5 Changing Hydraulic Oil Filter Element
An oil filter is installed in the hydraulic return line to the onboard HPU, and located
at the HPU tank top. The filter has a local clogging/pressure drop indicator of the
“pressure gauge” type.
As the filter grows clogged, the pressure drop across it increases, and at a preset
pressure drop the pointer passes from green to red. If the warning is neglected, the
oil will increasingly bypass the filter in unfiltered condition, which significantly
increases the wear of the hydraulic components.
Top of HPU, with Filter and Filter Clogging Indicator
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 39 of 74
The filter element must be changed when it is clogged or at the intervals specified in
the maintenance schedule, whichever comes first. The following points should be
noted during the change:
 Before the filter bowl is loosened/unscrewed, make sure that the HPU is
stopped.
 Shut off and isolate the relevant circuit breaker.
 After the old element is removed, check it for abnormal contamination.
 Install a new element of the original type, along with any new seal rings supplied
with it. Wet the seals with clean hydraulic oil before reinstallation.
 Attach a note to the filter, stating date of change.
 Check the element inventory, and order spare elements as required.
It is recommended to perform the filter replacement through a rig move, when the
top drive is placed in the cradle (not connected to the hook/block). If not, due to
limited access, the top drive must be placed vertically in the transport cradle and
pulled forward (out and away from the torque tube) before the job can take place.
6.4.6 Analyzing Quality of Hydraulic and Gearbox Oil
2-monthly or every 500 running hours, whichever comes first, the quality of the
hydraulic oil and the gearbox lube oil must be analysed by a laboratory as follows:
 While the HPT is shut down, drain a sample of the gearbox oil into a clean
bottle.
 Have the oil sample analysed by a laboratory.
 Compare the result with the product data sheet from the oil manufacturer. If the
result is negative, the oil must be changed soonest. The focus of the analysis is
on the following irregularities:
 Water content. The maximum allowed water content is 0.8 %.

 Viscosity. Has the viscosity changed since the last analysis?
 Metallic particles. Significantly increased particle content may indicate wear
of the reduction gear, and shall soonest be brought to the attention of
National Oilwell LCM dept.
 Other contamination.
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 40 of 74
6.4.7 Wash Pipe Maintenance
The wash pipe is the link between the mud circuit’s stationary parts and its rotating
parts, and thus subject to wear. It is composed of a central pipe with an upper and a
lower nut. The nuts have a number of packings inside. The lower nut is rotating with
the main shaft, while the upper nut and the central pipe are fixed to the stationary
gooseneck.
The wash pipe must be inspected at regular intervals (see the maintenance
schedule), and the packings changed when mud starts leaking out of the pipe. The
packings are changed by removing and dismantling the wash pipe as described
below. An even better alternative is to keep a spare and fully assembled wash pipe
with fresh packings in stock at all times. When the rig operations allow it, before the
wash pipe starts leaking, the complete pipe assembly can be replaced very quickly.
The worn pipe can then be maintained in the workshop without causing rig
downtime.
Wash Pipe Installed on Top Drive
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 41 of 74
6.4.7.1 Removal and Installation of Wash Pipe
Remove the wash pipe as follows:
 Lower the top drive to the drillfloor.

 Shut down the top drive (isolate the main circuit breaker) and the mud pumps.
 Vent the mud circuit pressure.
 Clean the area around the wash pipe.
 Use a sledge hammer and a rod to loosen lower and upper wash pipe nuts.
Note left hand threads!
 Unscrew the nuts, raise the lower nut and lift out the wash pipe assembly from
the gearbox housing.
After the maintenance (see the next section), reinstall the assembled wash pipe as
follows:
 Manipulate the complete assembly into position on the gearbox low speed shaft/
gooseneck mating face. Be careful not to loosen the two O-rings.
 Using a sledge hammer, tighten the upper and lower hammer nuts until contact.
 Perform a pressure test and check for leaks.
Cross Section of Wash Pipe
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 42 of 74
6.4.7.2 Dismantling, Inspection and Reassembly of Wash Pipe
Dismantling
 Starting point: The wash pipe has been removed from the top drive.
 Remove the O-rings from the nuts.
 Place the wash pipe on the floor in upright position. Place your feet on the lower
nut and pull the upper nut with the central pipe free from the lower nut.
For Lower Nut:

 Unscrew and remove the grease nipples.
 The packing assembly is held in position by a lock screw. Unscrew the screw
3-4 mm, or as much as needed to unlock the packing assembly.
 Push the packing assembly out of the lower nut. In order to ease the
reassembly, it is recommended to observe closely the way the assembly is
stacked (see also the drawing).
 Separate each part of the packing assembly. Place the loose parts in a row,
where each part is placed between its original neighbors.
For Upper Nut:

 The upper end of the central pipe has a toothed slot with a (steel) snap ring that
locks the pipe to the upper nut. Using a screwdriver, tilt the ring out of the slot,
and pull the central pipe out of the upper nut.
 Push the packing assembly out of the upper nut. In order to ease the
reassembly, it is recommended to observe closely the way the assembly is
stacked.
 Separate each part of the packing assembly. Place the loose parts in a row,
where each part is placed between its original neighbors.
Cleaning and Inspection
 Clean all dismantled parts thoroughly, one at a time, and return them to their
place among the dismantled parts.
 Inspect each part for wear, damage and corrosion. Pay special attention to the
condition of the central pipe and its slot at the upper end. The pipe is subject to
wear, but must not be changed as often as the packings.
 If wear caused by misalignment is observed, check the alignment of the wash
pipe versus the main shaft as described in separate procedure.
 Replace all worn or damaged parts with new parts of the original type. The
(identical) packings shall be changed every time the wash pipe is dismantled.
 Clean and inspect the ends of the mud circuit that face the wash pipe.
 Clean and inspect the mud circuit deflector, located just below the wash pipe. If
damaged, replace the deflector.
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 43 of 74
Reassembly
 Grease all wash pipe parts before reassembly, using a thin layer of good quality
grease. Also grease the mud circuit threads, on which the wash pipe nuts later
will be entered.
For Upper Nut:

 Insert the central pipe into the upper nut, and lock the pipe to the nut by
returning the snap ring to the toothed slot.
 Reassemble the upper nut packing assembly. Fill all hollow spaces in the
assembly with grease.
 Enter the upper nut packing assembly onto the central pipe from the lower nut
end. (The upper nut packing must not be entered from the easier upper end
because the teeth of slot then tend to damage the packing.) Entering the
assembly in this opposite-of-normal direction is simplified by entering the
assembly in the normal direction on a spare pipe, then turning the spare pipe,
and sliding the assembly from the spare pipe into the central pipe. After the
assembly is slid onto the central pipe, knock it properly into position in the upper
nut.
For Lower Nut:

 Reassemble the lower nut packing assembly. Fill all hollow spaces in the
assembly with grease. (It is for guiding purposes recommended to reassemble
the packing assembly on the lower end of a spare pipe, and leave it there until
the assembly is inserted in the lower nut.)
 Insert the packing assembly in the lower nut. Make sure that the holes for the
grease nipples are aligned.
 Tighten softly the lock screw that keeps the lower nut packing assembly in
position.
 Reinstall the grease nipples.
For Completion:
 Place the lower nut on the floor in upright position, and insert the central pipe
(with the upper nut) into the lower nut. The weight of the operator is sufficient to
insert the pipe. Go on inserting until the lower end of the central pipe hits the
floor.
 Refit the O-rings in the upper and lower nut (one ring per nut).
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 44 of 74
6.4.8 Drill Stem Maintenance (IBOP w/ Hydrallock)
The drill stem consists of one saver sub plus two IBOPs (kelly cocks), all individually
locked for preventing accidental breakout. The saver sub (like the name says) saves
the IBOP threads from being damaged through insertion of new drill stand. It also
acts as a crossover between the treads in the lower IBOP and the drillpipe size
used. (Saver subs are available with all kinds of “pin down” connections.)
The IBOPs are mud shut-off valves installed in extension of the main shaft. The
upper IBOP is remote operated, and the lower IBOP is manually operated (by a
supplied Allen key). The valves are described in the IBOP sub-vendor literature in
chapter 3.
It is recommended that the IBOPs be inspected and maintained in accordance with

the maintenance schedule. The manufacturer also recommends workshop
maintenance of the valves each time they are removed from the string, after each
well drilling, after corrosive fluids have been mixed into the mud while drilling, and
before storage.
All the drill stem connections are prevented from accidental breakout by a locking
device named Hydrallock. A Hydrallock ring set consists of two toothed rings and
four screws, that together with the specially machined drill stem/sub shoulders
provides a safe, simple, and reliable locking mechanism.
Hydrallock Rings
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 45 of 74
6.4.8.1 Disassembling the Drill Stem
A: Removal of Saver Sub
 Lower the top drive to drillfloor, and remove the elevator.

 Disconnect the link tilt cylinders from the elevator link clamps.
 Remove the elevator links from HPT.
 Screw all 4 screws in the Hydrallock rings (between the saver sub and the lower
IBOP) all the way in.
 Pull the upper ring half down so it collapses with lower ring. (Make sure the
upper teeth are free from grooves in upper IBOP).
 Push the link tilt Float button.
 Place the special grabber lifting tool underneath the grabber (see photo). Make
sure the end flanges are pointing downwards.
 Manually extend the link tilt cylinder rods and push the link tilt eyes over the
lifting tool pins.
 Push link tilt Hold button and carefully activate link tilt BWD. (It is recommended
to do this by operating the lever/stick on the main control valve).
 When the cylinders are “tightened”, and the weight of the grabber is suspended
via the cylinders, remove split pin and nut, and pull out the grabber bolt by
means of the puller.
 Carefully hoist the grabber to a level where the dies match the tool joint of the
saver sub.
 Install grabber bolt and nut.
 Release the cylinder pressure to float mode (by pushing the link tilt Hold button).
 Push Grabber On and switch to Breakout. Push Activate Mode and watch the
saver sub being broken out and spun out.
 Switch to Drill for stopping the spinout.
 Place a catcher under the grabber before pushing the Grabber Off. If the saver
sub doesn’t fall down, unscrew the remaining threads by hand.
Grabber Lifting Tool

www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 46 of 74
Grabber Bolt Puller
B. Removal of Lower IBOP
 Leave the lifting tool suspended by the link tilt cylinders.

 Run IBOP “Close”.
 Screw all 4 screws in the Hydrallock rings (between the the two IBOPs) all the
way in.
 Pull the upper ring half down so it collapses with lower ring. (Make sure the
upper teeth are free from grooves in upper IBOP.)
 Push the link tilt Hold button, and carefully activate link tilt BWD. (It is
recommended to do this by operating the lever/stick on the main control valve).
 When the cylinders are “tightened” and the weight of the grabber is suspended
via the cylinders, remove split pin and nut, and pull out the grabber bolt by
means of the puller.
 Carefully hoist the grabber to a level where the dies match the tool joint of the
lower IBOP.
 Install grabber bolt and nut.
 Release the cylinder pressure to float mode (by pushing the link tilt Hold button).
 Push Grabber On and switch to Breakout. Push Activate Mode, and watch the
IBOP being broken out and spun out.
 Switch to Drill for stopping the spin out.
 Place a catcher under the grabber before pushing Grabber Off. If the IBOP
doesn’t fall down, unscrew the remaining threads by hand.
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 47 of 74
C: Removal of the Upper IBOP
 Release the pressure in the hydraulic cylinders by pushing the link tilt Float
button.
 Pull out the cylinder ears and turn the lifting tool upside/down.
 Push the cylinder ears back on the lifting tool.
 Push the link tilt Hold button, and retain the cylinder pull.
 Run IBOP Open.
 Close the air supply (by separating the air hose quick connectors).
 Disassemble the IBOP lever arm from the column/IBOP sleeve.
 Unscrew the four bolts on the IBOP sleeve.
 Remove the IBOP back-up plate, shim, and key. The sleeve will fall down to the
grabber as soon as the key is pulled out!
 Lower the IBOP sleeve down to the grabber.
 Pull out the grabber bolt and lower the grabber by pushing the link tilt FWD
button.
 When free from the upper IBOP, remove the sleeve.
 Hoist the grabber to a level where the dies match the tool joint of the upper
IBOP.
 Install the grabber bolt and nut.
 Release the cylinder pressure to float mode (by activating the link tilt Hold
button).
 Push Grabber On, and switch to Breakout. Push Activate Mode, and watch the
upper IBOP being broken out and spun out.
 Switch to Drill for stopping the spinout.
 Place a catcher under the grabber before pushing Grabber Off. If the IBOP
doesn’t fall down, unscrew the remaining threads by hand.
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 48 of 74
6.4.8.2 Reassembling the Drill Stem
It is important that the IBOPs and the saver sub are made up to different torque
values, decreasing from top down. This is to ensure that when dismantling the subs,
only the desired one really breaks out.
For each locking ring set, make sure that the four screws run all the way in until the
heads are in touch with the ring.
A: Mounting Upper IBOP to Main Shaft
 Place the upper IBOP on the drill floor with the pin end down. Have a ring set
collapsed and manipulate them over the box end. Note: The 17th ring to point
“down” towards the upper IBOP body and the 18th ring to point “up” toward the
drill stem (main shaft).
 Set the makeup torque set point to 60000 ft-lbs.
 Manually spin the upper IBOP box into the drill stem pin.
 When the threads are engaged with the main shaft, hoist the grabber to correct
position, install the grabber pin, and run a spin-in sequence.
 When the spin-in torque is reached, run a makeup torque sequence until the
Makeup Completed lamp confirms 60000 ft-lbs makeup torque.
 Push Grabber Off. Pull out the grabber pin and lower the grabber.
 Lift the upper locking ring, and check whether the upper ring teeth mesh the
teeth in the drill stem.
 If the upper ring teeth don’t match the main shaft teeth, lift both rings together
and rotate/turn until the teeth match in both IBOP and drill stem. (Due to the
spreading + shape of the teeth, the locking rings will fit within max. 1 turn
(360 degrees).
 Screw out the four screws until the upper ring teeth fully mesh the teeth in the
IBOP. All four screws to be fully extended and tightened to approximately 25 Nm
(20 ft-lbs).
 Place the sleeve back on the grabber and hoist the grabber to position for
mounting the sleeve to the IBOP.
 Manipulate the key into the valve hex-groove. Mount wear and thrust plate.
 Install the IBOP lever arm.
 Activate the IBOP Close valve and visually verify completely closed valve. (If not
completely closed, adjust according to procedure.)
 Maintain the IBOP closed through the next step.
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 49 of 74
B: Mounting Upper IBOP to Main Shaft
 Place the lower IBOP on the drill floor with pin down: Have a ring set collapsed
and manipulate them over the box end.
 Manually spin the upper IBOP box into the drill stem pin.
makeup completed lamp confirms 55000 ft-lbs make-up torque.
 Lift the upper locking ring and check whether the upper ring teeth mesh the teeth
in the drill stem.
spreading + shape of the teeth, the locking rings will fit within max. 1 turn
(360 degrees).
(20 ft-lbs).
 Lower the grabber.
 Open the IBOP.
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 50 of 74
C: Mounting Saver Sub to Lower IBOP
 Push the grabber bolt in at lowest connection, pull out the cylinder eyes and turn
the lifting tool upside down (end flanges to point upwards).
 Place the saver sub on the drill floor with pin down: Have a ring set collapsed
and manipulate them over the box end.
 Manually spin the saver sub box into the drill stem pin.
Makeup Completed lamp confirms 50000 ft-lbs makeup torque.
 Lift the upper locking ring and check if the upper ring teeth mesh the teeth in the
drill stem.
spreading + shape of the teeth, the locking rings will fit within max. 1 turn ( 360
degrees).)
(20 ft-lbs).
 Lower the grabber.
 Install grabber bolt with crown nut and split pin on lowest position.
 Push for link tilt Float button.
 Disconnect and remove the lifting tool and puller.
 Install elevator links & elevator back onto the top drive.
 Mount the cylinder eyes back onto the elevator link clamps.
 The top drive is now ready for operation.
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 51 of 74
6.4.8.3 Adjusting the Remote IBOP Actuator
The actuator of the remote operated (upper) IBOP shall be adjusted so that the
valve closes and opens fully. Intermediate positions must not occur, as this will
rapidly cause erosion and reduced reliability. For maximum service life the actuator
must be inspected and tested regularly, and after repairs that may have affected the
adjustment.
Testing and Adjusting the Valve Open/Close Position
When the IBOP is fully and correctly open, the pneumatic cylinder is extended and
the sleeve moved completely down until the key has turned the crank against the
internal stopper. The mark on the key is exactly parallel to the internal ball position.
Push the IBOP Open button on the control panel. The cylinder shall extend fully and
the cylinder pressure shall be released after 5 seconds. Use a flashlight and visually
look through the hole in the saver sub to verify that the ball is completely open.
Push the IBOP Close button on control panel. The cylinder shall retract fully and the
cylinder pressure shall remain continuous until the button is reactivated. Use a
flashlight and visually look through the hole in the saver sub to verify that the ball is
turned 90 degrees and the IBOP closed completely.
If the valve open position needs to be adjusted, loosen the lock nut (pos M11) at the
end of the cylinder rod, and remove the split pin (pos M04). Adjust the open/close
position by turning the cylinder rod. Then tighten the nut (pos M11), and reinstall the
split pin (pos M04). Test the new setting by closing and opening the IBOP a couple
of times. Grease the different parts as necessary.
Cylinder Lock Nut – used when

adjusting the lever arm & sleeve end
positions.
IBOP Actuator
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 52 of 74
6.4.9 Testing the Drill & Makeup Torque Calibration
In order to verify that both the drill torque and the make-up torque is correct and
according to specifications, a stall torque test must be executed according to
intervals described in the periodic maintenance data sheet.
The torque test to be done according to following steps:
 Make sure the top drive saver sub is properly tightened to a drill pipe.
 The drill pipe connected to the top drive to be landed in a rotary slips, with the
grabber positioned 5-8 ft above drill floor.
 Use a rig tong fixed to the drill pipe and tied back to a cathead or easy torque,
depending on the drill floor facilities.
 If necessary, have a load cell connected to the tie-back wire. (Typically the pull
will be 2000 – 10000 lbs.)
 When properly hooked up, adjust the set point (drilling or make-up) to
10000 ft-lbs, and carefully run a makeup or drilling sequence. (Through the
torque test it is of essential importance that rig tong and tie back wire has a 90
degrees angle.) Check corresponding figures between torque readout gauge
and load cell.
 Repeat for 20000 ft-lbs, and continue until the drill pipe rated makeup torque is
reached.
 In case of deviation of more then 10%, please contact nearest National Oilwell
office for further assistance.
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 53 of 74
6.4.10 Verifying the X-dimension
The “X-dimension” is the distance from the face of the main shaft to the machined
face on the gearbox. The original and exact as-born X-dimension of each HPT is
hard die stamped on the adjacent gearbox surface before the HPT leaves the
fabrication workshop. (On older machines it may be necessary to remove layers of
paint to read the original X-dimension.) The X-dimension is later measured at
regular intervals, and by following the deviations from the original X-dimension, one
can estimate the wear of the Timken T1120 main thrust bearing.
Verify the X-dimension as follows:
 Lower the unloaded HPT (no load in the elevator) to near drill floor level.
 Remove the wash pipe as described in a separate procedure.
 Measure, with an accuracy of 1/10 mm, the distance from the face of the main
shaft to the machined face on the gearbox.
 If the measurement differs from the as-born X-dimension, the result shall be
brought to the attention of the manufacturer.
 Reinstall the wash pipe.
X-dimension Reference Surfaces
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 54 of 74
X-dimension Stamp (Painted Over, Hard to See on Photo)
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 55 of 74
6.4.11 Verifying Alignment of Wash Pipe
Extraordinary wear of the wash pipe may be caused by the pipe no longer being
aligned with the main shaft. Check then the alignment according to the below
procedure, using a dial gauge. Contact National Oilwell LCM department if
realignment is needed.
 Starting point: The top drive is stopped and drilling motor directional switch
turned to 0. The wash pipe is removed from the mud circuit.
 Secure the dial gauge base on the lantern. (The “lantern” is the lantern-like
protective housing on top of the main shaft. The wash pipe is installed inside this
housing.)
 Focus the gauge on the top of the main shaft.
 Rotate the shaft 360 degrees, using rig tongs.
 During the rotation, observe the variations displayed on the dial gauge. The
maximum acceptable variation is 0.20 mm.
 Install and tighten the lower wash pipe nut (only) at its normal place in the mud
circuit. The nut shall have a full standard packing assembly inside.
 Secure the gauge base on the lower nut body, and focus the gauge on the upper
(gooseneck) mating face.
 Rotate the main shaft 360 degrees by use of a chain tong.
 During the rotation, observe the variations displayed on the dial gauge. The
maximum acceptable variation is 0.25 mm.
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 56 of 74
6.4.12 Removal & Inspection of Split Collar
The split collar is composed of two solid halves with an inner profile that fits the
recesses in the main shaft. The halves are kept in position by an outer thinner-
walled sleeve.
The split collar requires regular inspection (including MPI) as specified in the
maintenance schedule. Access to these main shaft components is gained as
follows:
 Dismantle the drill stem subs according to relevant description.

 Unscrew the six M12 screws.
 If necessary, use a screwdriver, and pull the outer sleeve loose from the inner
halves.
 Part the two halves, and take them down for inspection.
Split Collar (3 Black Parts)
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 57 of 74
Main Shaft Recesses for Split Collar
6.4.13 Tightening the Bondura Bolts
Two special heavy duty Bondura bolts are used for fixing the torque column to the
link hanger. The bolts are must be retightened at the intervals described in the
maintenance data sheets, and in accordance with the Bondura sub-vendor literature
attached in chapter 3. The bolt types are specified in the below table.
Position Quantity Supplier Item No. Bolt Specification
M02 2 96427 Bondura 6.6, 060, 270L-30.30, HRC
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 58 of 74
6.4.14 Bolt Torque and Locking Devices
The below table lists recommended torque values for bolts commonly used for
National Oilwell equipment (not for Bondura bolts). More precisely, the table applies
for steel bolts with hexagonal heads and course metric threads. The threads are
supposed to be greased/oiled before the tightening. If an equipment drawing
specifies another torque than the (general) table, the torque in the drawing applies.
If a bolt originally was locked by lockwire or split pin, the locking must be re-
established after the tightening.
Size Hot Dip Galvanized Phosphated
Grade Torque Nm Grade Torque Nm
M8 8.8 26 10.9 28
M 10 8.8 50 10.9 56
M 12 8.8 87 10.9 98
M 14 8.8 137 10.9 156
M 16 8.8 211 10.9 238
M 18 8.8 294 10.9 332
M 20 8.8 412 10.9 465
M 22 8.8 554 10.9 626
M 24 8.8 712 10.9 804
M 27 8.8 1028 10.9 1161
M 30 8.8 1402 10.9 1582
M 33 8.8 1894 10.9 1875
M 36 8.8 2440 10.9 2761
M 39 8.8 3135 10.9 3543
3/8” UNC 8.8 41 10.9 75
½” UNC 8.8 100 10.9 113
5/8” UNC 8.8 196 10.9 223
¾” UNC 8.8 345 10.9 381
1” UNC 8.8 826 10.9 937
1½” UNC 8.8 2836 10.9 3225
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 59 of 74
6.5 Corrections and Minor Repairs
6.5.1 Venting the Hydraulic System
Air trapped in the hydraulic system may cause jerky/spasmodic cylinder behaviour.
The remedy is to vent the hydraulic system by running the cylinders slowly between
the end positions several times. This forces the oil/air mixture back to the hydraulic
tank, where the air will be separated from the oil.
6.5.2 Replacing Hydraulic Hoses
If a hydraulic hose becomes worn or damaged, it must be replaced by a new hose

of the original type as follows.
 Clean the new hose by flushing it to NAS 1638, Class 8.

 Shut off and isolate the actual circuit breaker.
 Vent the hydraulic pressure by operating the controls until there is no response.
Confirm pressure ventilation by applying a test gauge to the nearest test point
(see the hydraulic flow diagram).
 Place a bucket under the old hose and carefully unscrew the hose.
 Clean the hose connections to prevent impurities from entering the hydraulic
system.
 Install the new hose. Avoid twisting of the hose during assembly. A twisted hose
is subject to stress that eventually may work loose the connections.
 Re-open the isolation valve and remove the warning sign.
 Vent trapped air from the hydraulic system as described in the section above.
WARNING:
DO NOT UNSCREW HYDRAULIC HOSES BEFORE THE PRESSURE HAS BEEN
THOROUGHLY VENTED!
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 60 of 74
6.5.3 Changing Dies in Grabber
The grabber has only one set of dies. The dies are subject to wear, and must be
changed when the gripper starts to slip on the tool joint through makeup or
breakout.
Change the dies as follows:
 Lower the top drive to drill floor.

 Shut off the main circuit breaker.
 Unscrew the die retainer screws and pull out the retainer plates.
 From the underside, use a thin rod or screw driver and knock the old die
upwards until its free from the groove.
 Clean the groove by a wire brush.
 Manipulate a new die into the groove.
 Mount retainer plate and screws.
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 61 of 74
6.5.4 Adjusting the Weight Compensator
The objective of the weight compensator is protecting the pipe threads from damage
when the top drive is connected to (and disconnected from) the drill string. The
compensator system achieves this by taking up the weight of the top drive via a set
of hydraulic cylinders, which are suspended between the bail and the hook (or
travelling block). When the system is correctly adjusted and functioning, the
maximum weight on the threads will be ca. 1 ton.
The weight compensation is activated automatically when any of the spin-in,

makeup or breakout modes are activated. The cylinders are then pressurized and
the rods will retract, attempting to lift the top drive bail off the hook.
Main Control Valve Block. The LS Pressure Setting Valves are the Ones to the left
under each Control Valve. Adjustment Shown for the Block’s Left Control Valve.
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 62 of 74
NOTE:
IF ADJUSTED CORRECTLY THE TOP DRIVE SHALL NOT BE LIFTED WITHOUT
FIRST BEING LANDED ON A DRILL PIPE STICKUP. THE VERTICAL TRAVEL IS
LIMITED TO THE STROKE BETWEEN THE TENSIONED CYLINDERS AND THE
REMAINING STROKE, NORMALLY 100-125 MM (4-5 INCHES).
The hydraulic cylinders are pressurized by the main control valve block. The
automatic timer pressurizes the cylinders as long the actual mode is running. Or if
operated separately from these modes; for 5 minutes.
The thread compensator is initially preset for a given hook-load, which includes the
basic top drive, links and the empty elevator. If the links and elevator combination is
altered, and this causes a significant change in the empty hook-load, the setting of
the compensator will have to be readjusted. There may also be other reasons for
the compensator getting un-tuned.
The compensator is adjusted as follows:
 Keep the drilling mode in Drill.

 Push the button for Compensating System Active (a 5-minutes timer will start).
 Adjust the load control setting to allow the cylinders to retract and lift the top
drive.
 Carefully reduce the pressure until the cylinders extend and lower the top drive.
 When the balancing point is reached, monitor the load sensing pressure at test
point LS1.
 Adjust the pressure down 5 to 10 bar below this pressure.
 Lock the control setting valve at this set point.
Test the weight compensation both when the top drive is at drill floor level and at
racking board level, in order to make sure of same cylinder function at both levels.
(The cylinders will normally retract easier at drill floor level than at racking board
level, due to the mud hose & service loop weights).
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 63 of 74
6.5.5 Replacing Disc Spring Packages in Rotating Head
The weight of the link hanger, link tilt, links, and elevator are in drilling operations
supported by four spring disc packages. These pre-tensioned spring packages keep
the link hanger lifted clear of the split collar, allowing continuous rotation of the main
shaft without interfering with the link hanger.
In tripping operations (when the load is transferred through the elevator, elevator
links, via the link hanger over to the split collar), these spring packages will be
compressed, and the weight will be transferred to the main shaft via the split collar.
Rotating the main shaft in this condition may cause severe wear of the load carrying
parts. If the spring washer packages collapse, they must be changed soonest.
The following inspection/measurement is used to decide if the spring washer

packages are suited for continued use: With no load in the link hanger, the distance
from the top face of the slew ring bearing to the underside of the rotating head top
flange shall be 10 mm +/- 2 mm. If the distance is longer, this is an indication that
the spring washer packages must be changed.
Disc Spring Package w/ Protection Cup

www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 64 of 74
Change the spring disc packages as follows:
 Lower the unloaded top drive to near drill floor level.

 Shut down all drilling systems and isolate the main circuit breaker in the AC
control station.
 Shut off the air supply to the top drive.
 Remove the elevator and the elevator links.
 Note: Never try to change more then one spring set at time.
 For the rod with damaged spring(s): Pull out the split pin.
 Unscrew the castle nut.
 Hold the spring housing up while the thrust washer and disc springs are
removed.
 Insert new disc spring set as described on the Rotating Head Assembly drawing.
(NOTE: It is of essential importance that the disc springs are installed as
double pairs, beginning with the concave side up)!
 Manipulate all springs in and push them up by means of the thrust washer.
 Install castle nut and tighten until no more rotation is possible (400 ft-lbs).
 Install split pin.
Repeat for next spring package.
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 65 of 74
6.5.6 Changing Upper Seals of Main Shaft
The upper seals of the main shaft are located on the gearbox, below the rubber
deflector at the underside of the wash pipe. Repeated low oil level in the gearbox
may indicate that the upper seals are leaking. Check this by inspecting the area
below the deflector. Leaking upper seals may also cause ingress of water in the
gear oil.
If the upper seals are leaking, they can be changed as follows:
 Lower the top drive to the drill floor and shut down & isolate the main circuit
breaker.
 Steam clean the area around and below the wash pipe, and remove the wash
pipe (as described in separate section).
 Remove the rubber deflector below the wash pipe.
 Remove the upper seal retainer ring and remove the seals from seal retainer
ring. Note the place/position of the seals, so that the new seals later can be
installed in the same way.
 Clean all parts thoroughly, and make sure that no contamination is present in the
upper bearing.
 Inspect the wear ring, and change it if necessary.
 Inspect the wear of the old seals, and replace them by new seals.
 Before reinstalling the seals, add a coat of sealing compound on the seal
retainer ring mating face against the gearbox.
 Add a coat of grease (the type specified in the Lubrication section) on the seals,
and install the new seals and the retainer ring. Make sure that the lips of the
seals are placed in the correct direction.
 Reinstall the deflector and the wash pipe.
 Grease the nipple on the seal retainer (see the Lubrication section). Continue
until grease starts flowing out from the upper lip seal.
Upper Lip Seals
Upper Lip Seals

www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 66 of 74
6.6 Major Repairs and Modifications
All major repairs and modifications must be discussed with and approved by
National Oilwell LCM Department before the work can start. The LCM Department
will involve National Oilwell design engineers as necessary, and a conclusive report
and proposal will be issued.
6.7 Fault Finding
In the case of malfunction, try the following remedies before contacting the National
Oilwell LCM Department:
Fault Remedy
 No function on operator control  Check incoming power to AC control

panel. station.
 Check that main circuit breaker in
Control Station is turned On.
 Check that auxiliary circuit breakers
(2 off) are turned on.
 Check that all plugs & receptacles
are properly tightened.
 Check that PLC is turned On.
 General pipehandler failure.  Check that Emergency Stop button is

reset (pulled/turned out).
 Check dedicated circuit breaker in
AC control house to be On.
 Check that the HPU motor starts
when activating a pipehandler
function.
 Check that HPU motor rotates in
correct direction.
 Check that the LS pressure
corresponds to specification on
hydraulic flow diagram..
 AC drive will not start.  Check incoming power.

 Ref trouble shooting / fault finding in
separate manual.
 AC motors will not start rotating  Activate mode button is not pushed.
(drill mode).  Speed potentiometer not out of zero.
 Air brake is On.
 Any of the alarms are still active.
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 67 of 74
Fault Remedy
Correct and retry.
 Abnormal noise from AC  Any objects interfere with the

motors while drilling. couplings? (Remove object).
 Motors bearings are not greased.
Add grease according to the
Lubrication section.
 Motor bearing failure. Replace
bearing soonest.
 Speed (RPM) is unstable or  Encoder failure. Replace encoder.

doesn’t correspond to settings.  Encoder signal failure. Check
terminations for loose leads.
 Spin-in sequence will not start.  Activate mode button not pushed.
 Air brake is On.
 Makeup sequence will not start.  Activate mode button not pushed.
 Makeup torque set point in zero.
 Makeup Completed lamp  Check light (by pushing the Lamp

doesn’t illuminate after Test button).
completion of makeup
sequence.
 Breakout sequence will not  Activate mode button not pushed.

start.
 Motor Temp High alarm active.  Clogged air inlet filters. Clean filters.
 Any of the blower motors rotate in
incorrect direction. Correct direction
as required for forward curved
blades.
 Air inlet ducts damaged. Repair duct.
 Air outlet ducts obstructed. Remove
obstruction.
 Too high ambient temperature.
Reduce to lower performance until
the weather becomes chillier.
 Abnormal noise from top drive  Disc spring package failure results in
while rotating. link hanger getting in contact with the
split collar. Replace spring package.
If severe damage/groove, contact
supplier.
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 68 of 74
Fault Remedy
 Abnormal noise from gearbox.  Mud deflector interferes with gear

box top cover. Correct position for
deflector.
 No oil in gearbox. Open drain valve
and verify.
 If no oil: Contact supplier.
 If some oil: Fill up to correct level.
 Damaged bearing: Contact supplier.
 Damaged gearwheel/tooth: Contact
supplier.
 Oil is leaking out of the  Air ventilation plug not mounted.

gearbox. Install air ventilation plug.
 Seal failure.
 For side or top covers: Loosen bolts
and add sealing compound (type
Hylomar SQ 32M or equivalent) until
correct seal is available and can be
replaced.
 For top cover: Replace lip seal.
 If leaking down main shaft: Contact
supplier.
 Sign of mud in gear oil  Damaged top lip seals: Drain the
(confirmed by laboratory) gearbox and perform cleaning/
flushing until the gearbox is clean
from mud. Change lip seals, filter
insert and add new gear oil.
 Wash pipe starts leaking within  Wash pipe not tightened properly
short operational time when installed. (Re-dress the wash
pipe and make sure the wash pipe is
100% tightened before reassume
drilling. Re-tighten after 2-3 hours
drilling.
 Wash pipe not greased. Grease
wash pipe according to instruction.
 Wash pipe seals radial  Wash pipe not tightened properly

lamination rifts. when installed. Make sure the wash
pipe is 100% tightened when re-
installed.
 The wash pipe is overgreased
through re-dressing not greased:
Grease wash pipe according to
dressing instruction.
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 69 of 74
Fault Remedy
 Wash pipe has radial grooves  The main shaft is misaligned/

within a certain part of the bearing failure. Contact supplier.
diameter.
 HPU will not start.  Lack of oil in HPU tank. Fill to correct
level.
 HPU oil too hot. Wait for oil to cool
down.
 Any functions on the operator control
panel are activated. Push button.
 Circuit breaker for HPU motor (in AC
control station) not On.
 LS signal (hydraulic) from valve
block to pump not correctly
connected. Connect hose from LS2
port on valve block to PL port on
pump.
 HPU motor is running but  Shutoff valve between pump and

enabled function remains dead. control valve block is closed. Open
the valve.
 Coupling failure between pump and
motor. Replace coupling.
 Abnormal noise from HPU .  Air in hydraulic system. Run function

to perform air venting.
 Damaged pump: Contact supplier.
 Damaged drill pipe threads  Incorrect pressure setting. Adjust

(weight compensating failure) pressure according to procedure.
 Chains are too long. Adjust chain to
hook/block.
 IBOP washed out.  Incorrect adjustment of lever arm.

Adjust and verify 100% opening &
closing.
 Worn/damaged cam rollers. Replace
cam rollers.
 Too low air pressure. Adjust air
compressor pressure setting.
 Tool joint slips/rotates during  Too low hydraulic pressure. Adjust to

makeup or breakout. correct pressure.
 Replace worn dies.
 Centralizer ring not mounted or cam
roller damage. Mount centralizer
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 70 of 74
Fault Remedy
and/or replace rollers.

 Internal hydraulic leakage in swivel
or cylinder: Contact supplier.
 Pipehandler will not rotate.  Locking cylinder engaged. Push for

open lock cylinder. Check visually
that the cylinder rod is free from the
key slot.
 Too low hydraulic pressure. Check
LS pressure setting.
 Damaged hydraulic motor. Replace
motor.
 Link tilt cylinders are out of vertical
position. Run links to vertical/push
link tilt Float.
 Stuck pressure switch. Replace
switch.
 Pipehandler doesn’t stop in  Proximity switch is not in correct

zero while rotating in “Rotate to distance from target flag. Adjust to
Zero” mode. correct position. Opening between
proximity switch and target flag to be
less then 8 mm (1/3 in).
 Change damaged proximity switch.
 Locking cylinder will not extend.  Proximity switch is not in correct

distance from target flag. Adjust to
correct position. Opening between
proximity switch and target flag to be
less then 8 mm (1/3 in).
 When pushing Lock, the lamp  Cylinder piston is not aligned with
in control button remains key slot. Correct position for target
flicking without turning to flag + proximity switch for return to
permanent illumination. zero.
 Proximity switch for Locked is out of
position when cylinder is fully
extended. Correct position for
proximity switch.
 Link tilt will not stay when tilted  Too low setting on load balancing
to FWD/BWD in Hold mode. valve. Adjust setting according to
specification on hydraulic flow
diagram.
 Contamination/dirt in load control
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 71 of 74
Fault Remedy
valve. Open valve and clean internal

parts.
 Internal cylinder leakage. Change
the seal kit.
 Grabber lamp doesn’t is not  Lamp failure. Verify by activating

illuminated when activated to lamp test, and change defect bulb.
On.  Pressure switch failure. Replace
switch.
 Too low grabber pressure. Adjust
pressure.
 Grabber lamp doesn’t switch off  Pressure switch failure. Replace

after activation of Off. switch.
 Grabber dies slip on the  Replace worn dies.

tooljoint while making up or  Centralizer ring removed. Re-install.
breaking out.  Roller(s) on centralizer ring
damaged. Replace rollers.
 Grabber not aligned. Adjust front
suspension chain.
 Too low hydraulic pressure. Adjust
hydraulic pressure.
 Pneumatic elevator will not  Button not double-pushed (pushed

open after activation of button. twice within one second).
 Air hose not connected to elevator.
 Quick connector coupling at service
loop bracket not connected properly.
Check couplings and verify inlet
pressure.
 Air pressure too low. Adjust air
compressor settings.
 Replace stuck solenoid.
 Top drive/saver sub not aligned  Top drive not aligned to well centre.
with stickup in rotary slips. Adjust according to relevant
description/procedure.
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 72 of 74
6.8 Storage and Preservation
The below procedure applies for preservation of the top drive if it, after it has been
taken into use, will be stored for more than 3 months.
 Verify that the mud circuit is shut down.

 Clean all dirty parts of the top drive and allow it to dry.
 Inspect all external surfaces and touch up all paint damages. Unpainted
surfaces (but not cylinder rods) should be coated with suitable anti-corrosion oil.
 Disconnect the mud hose umbilical (rotary hose), and then remove the S-pipe
(connecting the mud circuit to the gooseneck). Steam clean inside the S-pipe,
and inside the top drive main shaft assembly through the gooseneck. Coat the
S-pipe, gooseneck and main shaft inside with oil or grease. Inspect and grease
the hammer lug unions, and replace the seal rings. Then reinstall the S-pipe and
reconnect the mud hose.
 Remove the wash pipe assembly and the deflector below the wash pipe. Clean,
inspect, replace worn parts and reassemble. The inspection should include the
upper seals of the main shaft. Unprotected surfaces must be coated with grease.
 Break out the saver sub, clean it, inspect with respect to damage, and coat
inside and threads with grease.
 Break out the lower IBOP, remove upper IBOP actuator and break out the upper
IBOP. Disassemble the IBOPs as described in the sub-vendor literature (in
chapter 3), and clean and inspect with respect to excessive wear and damages.
Replace defective parts, grease all parts and reassemble.
 Disassemble the split collar. Clean and inspect the collar parts and the grooves
on the main shaft. Grease the mating face on the link hanger, cover split collar
parts with grease, and reinstall.
 Reinstall IBOPs, the upper IBOP actuator and the saver sub, and coat the
outside of the entire main shaft assembly with grease.
 Remove the grabber die retainers and dies. Dismantle these parts, clean,
inspect, grease and reinstall.
 Lubricate the top drive according to the Lubrication section.
 If the storage is believed to last for more than 6 months, change the gearbox oil
and the elements of the gear oil filter and the hydraulic pressure filter.
 Replace the gearbox vent plug by a solid plug.
 Check all anti-corrosion Denso tape, and soak it with fresh oil as necessary to
keep it from drying out.
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 73 of 74
 Add fresh desiccant to the inside of all outdoors panels and junction boxes.
 Ensure that all electric and hydraulic protective dust caps and covers are fitted,
particularly those of the quick couplings.
 Stroke all hydraulic cylinders fully in and out a couple of times to lubricate the
cylinder rods. Leave the cylinders in stroked-in position, as far as possible..
 Shut down the AC control station.
 Use the extension lead inside the control station for termination between the
plug panel and a 110VAC plug – for permanent heating of the control station.
 The electric supply to the control system must be left on, including the standstill
heating of the drilling motors. Verify that the automatic standstill heating is on.
 Verify that the top drive is protected against mechanical damage, and that
unauthorized personnel don’t have access.
Monthly Follow-up of Preservation
At monthly intervals, follow up the preservation as follows:
 Inspect the overall top drive. Look for corrosion and signs of insufficient
preservation, and for damage caused by collision with other equipment.
 Lubricate the top drive as deemed necessary (consulting the Lubrication
section).
 Rotate the main shaft (by hand) a couple of turns.
 Verify that the heater inside the AC control station is powered and works
properly.
De-preservation before Return to Normal Operation
Before return to normal operation, de-preserve as follows:
 Reinstall the gearbox vent plug.

 If necessary, connect all plugs & receptacles.
 Check oil level in HPU tank and gearbox.
 Test the operation of the drilling motors, and all hydraulic and pneumatic
functions.
 Inspect and lubricate the top drive according to the ordinary maintenance
schedule.
www.natoil.com
Equipment: 1
Page: 74 of 74
6.9 Special Tools
The following special tools are supplied with the top drive:
 Grabber bolt puller

 Two 22 mm Allen keys (for operating the lower IBOP)
 Grabber lifting tool
 Torque tube stabbing ramp
www.natoil.com
Page: 1 of 6
CHAPTER 7
SAFETY AND SERVICE BULLETINS
Chapter7: Safety and Service Bulletins
www.natoil.com
Page: 2 of 6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
7 SAFETY AND SERVICE BULLETINS.............................................................................. 3

7.1 Safety Bulletins ....................................................................................................... 3
7.1.1 Register of Safety Bulletins ......................................................................... 4
7.2 Service Bulletins ..................................................................................................... 5
7.2.1 Register of Service Bulletins........................................................................ 6
7.3 Attached Bulletins ................................................................................................... 6
www.natoil.com
Page: 3 of 6
7 SAFETY AND SERVICE BULLETINS
This chapter describes the Safety and Service Bulletins of National Oilwell Norway
AS (supplier), and suggests a filing system for these Bulletins.
7.1 Safety Bulletins
Supplier has established a system for updating its Clients with important safety
information. The system will be used when immediate corrective action is needed to
secure the safety of operators and maintenance personnel.
The system consists of a Safety Bulletin, a belonging Safety Bulletin Transmittal

(telefax front sheet), and a Register of Safety Bulletins. Supplier’s Product
Department (PD) is responsible for issuing the Bulletin, which will be given a Bulletin
reference number by supplier’s Service Department (SD). Each Bulletin will be
logged in the Register of Safety Bulletins.
The following procedure applies for issuing Safety Bulletins:
• PD detects the need for a Safety Bulletin.

• PD prepares the Bulletin and the Transmittal, and collects a Bulletin reference
number from SD.
• PD forwards the Bulletin and Transmittal to Client by telefax.
• Client receives and reads the Bulletin, and confirms by return telefax that the
message is understood. The return telefax is a signed copy of the Transmittal.
• Client implements the Bulletin in his operating and/or maintenance instructions
for subject equipment.
• Supplier updates (this) chapter 7 of the user manual by attaching the Bulletin,
and listing it in the (below) Register of Safety Bulletins. New copies of the
chapter will be mailed (by A-class mail) to Client for updating his copies of the
user manual. Updates of other affected chapters or sheets will be distributed as
well.
www.natoil.com
Page: 4 of 6
7.1.1 Register of Safety Bulletins
National Oilwell REGISTER OF Page 1 of 1

Norway AS SAFETY BULLETINS
Bulletin Date Author Approv. Title Recipient
Ref. No.
www.natoil.com
Page: 5 of 6
7.2 Service Bulletins
Supplier has established a system for updating its Clients with important service
information. The system will be used when immediate corrective action is needed to
prevent damage or malfunction of subject equipment. (Corrections of a less urgent
nature are issued in the form of ordinary updates of the user manual.)
The system consists of a Service Bulletin, a belonging Service Bulletin Transmittal

(telefax front sheet), and a Register of Service Bulletins. Supplier’s Product
Department (PD) is responsible for issuing the Bulletin, which will be given a Bulletin
reference number by supplier’s Service Department (SD). Each Bulletin will be
logged in the Register of Service Bulletins.
The following procedure applies for issuing Service Bulletins:
• PD detects the need for a Service Bulletin.

• PD prepares the Bulletin and the Transmittal, and collects a Bulletin reference
number from SD.
• PD forwards the Bulletin and Transmittal to Client by telefax.
• Client receives and reads the Bulletin, and confirms by return telefax that the
message is understood. The return telefax is a signed copy of the Transmittal.
• Client implements the Bulletin in his operating and/or maintenance instructions
for subject equipment.
• Supplier updates (this) chapter 7 of the user manual by attaching the Bulletin,
and listing it in the (below) Register of Service Bulletins. New copies of the
chapter will be mailed (by A-class mail) to Client for updating his copies of the
user manual. Updates of other affected chapters or sheets will be distributed as
well.
www.natoil.com
Page: 6 of 6
7.2.1 Register of Service Bulletins
National Oilwell REGISTER OF Page 1 of 1

Norway AS SERVICE BULLETINS
Bulletin Date Author Approv. Title Recipient
Ref. No.
7.3 Attached Bulletins
Safety or Service Bulletins issued for subject equipment are listed in the above
Registers and attached after this page. The following Bulletins are attached:
• None (No bulletins have been issued.)
www.natoil.com
Page: 1 of 3
CHAPTER 8
SPARE PARTS LIST
Chapter 8: Spare Parts List

Page: 2 of 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
8 SPARE PARTS LIST ........................................................................................................ 3

8.1 Recommended Spare Parts.................................................................................... 3

Page: 3 of 3
8 SPARE PARTS LIST
8.1 Recommended Spare Parts
Document T3035-Z-MC-001, Recommended Spare Part List for 2 years operation,

is attached after this page.

Recommended Spare Part List
for 2 years operation
Top Drive HPT 500 2E AC SG
RIG/PLANT REFERENCE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION

Atlas T3035 HPS Land Rig No 2
ADDITIONAL CODE SDRL CODE TOTAL PGS
5.3 22 This document contains proprietary and confidential National Oilwell Norway AS
information which belongs to National Oilwell Varco; it is Servicebox 401
REMARKS loaned for limited purposes only and remains the property
of National Oilwell Varco. Reproduction, in whole or in N-4604 Kristiansand
MAIN TAG NUMBER DISCIPLINE part; or use of this design or distribution of this information Norway
to others is not permitted without the express written
consent of National Oilwell Varco. This document is to be
CLIENT PO NUMBER returned to National Oilwell Varco upon request and in Phone +47 38 19 20 00
any event upon completion of the use for which it was Fax +47 38 19 23 11
loaned.
© Copyright National Oilwell Varco - 2007
CLIENT DOCUMENT NUMBER DOCUMENT NUMBER REV
T3035-Z-MC-001 0
www.nov.com
Document number T3035-Z-MC-001
Revision 0
Page 2
REVISION HISTORY
0 12.07.2007 Issued for Approval LEDO BJH GRS

Rev Date (dd.mm.yyyy) Reason for issue Prepared Checked Approved
CHANGE DESCRIPTION

0
TERMS FOR RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS.
Delivery time: weeks from received order, with

reservation for presale.
Delivery terms: Ex.works INCOTERMS 2000, National

Oilwell warehouse Kristiansand Norway, excl. packing cost.
After notification of "ready for collection", we consider

the shipment delivered and the invoice will be executed,
in accordance with the ex.works clause.
Sales conditions in accordance with ORGALIME S 2000.
This quotation is valid for 30 days.
Regarding certificates: The cost for certificates will

be invoiced at costprice.
………………………………………………………………………………………….
IMPORTANT
When ordering spare part, always quote type of equipment, machine no. and/or project number,
please.
Contact:
NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO AS
Serviceboks 401
N4604 Kristiansand, Norway
[email protected]
[email protected]
Tel +47 3819 20 00 Fax: +47 38 19 26 04
www.nov.com
RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS LIST
FOR 2 YEAR OPERATION
"UPETROM F320 Rig"
Project no.: T3035 Type: Top Drive HPT 500 2E AC SG Dwg. Title: Dwg rev.: Sheet no.: 1 OF 19
Drawing no.: Customer: Grup Servicii Petroliere S.A. Date/Currency:
Oper Com Ins. Unit Price Total Price Del.Time
Position Item No. Item Name Technical description Tag No. Supplier Qty Spare Spare Spare NOK. NOK Weeks
81497 ANALOG INSTR.Ex 4-20mA TROPES.IP56 SI001 1,0 X 6 994,00 6 994,00 2

82487 INITIATOR P+F 1,0 X 1 087,00 1 087,00 2
82138 PULSEENCODER 1024ppr. 4,5-30V. 1,0 X 13 940,00 13 940,00 6
SPARES TO BE ORDERED BY : [email protected] - fax +4738192604

"UPETROM F320 Rig"
Project no.: T3035 Type: Top Drive HPT 500 2E AC SG Dwg. Title: HPT, WATER COURSE Dwg rev. 3 Sheet no.: 2 OF 19
Drawing no.: D1413-A0005 Customer: Grup Servicii Petroliere S.A. L-4"-F1002 - ID3 1/16" - 5000PSI Date/Currency:
ASSEMBLY DRAWING
M01 94242 HPS WATER COURSE ( 5000 PSI )
31590 WASH PIPE 1,0 X 3 055,00 3 055,00 5

89111007102 LOWER NUT 1,0 X 24 413,00 24 413,00 4
89111007202 LOCK SREW, LOWER NUT WASHPIPE 1,0 X 738,00 738,00 4

89111007302 LOWER SPACER 1,0 X 1 655,00 1 655,00 4
89111007402 INTERMEDIATE SPACER 2,0 X 1 698,00 3 396,00 4

89111007502 UPPER SPACER 1,0 X 2 067,00 2 067,00 4
89111014902 UPPER SEAL HOLDER FOR 5000 AND 7500 PSI 1,0 X 5 039,00 5 039,00 4
89111014802 UPPER NUT 1,0 X 24 231,00 24 231,00 6
89113004902 O-RING FOR 5000 AND 7500 PSI

O-RING, 20
2,0 X 43 20
43,20 86 40
86,40 4
13887 GREASE NIPPLE 1/8" NPT 1,0 X 115,60 115,60 4

89113005002 WASH PIPE PACKING, SET OF 5 1,0 X 3 100,00 3 100,00 4
89111003102 RING 1,0 X 282,50 282,50 4

"UPETROM F320 Rig"
Project no.: T3035 Type: Top Drive HPT 500 2E AC SG Dwg. Title: HPT, PARKING BRAKE Dwg rev. 6 Sheet no.: 3 OF 19
Drawing no.: D1416-A0008 Customer: Grup Servicii Petroliere S.A. PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM Date/Currency:
ASSEMBLY DRAWING
M03 95332 Airflex 14 CB 400, single element 1,0 X 26 934,00 26 934,00 4

"UPETROM F320 Rig"
Project no.: T3035 Type: Top Drive HPT 500 2E AC SG Dwg. Title: Dwg rev. 4 Sheet no.: 4 OF 19
Drawing no.: D1418-A0011 Customer: Grup Servicii Petroliere S.A. ASSEMBLY Date/Currency:
ASSEMBLY DRAWING
M02 147861 FILTER ELEMENT 5,0 X 1 487,00 1 487,00 5

"UPETROM F320 Rig"
Project no.: T3035 Type: Top Drive HPT 500 2E AC SG Dwg. Title: HPT, DRILL STEM & IBOP Dwg rev. 4 Sheet no.: 5 OF 19
Drawing no.: D1419-A0003 Customer: Grup Servicii Petroliere S.A. ASSEMBLY Date/Currency:
ASSEMBLY DRAWING
81732 KELLY VALVE, 10000 PSI 1,0 X 146 000,00 146 000,00 10
99955 REPAIR KIT FOR ITAG TOPGUARD 1,0 X 43 498,00 43 498,00 6

141720 LOCKING RING FOR KELLY 3,0 X 2 969,00 8 907,00 8
141719 LOCKING RING FOR KELLY 3,0 X 2 917,00 8 751,00 8

81776 SAVER SUB, NC 38 # 3 1/2" D.P. 1,0 X 31 460,00 31 460,00 10
81775 SAVER SUB, NC 50 # 5" D.P. 1,0 X 25 714,00 25 714,00 10

"UPETROM F320 Rig"
Project no.: T3035 Type: Top Drive HPT 500 2E AC SG Dwg. Title: HPT, ON BOARD HPU Dwg rev. 4 Sheet no.: 6 OF 19
Drawing no.: D1420-A0001 Customer: Grup Servicii Petroliere S.A. HPU TANK W/PUMP Date/Currency:
ASSEMBLY
M29 80734 ELECTRIC MOTOR ABB,Exn 132M4 8,6KW-S1 1,0 X 9 240,00 9 240,00 4
M30 96770 FLEXIBLE COUPLING, COMPLETE 1,0 X 644,00 644,00 6

"UPETROM F320 Rig"
Project no.: T3035 Type: Top Drive HPT 500 2E AC SG Dwg. Title: HPT SYSTEM Dwg rev. 6 Sheet no.: 7 OF 19
Drawing no.: D1431-A0005 Customer: Grup Servicii Petroliere S.A. ROTATING HEAD Date/Currency:
ASSEMBLY DRAWING
M03 95709 DISC SPRING, SF-TAF TALLERKENFJ’R 4398 96,0 X 91,00 8 736,00 4
M07 95674 ROTO GLYD RING 8,0 X 2 405,00 19 240,00 4

M14 142084 SLYDRING 2,0 X 850,00 1 700,00 4
M24 92764 BACK-UP RING 14,0 X 73,00 1 022,00 4

M25 31641 O-RING 90 SHORE 13 14,0 X 8,00 112,00 4

"UPETROM F320 Rig"
Project no.: T3035 Type: Top Drive HPT 500 2E AC SG Dwg. Title: HPT 500 2E AC Dwg rev. 0 Sheet no.: 8 OF 19
Drawing no.: D1435-A0003 Customer: Grup Servicii Petroliere S.A. TORQUE COLUMN Date/Currency:
ASSEMBLY
M01 95427 PLAIN BEARING 2,0 X 38,88 77,76 3

"UPETROM F320 Rig"
Project no.: T3035 Type: Top Drive HPT 500 2E AC SG Dwg. Title: HPT 500 2E AC Dwg rev. 5 Sheet no.: 9 OF 19
Drawing no.: D1436-A0015 Customer: Grup Servicii Petroliere S.A. BACK UP GRABBER Date/Currency:
ASSEMBLY
M02 93143 DIES FOR TOOL JOINT BREAKER 8,0 X 1 908,00 15 264,00 6
M06 95687 GUIDE STRIP/RING 170, PTFE/40% BRONZE 4,0 X 221,00 884,00 4
M07 95688 PISTON/ROD SEAL, ›170 2,0 X 834,00 1 668,00 6
M08 14185 O-RING 70 SHORE 159,3 2,0 X 16,20 32,40 4

M09 29998 GUIDE STRIP/RING 150 4,0 X 260,30 1 041,20 4
M10 12031 ROD WIPER SEAL 150 2,0 X 416,90 833,80 4

M11 12025 PISTON/ROD SEAL 150 2,0 X 299,00 598,00 4
M12 99548 GAS SPRING, F1=3000N 2,0 X 3 955,00 7 910,00 4

"UPETROM F320 Rig"
Project no.: T3035 Type: Top Drive HPT 500 2E AC SG Dwg. Title: Dwg rev.: Sheet no.: 10 OF 19
Drawing no.: NIR Customer: Grup Servicii Petroliere S.A. Date/Currency:
81517 THERMOELEMENT W/ TRANSMITTER 1,0 X 5 905,00 5 905,00 6

"UPETROM F320 Rig"
Project no.: T3035 Type: Top Drive HPT 500 2E AC SG Dwg. Title: BLOCK DIAGRAM Dwg rev. 1 Sheet no.: 11 OF 19
Drawing no.: T3035-D1400-E0001 Customer: Grup Servicii Petroliere S.A. INSTRUMENT Date/Currency:
HPT-2E-AC
1 54354 PRESSURE SWITCH 1 to 11 psig PS010 1,0 X 5 268,00 5 268,00 4
2 80637 PULSEENCODER 1024ppr. 4,5-30V.IP66 GE001 1,0 X 10 992,00 10 992,00 8

3 81319 THERMOELEMENT W/ TRANSMITTER TT011 1,0 X 5 082,00 5 082,00 6
4 82487 INITIATOR P+F GS007 1,0 X 1 087,00 1 087,00 5

6 81502 MAGNETIC FLOAT SWITCH KSR LS012 1,0 X 8 550,00 8 550,00 5
12 82714 PRESSURE SWITCH PS006 1,0 X 6 196,00 6 196,00 6

14 81517 THERMOELEMENT W/ TRANSMITTER TT013 1,0 X 5 905,00 5 905,00 5

"UPETROM F320 Rig"
Project no.: T3035 Type: Top Drive HPT 500 2E AC SG Dwg. Title: LOOP DIAGRAM Dwg rev. 0 Sheet no.: 12 OF 19
Drawing no.: T3035-D1400-E0200 Customer: Grup Servicii Petroliere S.A. POWER DISTRIBUTION Date/Currency:
HPT-2E-AC
8 55012 SWITCH MODE POWER 432W UNREG. -G1 1,0 X 2 143,00 2 143,00 4
9 56406 CONVERTER 24 Vdc/24 Vdc 10 A -G1.1 1,0 X 5 028,00 5 028,00 5

11 51144 POWER SUPPLY FIM-SYSTEM 24Vdc -F76 1,0 X 1 058,00 1 058,00 5
12 151825 CONTACTOR RELAY 24VDC -K01 1,0 X 313,00 313,00 4

"UPETROM F320 Rig"
Drawing no.: T3035-D1400-E0201 Customer: Grup Servicii Petroliere S.A. PLC CONFIGURATION Date/Currency:
HPT-2E-AC
2 146780 DIG. INPUT 16x24 VDC 1 X 2360 2360 4
3 53336 DIG. OUTPUT 16CH RELAY D00/6 1,0 X 3 795,00 3 795,00 4

5 55176 ANALOG INPUT 8 CH D00/8 1,0 X 6 900,00 6 900,00 5

"UPETROM F320 Rig"
Drawing no.: T3035-D1400-E0203 Customer: Grup Servicii Petroliere S.A. DIGITAL INPUT Date/Currency:
HPT-2E-AC
1 51260 IS-BARRIER F/INITIATORS (EEXI) 2CH.RELAY -U01 1,0 X 960,00 960,00 4

"UPETROM F320 Rig"
Drawing no.: T3035-D1400-E0205 Customer: Grup Servicii Petroliere S.A. ANALOG INPUT Date/Currency:
HPT-2E-AC
1 50815 TRANSM.REPEATER/POWER EEXI 1CH 4-20/4-20 -U04 1,0 X 3 269,50 3 269,50 4

"UPETROM F320 Rig"
Drawing no.: T3035-D1400-E0206 Customer: Grup Servicii Petroliere S.A. ANALOG OUTPUT Date/Currency:
HPT-2E-AC
1 81294 VALVE CONTROLLER CARD/HAWE 12/24V -U03 1,0 X 4 747,00 4 747,00 5

"UPETROM F320 Rig"
Drawing no.: T3035-D1400-E0211 Customer: Grup Servicii Petroliere S.A. INTERFACE PREMISSIVE SIGNALS Date/Currency:
HPT-2E-AC
1 50197 RELAY MINIATURE 10A/16A 1 POL -K2 1,0 X 145,00 145,00 4

"UPETROM F320 Rig"
Project no.: T3035 Type: Top Drive HPT 500 2E AC SG Dwg. Title: LAYOUT DIAGRAM Dwg rev. 0 Sheet no.: 18 OF 19
Drawing no.: T3035-D1400-E0304 Customer: Grup Servicii Petroliere S.A. CONTROL PANEL OP101 Date/Currency:
HPT-2E-AC
4 81417 DIG.OUT REMOTE I/O D10/4 1,0 X 7 700,00 7 700,00 4
5 81418 DIG. INPUT 16 ch. REMOTE I/O D10/2 1,0 X 7 391,00 7 391,00 4
7 81420 ANALOG OUTPUT 8 ch. REMOTE I/O D10/7 1,0 X 10 354,00 10 354,00 4
145035 PUSH BUTTON WITH GREEN LIGHT S11 1,0 X 607,00 607,00 4
145040 CONTACT ELEMENT2X NO SCREW CONN S12 1,0 X 576,00 567,00 4
145039 CONTACT ELEMENT2X NC SCREW CONN S01.1 1,0 X 540,00 540,00 4

145034 PUSH BUTTON WITH RED LIGHT S09 1,0 X 463,00 463,00 4
145037 EEXD SWITCH 3 POS. W7SPRING RETURN S07 1,0 X 512,00 512,00 4
145036 PUSH BUTTON WITH YELLOW LIGHT S03 1,0 X 489,00 489,00 4

"UPETROM F320 Rig"
Project no.: T3035 Type: Top Drive HPT 500 2E AC SG Dwg. Title: HYDRALIFT PORTABLE TOPDRIVE Dwg rev. 1 Sheet no.: 19 OF 19
Drawing no.: T3035-D1400-H0003 Customer: Grup Servicii Petroliere S.A. HPT500-2E-AC Date/Currency:
FLOW DIAGRAM
H02 96497 ORBIT MOTOR 260 CCM DT-HYM50102 1,0 X 5 822,00 5 822,00 10
H05 96483 HYDR. CYLINDER 100/63

66507 SEALKIT 100/63 1,0 X 1 221,00 1 221,00 4
H06 96485 HYDR. CYLINDER 125/110

147220 SEALKIT FOR CYLINDER 125/110 1,0 X 6 203,00 6 203,00 4
H07 81826 BREATHER FILTER 5,0 X 952,00 4 760,00 5

H08 96689 AXIAL PISTON PUMP 1,0 X 40 598,00 40 598,00 12
H23 98898 RETURN FILTER, 80L
98899 FILTER ELEMENT 5,0 X 1 445,00 7 225,00 4
H30 96484 HYDR CYLINDER 63/40

HYDR. DT-HCLA50102-01
146647 BEARING COMPOSIT FOR CYLINDER DT-HCLA50102-01 1,0 X 1 042,00 1 042,00 4

34095 SEALKIT 63/40 DT-HCLA50102-01 1,0 X 736,00 736,00 4
H46 81781 VALVE MANIFOLD BLOCK FOR HPT, -20 deg

81445 SOLENOID VALVE, FOR AIR, -20 deg 2,0 X 5 564,00 11 128,00 6
H48 98439 IBOP PNEUMATIC CYLINDER DT-ACL 50102

145845 SEALKIT QA/8200/00 DT-ACL 50102 2,0 X 1 718,00 3 436,00 6
H51 21853 RETURN FILTER 120L

21866 FILTER ELEMENT, HYDRAULIC 5,0 X 441,00 2 205,00 4

Page: 1 of 3
CHAPTER 9
DATA SHEETS
Chapter 9: Data Sheets
www.natoil.com
Page: 2 of 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
9 DATA SHEETS ................................................................................................................. 3

9.1 Data Sheets ............................................................................................................ 3
www.natoil.com
Page: 3 of 3
9 DATA SHEETS
9.1 Data Sheets
The following document is enclosed after this page:
Document title: Product Data Sheet

Supplier doc. No.: T3035-Z-DS-001
www.natoil.com
Rig / Plant Atlas

Reference T3035
Description
Sub description
Document title Product Data Sheet
Portable Top Drive
HPT-500-2E-AC

1 Accepted
Sign:


6
3035
T3035-Z-DS-001 0

Servicebox 401
N-4604 Kristiansand
Norway
Phone +47 38 19 20 00
Telefax +47 38 19 23 11
www.natoil.com
Document number T3035-Z-DS-001
Revision 0
Page 2
CHANGE DESCRIPTION

0
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 PERFORMANCE .............................................................................................................. 4
2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION ......................................................................................... 5
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 4
1 PERFORMANCE
DRILLING PERFORMANCE
Drilling speed 0 - 240 rpm
Max. continuous drilling torque 40000 ft-lb ( 54240 Nm )
Max. intermittent torque 80000 ft-lb ( 108000 Nm )
Air brake 70000 ft-lb ( 95000 Nm ) @ 100 psi ( 7 barg ) air pressure
80.000
60.000
Torque PERFORMANCE CURVE COMPARISON
(ft.lbs)
HYDRALIFT HPT - 350 - 2E - AC
50.000
40.000
30.000
20.000
10.000
Drill Pipe RPM
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 5
2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
1. DESIGN DATA
2. Service Drilling
3. Design code / standard API 8C
4. Specification Client specification
5. Environmental loads
6. Area classification Zone 2
7. Design Temperature - 20° C
8. CONSTRUCTION
9. Code
10. Certifying authority
11. Equipment Category
12. LOAD RATING
13. Hoisting capacity, (Load path), API spec. 8C 500 short tons (454 metric Tonnes)
14. API Dynamic Bearing Rating 500 short tons (454 metric Tonnes)
15. PRESSURE RATING
16. Pressure rating mud circuit, API spec. 8C 5000 psi (350 bar)
17. WEIGHTS
18. Weight of assembled power swivel less 29300 lbs (13300 kg)
umbilicals, elevator, elevator links and dolly
19. Weight signal umbilical 500 lbs (230 kg)
20. Weight power umbilical 1450 lbs (650 kg)
21. Weight of mast cables (power + signal) 3200lbs (1450kg)
22. Weight of Torque Tube 15400lbs (7000kg)
23. Weight of VFD Housing 8160lbs (3700kg)
24. Weight transport frame 1500 lbs (700 kg)
25. DRILLING MOTOR
26. Type 2 ea RELIANCE DL 2512
27. Output horsepower continuous 450 HP (each)
28. Rated current 405 Amp.
29. Voltage 600 VAC
30. Classification for use in hazardous area Exn
31. Ingress protection class IP 44
32. MOTOR COOLING SYSTEM
33. Blower motors rating 2 x 4 kW
34. Voltage 600 V AC 60 Hz 3 phases
35. Classification for use in hazardous area Exn II B, T3
36. Speed 3500 rpm
37. GEAR BOX
38. Type 4PV16
39. Gear ratio 12.7 : 1
40. Max. static torque 100000 ft-ibs (135000 Nm)
41. Oil capacity 180 litre
42. Load rating 500 short tons (454 metric Tonnes)
43. BACK-UP GRABBER
44. Make up torque 0 – 80000 ft-lb (0-108000 Nm)
45. Break out torque 0 – 80000 ft-lb (0-108000 Nm)
46. Tool joint sizes 4” – 9 ½” OD
47. PIPEHANDLING SYSTEM
48. Hoisting capacity link hanger 500 short tons (454 metric tonnes)
49. Forward tilt range 30˚
50. Backward tilt range 30˚
51. Rotating 360 deg. (cont)
www.natoil.com
Revision 0
Page 6
52. DRILL SHAFT

53. Low speed shaft gearbox NC 61 Pin # OD 9” # ID=3 ¼”
54. Remote Operated IBOP 10000 psi # NC 61 Pin/Box # OD 9” # ID=3 ¼”
55. Manual Operated IBOP 10000 psi # NC 61 Pin/Box # OD 9” # ID=3 ¼””
56. Saver sub, std. NC 61 Box / 4 ½ IF Pin # OD 9” # ID=3 ¼””
57. Saver sub, Optional NC 61Box / Pin: See Option List
58. MUD CIRCUIT
59. S-Pipe internal diameter 3 ” (76 mm)
60. S-pipe pressure rating 5000 psi (350 bar)
61. S-pipe rotary hose connection, standard 4” fig. 1002 Female Weco Hammer Lug Union
62. Wash pipe: Pressure rating standard 5000 psi (350 bar)
63. Goose neck: Pressure rating standard 5000 psi (350 bar)
64. Goose neck: Wire line entry 3 1/16 (78 mm)
65. Goose neck: Wire line entry plug 2 ¾” BSP
66. THREAD COMPENSATING SYSTEM
67. Stroke 6” (150 mm)
68. Accumulator size N/A
69. Uncompensated weight Adjustable, recommended setting approximately 1 ton
70. “ONBOARD” HYDRAULIC POWER UNIT
71. Power LS regulated from 0 to 14,7HP (11kW)
72. Max Pressure # Flow 3600 psi (250barg) # 5.8 US gl/min (22 l/min)
73. Max Flow # Pressure 10 US gl/min (40l/min) # 0-1160 psi (0-80barg)
74. Tank Capacity 16 US gl (60 litres)
75. UMBILICALS
76. One power loops including:
77. 1 x 5”OD jacket / encasing
78. 3 x 777 power cables
79. 3 x 4AWG ground cables
80. One signal including:
81. 1 x 4”OD jacket / encasing
82. 1 x 16 AWG 18 signal cable
83. 1 x 10 AWG 12/C signal cable
84. 1 x 16 AWG 8 Aux power cable
85. 1 x 3/8” air supply hose
86. SURFACE PROTECTION
87. Paint Specification: NORSOK M-CR-501
88. Colour: YELLOW (RAL 1006)
89. HYDRAULIC PIPING
90. Piping AISI 361 L
91. Fitting SAE J514 – JIC 37°, cadmium plated, Alt. E02
92. Hoses DNV Type approved
93. UTILITIES / POWER REQUIREMENTS
94. Electrical Power Supply:
95. VFD Control Station 600 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 810 Amp Cont. (1650 Amp. Interm.)
96. Air pressure 100 psi (7 barg)
97. Air Flow NA (Intermittent only)
www.natoil.com
Page: 1 of 5
CHAPTER 10
DRAWINGS AND PARTS LISTS
Chapter 10: Drawings and Parts Lists

Page: 2 of 5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
10 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LISTS...................................................................................... 3

10.1 Drawings and Parts Lists ........................................................................................ 3

Page: 3 of 5
10 DRAWINGS AND PARTS LISTS
10.1 Drawings and Parts Lists
The drawings and parts list sheets listed below are attached after this page. Each
drawing has generally one or more parts list sheets, which in the hardcopies are
placed behind the drawings.
Supplier's Dwg. No. Rev. Drawing Title Parts L

No. Sheets
T3035-D1400-G0001 1 Top Drive HPT 500 2E AC, Gen. Arrang. 49
T3035-D1400-A0002 1 Main Assembly 29
D1405-A0005 0 Special Tools w/ Storage Case 1

D1405-A0006 0 Special Tool, Knuckle Link Pin Hammer 1
D1405-A0007 0 Lifting Tool for Grabber 1
T3035-D1409-A0001 0 Signs and Labels 0
T3035-D1410-A0002 0 Gearbox & Motor, Assembly 2
D1411-A0006 2 Suspension System, Bail L24, Assembly 1
D1412-A0005 1 Thread Compensator System, Assembly 1
D1413-A0006 0 Water Course, Assembly 1
D1414-A0004 0 Lubrication Oil Pump, Assembly 1

D1414-A0005 1 Gearbox w/ Accessories, Assembly 2
D1415-A0002 0 Drive Motor w/ Accessories, RH 2

D1415-A0004 0 Drive Motor w/ Accessories, LH 2
D1415-A0007 3 Drive Motor w/ Accessories, Assembly 1
D1416-A0008 1 Parking Brake, Assembly 1
D1418-A0011 0 Motor Cooling System LHS, Assembly 1

D1418-A0014 0 Motor Cooling, Blower & Filter House RHS 1
D1418-A0016 0 Motor Cooling System LHS, Assembly 1
D1418-A0017 0 Motor Cooling System RHS, Assembly 1
D1418-A0018 0 Motor Cooling System, Assembly 1
D1418-A0020 0 Motor Cooling, Cooling Gear & Hydr Oil A. 2
Page: 4 of 5

No. Sheets
D1419-A0003 2 Drill Stem & IBOP, Assembly 1
D1420-A0001 1 HPU Tank w/ Pump, Assembly 3
D1421-A0001 3 Torque Carr. Wheel Bracket, Assembly 2

D1421-A0003 0 Main Assy & Adjustment, Torque Carriage 1
T3035-D1430-A0002 0 Pipehandler, Assembly 1
D1431-A0005 2 Rotating Head, Assembly 4
D1433-A0003 0 Link Hanger, Assembly 1
D1434-A0012 1 Link Tilt, Elevator Link Clamp (500T), Ass. 1

D1434-A0013 1 Link Tilt, Elevator Link Clamp (350T), Ass. 1
D1434-A0015 0 Link Tilt, Assembly 1
D1435-A0003 0 Torque Column, Assembly 1
D1436-A0015 5 Back-up Grabber, Assembly 4

D1436-A0017 0 Back-up Grabber Centralizer, Assembly 1
D1437-A0003 0 IBOP Actuator, Assembly 2
T3035-D1400-H0003 1 (Hydraulic) Flow Diagram 3+3
T3035-D1400-E0001 1 Block Diagram, Instrument 11

T3035-D1400-E0002 1 Block Diagram, Power 1
T3035-D1400-E0003 1 Block Diagram 1
T3035-D1400-E0100 1 Termination Diagram, Instrument 0

T3035-D1400-E0101 1 Termination Diagram, Instrument 0
T3035-D1400-E0102 1 Termination Diagr, Contr Panel OP101 1/2 0
T3035-D1400-E0103 1 Termination Diagr, Contr Panel OP101 2/2 0
T3035-D1400-E0104 1 Termination Diagram, Interface 0
T3035-D1400-E0105 1 Termination Diagram, Control Panel 0
T3035-D1400-E0106 1 Termination Diagram, Power 0
T3035-D1400-E0200 1 Loop Diagram, Power Distribution 1

T3035-D1400-E0201 1 Loop Diagram, PLC Configuration 1
T3035-D1400-E0202 1 Loop Diagram, DI 1
T3035-D1400-E0203 1 Loop Diagram, DI 1
T3035-D1400-E0204 1 Loop Diagram, DO 0
T3035-D1400-E0205 2 Loop Diagram, AI 1
Page: 5 of 5

No. Sheets
T3035-D1400-E0206 2 Loop Diagram, AO 1

T3035-D1400-E0207 1 Loop Diagram, Control Panel OP101, DI 0
T3035-D1400-E0208 1 Loop Diagram, Control Panel OP101, DI 0
T3035-D1400-E0209 1 Loop Diagram, Control Panel OP101, DO 0
T3035-D1400-E0210 1 Loop Diagr, Contr Panel OP101, AI/AO 0
T3035-D1400-E0211 1 Loop Diagr, Interface Permissive Signals 1
T3035-D1400-E0212 0 Loop Diagram, Camera & Exd Monitor 0
T3035-D1400-E0300 0 Layout, Control Cabinet IB100 2

T3035-D1400-E0301 0 Layout, Junction Box JB101 0
T3035-D1400-E0303 0 Layout, Junction Box “Aux JB” JB103 0
T3035-D1400-E0304 0 Layout, Control Panel OP101 1
T3035-D1400-E0500 0 Circuit Diagram, Motor Starter 0

6 5 4 3 2 1
D D
M01
M01
A0006
550
800
C C
1200
030
B B
0 12.04.2004 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION KBH BYA BYA

Rev. Date Description Made Checked Appr.
A0007 This document contains proprietary and confidential information which
belongs to National Oilwell Norway AS. It is loaned for limited purposes
only and remains the property of National Oilwell Norway AS.
Reproduction, in whole or in part, or use of this design or distribution of
this information to others is not permitted without the express written
consent of National Oilwell Norway AS. This document is to be returned
NATIONAL OILWELL NORWAY AS
to National Oilwell Norway AS upon request and in any event upon SERVICEBOX 401, KORSVIKFJORDEN
completion of the use for which it was loaned. N-4604 KRISTIANSAND, NORWAY
Title:
ASSEMBLY DRAWING
A HPT 2E AC A
SPECIAL TOOLS W/ STORAGE CASE
Scale: Projection: Size: Main Part:
1:10 A3
Drawing Number: Sheet: Revision:
D1405-A0005 1/1 0
6 5 4 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
D 1 D
3
M01
4
C 2 C
120
B B
0 06.04.2004 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION ZZBH KBH KBH

400

This document contains proprietary and confidential information which
Title:
ASSEMBLY DRAWING
A HPS, SPECIAL TOOL A
KNUCKLE LINK, PIN HAMMER
815 1:4 A3
D1405-A0006 1/1 0
6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
H H
M01 M04
M03
M02
G G
032
M05
444
F F
E E
775
D D
C C
234
B B
0 15.04.2004 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION KBH BYA BYA

Title:
ASSEMBLY DRAWING
HPT 2E AC
LIFTING TOOL FOR GRABBER
A Scale: Projection: Size: Main Part: A
1:2 A1
D1405-A0007 1 /1 0
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
H H
G G
F F
1575
M04 026
E E
= =
026
025
M01
2400
D D
TIGHTENING OF BOLTS
ALL BOLTS SLIGHTLY OILED
1500,19
Excerpt from HL/TP-15

GRADE GRADE
SIZE H.D.G Nm PHOSPHATED Nm
M8 8.8 26 10.9 28
C M10 8.8 50 10.9 56 C
M12 8.8 87 10.9 98
M14 8.8 137 10.9 156
M16 8.8 211 10.9 238
M18 8.8 294 10.9 332
M20 8.8 412 10.9 465
M22 8.8 554 10.9 626
M24 8.8 712 10.9 804
M27 8.8 1028 10.9 1161
M30 8.8 1402 10.9 1582
M33 8.8 1894 10.9 2133
ALL BOLTS TO BE DRILLED THROUGH M36 8.8 2440 10.9 2761
M39 8.8 3135 10.9 3543
AND LOCKED WITH SPLIT PIN OR ISO R 989 TORQUE, TORQUE,
STAINLESS STEEL LOCKING WIRE>Ø1mm Nm Nm
Weight = 1205kg
B B
g. M02
shin
f bu
no
h8 llatio 2 19.04.2004 NEW HEADING AREA SGS KBH KBH
30 ta
1000 +- 10 1 r ins 1 20.06.2003 POS 025 CHANGED KAJ
e Rev. Date Description Made Checked Appr.
Aft This document contains proprietary and confidential information which
022 this information to others is not permitted without the express written
Hydralift ASA
1200 +- 12 2
to National Oilwell Norway AS upon request and in any event upon
completion of the use for which it was loaned.
021 Title:
ASSEMBLY
BAIL - L24
HPT 500, SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A1
D1411-A0006 1 /1 2
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
H H
M01
G G
M03
M04
F F
E E
MAX.2636(EXTENDED) 2486(EXTRACTED)
D D
M02
C C
Weight Compensating System Installation Description
1. Disconnect shackles (M02) from the cylinder eyes.

NOTE:
ONE WEIGHT COMPENSATING SYSTEM CONSISTS OF
2. Hook-up lower cylinder eye to the suspension bail bracket. 2 SETS OF CYLINDER M/CHAIN ACCESSORIES.
THE CHAINS HAVE OVERLENGHTH TO FIT "ALL"

3. Manipulate the G-links (M01) over hook ears and close the link arms. HOOK/BLOCKS APPLICATION.
CHAINS TO BE CUT TO FIT RESPECTIVE HOOK/BLOCK.

4. Pull cylinder rods to fully extended position.
STROKE 150
B B
5. Straighten the cylinder and chain to be aligned.

1 19.04.2004 NEW HEADING AREA SGS KBH KBH
0 04.07.2003 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION KAJ BYA BYA
6. Note which chain link that provide minimum slack. Rev. Date Description Made Checked Appr.
7. Cut chain to obtain minimum slack. Reproduction, in whole or in part, or use of this design or distribution of
Title:
8. Connect cylinder eye to chain/shackle system. ASSEMBLY
THREAD COMP. SYSTEM
M05 9. The weight compensating system is now correct mechanical installed. HPT 500 2E AC
1:5 A1
D1412-A0005 1 /1 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
POS. M06 TO BE MOUNTED ONLY 750

H IF THERE IS SUFFICIENT SPACE FOR ENTRY A H
M07 M06 M03
M03 M02 015

015
M06 M07
G G
M05 M07
358
284
M01
TOP OF MAINSHAFT
F F
M04
1076,08
MAINSHAFT
SECTION A-A ( 1 : 5 )
E E
TIGHTENING OF BOLTS
75
D Torque [Nm] D
Size Grade 8.8, Grade 10.9, A4-80
HDG Phosphated
31 M8 26 28 22
M10 50 56 44
A M12 87 98 76
M14 137 156 121
M16 211 238 187
M18 294 332 260
M20 412 465 364
M22 554 626 490
SECTION B-B ( 1 : 5 ) M24
M27
712
1028
804
1161
629
909
M30 1402 1582 1240
M33 1894 2133 1670
M36 2440 2761 2160
M39 3135 3543 2770
C C
NOTES
B 1. ALL BOLTS TO BE DRILLED THROUGH AND LOCKED WITH

80
STAINLESS STEEL LOCKING WIRE = 1.0mm
2. ALL BOLTS AND NUTS TO BE LUBRICATED WITH "KLUBER

STABURAGS (NBU 30) DURING ASSEMBLY.
B B
°
67 ,5
B 0 13.04.2004 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION ZZBH KBH KBH

Title:
15° ASSEMBLY DRAWING
HPT 2E AC
WATER COURSE
1:5 A1
D1413-A0006 1 /1 0
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
H H
4PV16 HIGH SPEED SHAFT BOTTOM PART
G G
TO BE SECURED WITH LOCTITE 641
HIGH SPEED SHAFT LOWER COVER
009
F F
010
M03
M01
M09
E E
M02
SPLINE CONNECTION
Z=30, m=1.25
D ACC. TO DIN 5480 D
M04 M05
M06 M07
C C
PRESSURE PORT, 1" SAE 3000
M08
M10
TIGHTENING OF BOLTS
B ALL BOLTS SLIGHTLY OILED B
Torque [Nm]
Size Grade 8.8, Grade 10.9, A4-80 SUCTION PORT, 1 1/4" SAE3000
HDG Phosphated
M8 26 28 22
M10 50 56 44 ALL BOLTS TO BE DRILLED THROUGH AND LOCKED
M12 87 98 76
M14 137 156 121 WITH SST. WIRE Ø >= 1.0mm
M16 211 238 187
M18 294 332 260 This document and all information and data disclosed herein or herewith are the confidential and proprietary property of Hydralift asa,
M20 412 465 364 and are not to be used, reproduced or disclosed in whole or in part by or to anyone without the written permission of Hydralift asa.
M22 554 626 490 Designed Approved Projection Scale
M24 712 804 629 03.07.2003 KBH 10.07.2003 BYA 1:1
M27 1028 1161 909
Drawn Sheet Format
M30 1402 1582 1240
M33 1894 2133 1670 03.07.2003 KBH 1 /1 A1 Kristiansand, Norway
M36 2440 2761 2160 Replaces Replaced by
A
M39 3135 3543 2770 HPT 500 2E AC A
Rev
LUBRICATION OIL PUMP File: D1414A0004.idw
ASSEMBLY D1414-A0004 0
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
H H
406
D1406-00011
MOTOR SUPPORT 203
M03
G G
M08 M09 M10
2 x M20
D1414-00012
24
LEFT HAND ACME 6" 1/4 DIA

THREADS 3 THREADS PR INCH
F F
D1414-00002
931
COUPLING HUB SIDE

578
REDUCER GLUED WITH

LOCTITE 620
E E
357,8
351
M05 M05
467,7
638
M02 D1406-00010 D1406-00012

280,22
M02
M04 M01
175
5,5
305
GREASE NIPPLE
D D
HPT - 400 - 2E - AC D1400-00003

750
DRAIN OF BEARING
1/4" NPT
M06 M07
2089,92
D1414-A0004
C C
D1414-00011 700
740 740
920
CONTROL VALVE
UNIT
16
B B
40
CONNECTION NC61 PIN 1 16.04.2004 ASSEMBLY UPDATED SGS KBH KBH

139,7
API REGULAR R.H. 0 09.03.2004 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION SGS BYA BYA
Title:
1
HPT 400 2E AC
GEARBOX & w/ACCESSORIES
ASSEMBLY
A1
D1414-A0005 1 /1 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
D D
022
M07 M06 009 M03 M04 JB101
M02
014 EM101
C C
M05 M03
M07 M06
002
017
B B
020
M01
0 16.04.2004 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION SGS KBH KBH
020 M06 M07 M06 This document contains proprietary and confidential information which
Title:
HPT 500 2E AC SYSTEM

A DRIVE MOTOR w/ACCESSORIES A
DRIVE MOTOR R.H.
A3
D1415-A0002 1/1 0
6 5 4 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
D D
JB 102
M04 M08
M06 M07 009
M01
009
M02
M09 JB103
JB002
M06 M05
C JB103 C
EM 102
021
020
002
022 M08 017

M03
M04
M04
B B
020
Title:
HPT 500 2E AC SYSTEM

A DRIVE MOTOR w/ACCESSORIES A
DRIVE MOTOR L.H.
A3
D1415-A0004 1/1 0
6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Rev. Description of revision Date Sign
1 ALIGNMENT UPDATE 07.07.2003 KBH
2 POS.010 MOVED 30.09.2003 BYA
H 3 17,20&M12 ADDED - M04-M08,010, 011 REMOVED 24.03.2004 SGS H
DETAIL B ( 0,40 : 1 )
C B M01
M09
USE THESE BRACKETS / JACKET SCREWS
FOR ALIGNMENT OF MOTORS / COUPLINGS.
SEE INSTRUCTION BELOW FOR REQUIREMENT.

M10
G G
C
APPLY LOCTITE 009
TYPE 641 ON
M09/M10 THROUGH 014
ASSEMBLY TO
BLOWER SUPPORT PLATE. M11
M02
F F
SECTION C-C ( 0,40 : 1 )
M03
Ø14 H7
SPINDLE TO BE CUT TO
54
LENGHT AS SHOWN
+ MACHINED TO
DIA.= Ø14 H7
24
E E
D
002
A
170
D D
DETAIL D ( 0,30 : 1 )
A ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS FOR COUPLINGS:
3 17 COUPLING = PART OF GEAR BOX DELIVERY
1. CAREFULLY CLEAN SHAFTS AND BORES OF THE
HALF-COUPLINGS TO TO BE SHRUNK ON
20
2. HEAT THE COUPLINGS TO 90 C, APPLY A THIN LAYER OF LOCTITE 641 ON MATING SURFACES
C C
3. SHRINK THE COUPLINGS ONTO EACH SINGLE SHAFT.
MOTOR ALIGNMENT REQUIREMENT: 4. ALIGNING CAN START ONLY WHEN THE COUPLINGS ARE COLD
7 0,2 IF DIAL GAUGE OR LASER AIDED ALIGNMENT TOOLS ARE NOT AVAILABLE
+/- 0,05
THE BELOW DESCRIBED ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE MAY BE APPLIED:
A: AXIAL DISTANCE AND ANGULAR ALIGNMENT (SEE FIG. 1 & 2)

- USE A THICKNESS GAUGE AND MEASURE AT FOUR POINTS LOCATED
AT 90  TO EACH OTHER.
M12
- MAX. DEVIATION +/- 0,2mm
B B: PARALLEL AND ANGULAR ALIGNMENT: (SEE FIG. 3) B

- CHECK USING A STRAIGHTEDGE AT TWO POINTS AT 90  OF THE OUTER
DIAMETER OF THE COUPLING HALVES.
- MAX. DEVIATION +/- 0,05mm
- ALIGNMENT MAY BE CONSIDERED CORRECT WHEN NO LIGHT CAN BE SEEN
BETWEEN THE STRAIGHTEDGE AND THE OUTER DIAMETER OF THE COUPLING HALVES.
This document and all information and data disclosed herein or herewith are the confidential and proprietary property of Hydralift asa,
and are not to be used, reproduced or disclosed in whole or in part by or to anyone without the written permission of Hydralift asa.
FIG. 1 FIG. 2 FIG. 3 Designed

24.04.2003 SGS 23.04.2003 BYA
Approved Projection Scale
Drawn Sheet Format

23.04.2003 SGS 1 /1 A1 Kristiansand, Norway
Replaces Replaced by
A HPT 500 2E AC SYSTEM A

Rev
DRIVE MOTOR w/ACCESSORIES File: D1415A0007.idw
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Rev. Description of revision Date Sign
1 MOD. BRAKE DRUM 01.03.2004 KBH
H H
A-A ( 1 : 2 ) 1
00023
M03
MOTOR SHAFT NON DRIVE END M05
(20)
M04
G G
137
128
M01 M02
F F
498,5
508,5
E E
D D
A A
C C
ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTION FOR PARKING BRAKE:
1. CLEAN MOTOR SHAFT AND BRAKE DRUM WITH

MEANS OF LOCTITE 7063 (OR SIMILAR).
TIGHTENING OF BOLTS
ALL BOLTS SLIGHTLY OILED 2. APPLY A THIN LAYER OF LOCTITE 641 ON MOTOR
SHAFT + KEY.
GRADE GRADE
SIZE Nm Nm
H.D.G PHOSPHATED
M8 8.8 26 10.9 28 3. RUN BRAKE DRUM ON SHAFT/ KEY.
M10 8.8 50 10.9 56
M12 8.8 87 10.9 98
M14 8.8 137 10.9 156 4. TIGHTEN LOCK SCREW ONTO KEY.
M16 8.8 211 10.9 238
M18 8.8 294 10.9 332 5. WAIT 8 HRS FOR INITIAL CURE. FULL CURE
B M20 8.8 412 10.9 465 B
M22 8.8 554 10.9 626 OBTAIN WITHIN 24 HRS # 25 C.
M24 8.8 712 10.9 804
M27 8.8 1028 10.9 1161
M30 8.8 1402 10.9 1582
M33 8.8 1894 10.9 2133
M36 8.8 2440 10.9 2761
M39 8.8 3135 10.9 3543
TORQUE, TORQUE,
ISO R 989
Nm Nm
Designed Approved Projection Scale
NOTE:
25.03.2003 SGS 18.05.2003 BYA
ALL BOLTS TO BE DRILLED THROUGH AND
Drawn Sheet Format
LOCKED WITH SPLIT PINS OR LOCK WIRE 15.05.2003 SGS
Ø1MM MIN.
1 /1 A1 Kristiansand, Norway

Rev
PARKING BRAKE File: D1416A0008.idw
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
H H
OUTLINE VBL9 ST.ST.

HYDRALIFT SPECIAL
(REF. DWG.SK02/1193)
G G
329
520,5
F F
M01
114
77,5
SELFSUPPORTING
E FILTERHOUSE E
APPROX.100
ACCESS FOR TACHO WIRE
Ø 456
Ø 509
D D
11 x 16 EQUISPACED
ON Ø480 P.C.D
C C
B B
152
13.05.2003 SGS 13.05.2003 BYA
Drawn Sheet Format

Rev
MOTOR COOLING SYSTEM (LHS) File: D1418A0011.idw
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
H H
OUTLINE VBL9 ST.ST.

HYDRALIFT SPECIAL
(REF. DWG.SK02/1193)
329
G G
520,5
M01
F F
114
ACCESS FOR TACHO WIRE

77,5
SELFSUPPORTING
APPROX.100
FILTERHOUSE
E E
Ø456
509 M02
D D
11 x 16 EQUISPACED
ON Ø480 P.C.D
C C
Tolerances except as noted Welding except as noted Total weight

B ISO 13920-AE EN 287-1/2 B
ISO 2768-mK-E EN 288-1/2/3/4
152
1 20.04.2004 NEW HEADING AREA SGS KBH KBH

Hydralift ASA
Title:
ASSEMBLY
BLOWER & FILTER HOUSE (RHS)
HPT 500, MOTOR COOLING
A1
D1418-A0014 1 /1 0
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
H H
G M02 M04 G
M02
M01
A0011
F F
47
M05
M06
M06
M07
E E
034
47
13
09
D D
M01
M02
M02
C C
B B
28.04.2003 SGS 12.05.2003 BYA
Drawn Sheet Format

Rev
MOTOR COOLING SYSTEM (LHS) File: D1418A0016.idw
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
H H
M04
M02
G M02 G
M01
A0014
47
M05
F F
M06
M06
M07
47
35
E E
13
09
M01
D M02 D
M02
C C
B B
05.05.2003 SGS 12.05.2003 BYA
Drawn Sheet Format

Rev
MOTOR COOLING SYSTEM (RHS) File: D1418A0017.idw
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
H H
A0016 A0017
G G
F F
E E
D D
C C
B B
15.05.2003 SGS 16.05.2003 BYA
Drawn Sheet Format

Rev
MOTOR COOLING SYSTEM File: D1418A0018.idw
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
051
053 051
016
D 052 D
M07
M09
M06
M10
M06 M07 M08 M03 M04 M05

M02
C C
M01
500
B B

Title:
500 MOTOR COOLING

A COOLING SYSTEM FOR OIL A
ASSEMBLY
1:4 A3
D1418-A0020 1/1 0
6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
H H
300 365 365
95 95
G G
F F
OD 228,6 (9")
OD 234,52
E E
M02
DETAIL A M01
M02
M01
D D
M02
044
029
028
027
026
ALTERNATIVE SAVER SUB CONNECTION
Ref.pos.no DRILL PIPE CONN. TYPE DWG. NO PART NO.

C C
029 2 7/8 " NC 31 (IF) D1419-00029 99753
028 3 1/2" NC 38 (IF) D1419-00028 81776
027 5" NC 50 (IF) D1418-00027 81775
026 5 1/2" FH D1419-00026 142465

DETAIL A 2
2 044 4 3/4" HT 38 D1419-00044 142466 2

B B
2 11.05.2004 POS 044 & ITEMNR ADDED SGS KBH KBH

1 10.03.2004 ITEMNR ADDED SGS BYA BYA
Hydralift ASA
Title:
ASSEMBLY
DRILL STEM & IBOP
HPT 500 2E AC
1:10 A1
D1419-A0003 1 /1 2
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Rev. Description of revision Date / Sign.
04.08.2003
1 REMOVED LUBE OIL PUMP W/ ACC. KBH
H H
REF. HYD. DIAGRAM
M25
REF. HYD. DIAGRAM
REF. EL. DIAGRAM
M26
M24
M04 M05
002
M01 M02
112
G M05 M03 M31 REF. EL. DIAGRAM G
- 59 LITRES
003
- 54 LITRES
~ 600 mm
M10 M14
F - 49 LITRES F
~ 700 mm
M28
001 M31 M30
M09
M11 M15 M14 M10 M14
M19 M07
1019
1131
REF. HYD. DIAGRAM

M32
E LOW LEVEL ALARM # 29 LITRES E

M18 M13 005
M13
LOW - LOW LEVEL ALARM # 22 LITRES M11

004 M08 M16
M18 005
REF. HYD. DIAGRAM
M27
D D
REF. HYD. DIAGRAM
M22
M23
REF. EL. DIAGRAM M12
M15
C TIGHTENING OF BOLTS C
508
342
GRADE GRADE
M8 8.8 26 10.9 28
M10 8.8 50 10.9 56
M12 8.8 87 10.9 98
M14 8.8 137 10.9 156
M16 8.8 211 10.9 238
M18 8.8 294 10.9 332
M20 8.8 412 10.9 465
M22 8.8 554 10.9 626
M24 8.8 712 10.9 804
M27 8.8 1028 10.9 1161
M30 8.8 1402 10.9 1582
M33 8.8 1894 10.9 2133
364
M36 8.8 2440 10.9 2761

B M39 8.8 3135 10.9 3543
B
ISO R 989 TORQUE, TORQUE,
M25 Nm Nm
ALL BOLTS TO BE DRILLED THROUGH

AND LOCKED WITH SPLIT PINS OR SST WIRE
>= Ø1mm
27.01.2003 ZOB 10.02.2003 BYA 1:2,5
Drawn Sheet Format
10.02.2003 ZOB Kristiansand, Norway
1 /1 A1
A
HPT 500 2E AC A
Rev
HPU TANK W/PUMP File: D1420A0001.idw
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
H H
ADJUSTABLE 10
02
M01
M06 M05 M02 05 06
M01 01 M10
04
M03
G G
M04
M07
M03
03 M07
F F
05 M06
M05
M02
M10
M04
M08 M09 01
03 SECTION A-A ( 1 : 1 ) M04
04 M01
E TIGHTENING OF BOLTS E
GRADE GRADE
M8 8.8 26 10.9 28
M10 8.8 50 10.9 56
M12 8.8 87 10.9 98
M14 8.8 137 10.9 156
M16 8.8 211 10.9 238
M18 8.8 294 10.9 332
M20 8.8 412 10.9 465
M22 8.8 554 10.9 626
M24 8.8 712 10.9 804
175 M08 M09 M27 8.8 1028 10.9 1161
ADJUSTABLE ROLLER SHOWN M30 8.8 1402 10.9 1582
IN NORMAL POSITION M33 8.8 1894 10.9 2133
M36 8.8 2440 10.9 2761
D (REF. LINES) M39 8.8 3135 10.9 3543 D
ISO R 989 TORQUE, TORQUE,
Nm Nm
NOTES
1. ALL BOLTS TO BE DRILLED THROUGH AND LOCKED WITH

A A
C 2. ALL SLIDING SURFACES TO BE LUBRICATED WITH EP2 C

01 GREASE BEFORE ASSEMBLING.
01
M10 STABURAGS (NBU 30) DURING ASSEMBLY.
M10
395
4. ALL UNPROTECTED AND PHOSPHATED SURFACES TO BE

COATED WITH CORROSION INHIBITOR "VALVOLINE TECTYL 506"
5. ADJUSTABLE ROLLER (ITEM 03) TO BE MOUNTED IN NORMAL

POSITION (REF. LINES).
M12 M11
MAX. ADJUSTMENT 10mm
B ISO 13920-AE EN 287-1/2 B
ISO 2768-mK-E EN 288-1/2/3/4 42,1
3 14.04.2004 UPDATE POS. 06 MAJ BYA BYA

2 26.09.2003 LAYOUT KBH BYA BYA
1 25.06.2003 ADD. POS. 06 KBH BYA BYA
M12 M11 belongs to National Oilwell Norway AS. It is loaned for limited purposes
Hydralift ASA
Title:
ASSEMBLY
TORQUE CARR.-WHEEL BRACKET
HPT 500 2E AC
200 A1
D1421-A0001 1 /1 3
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
H H
IN/ OUT ADJUSTMENT:
230 230 - UNSCREW 4 BOLTS
303 303
- TURN SUPPORT PLATE TO
SHIM AS NEEDED.
OBTAIN ROTATION OF THE
NO SHIM TO BE REMOVED DURING
ECCENTRIC WHEEL AXEL
ADJUSTMENTS, SHIMS CAN ONLY BE - AXLES TO BE ADJUSTED IN
SHIFTED FROM ONE SIDE TO THE OTHER. PAIRS
(UPPER AND LOWER)
306
G G
452
SHIM PLATE
F F
E E
FASTENING BOLTS
HOLE FOR JACKING BOLT (M20)
D D
HPT - TOP VIEW
WHEEL BRACKETS RETRACTED

AND LOCKED IN THE TORQUE TUBE
HPT - TOP VIEW
WHEEL BRACKETS FULLY EXTENDED
C C
4
UPPER AND LOWER CARRIAGE
ARE 2MM ECCENTRIC ALONG
TORQUE TUBE CENTRE LINE, HAIR PINS FOR TEMPORARY LOCKING OF
IN ORDER TO COMPENSATE TORQUE CARRIAGE IN OUTER POSITION
FOR TOPDRIVE HANGING ASKEW
DUE TO COG POSITION.
B B
A0001
0 02.04.2004 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION SGS BYA BYA
Title:
MAIN ASSY & ADJUSTMENT

TORQUE CARRIAGE
HPT 500 2E AC
1:5 A1
D1421-A0003 1 /1 0
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
15.04.03
1 ITEM 040 SPLITTED + AS SHOWN
M05 PARALELL SPRING = 2 ZOB
H M02 M03 SERIAL OF PARALELL SPRING SET = 12 H

(TOTAL 24 SPRINGS ON EACH SPRING SET)
M20
M18
M01 M21
M09
032
10 (PRE-TENSION)
039
040
G G
031 036
046 M17 M12

M04
M18 M19
2 038
M16
M11
033
DETAIL D ( 1 : 2 )
F F D F
M18 M23 M22 041 035 M15
SECTION A-A ( 1 : 4 ) SECTION B-B ( 1 : 4 )
M25
E M24 E
042
DETAIL G ( 1 : 1 )
M13
G
M14
M15
D D
VIEW FROM UNDERSIDE M06
E
M31 M07
M30
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
045
2
DETAIL E ( 1 : 2 )
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
C NOTES C
046 044 M28 M32 M29
SECTION C-C ( 1 : 4 )
PORT 2 SHOWN 1. ALL BOLTS TO BE DRILLED THROUGH AND LOCKED WITH
2. ALL SLIDING SURFACES TO BE LUBRICATED WITH EP2

GREASE BEFORE ASSEMBLING.

B 4. ALL UNPROTECTED AND PHOSPHATED SURFACES TO BE

B TIGHTENING OF BOLTS COATED WITH CORROSION INHIBITOR "VALVOLINE TECTYL 506" B
GRADE GRADE
M8 8.8 26 10.9 28 2 15.03.2004 POS 044,045,046,M28-M32 ADDED SGS BYA BYA
M10 8.8 50 10.9 56 Rev. Date Description Made Checked Appr.
M12 8.8 87 10.9 98 This document contains proprietary and confidential information which
A B A M14 8.8 137 10.9 156 belongs to National Oilwell Norway AS. It is loaned for limited purposes
C M16
M18
8.8
8.8
211
294
10.9
10.9
238
332
Hydralift ASA
DETAIL F ( 1 : 2 ) M20
M22
8.8
8.8
412
554
10.9
10.9
465
626
Title:
M24 8.8 712 10.9 804
M27 8.8 1028 10.9 1161 ASSEMBLY
M30
M33
8.8
8.8
1402
1894
10.9
10.9
1582
2133
ROTATING HEAD
M36 8.8 2440 10.9 2761 HPT 500 2E AC SYSTEM
A M39 8.8 3135 10.9 3543 Scale: Projection: Size: Main Part: A
ISO R 989 TORQUE, TORQUE, A1
Nm Nm Drawing Number: Sheet: Revision:
C D1431-A0005 1 /1 2
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
H 700 H
04
05 M03
G M02 G
M01
M02
M01 05
M01
F F
M01 M03
M03
E E
M03 M02 M02
TIGHTENING OF BOLTS
GRADE GRADE
SIZE Nm Nm
H.D.G PHOSPHATED
M8 8.8 26 10.9 28
M10 8.8 50 10.9 56
M12 8.8 87 10.9 98
M14 8.8 137 10.9 156
D M16 8.8 211 10.9 238 D
M18 8.8 294 10.9 332
M20 8.8 412 10.9 465
M22 8.8 554 10.9 626
M24 8.8 712 10.9 804
M27 8.8 1028 10.9 1161
M30 8.8 1402 10.9 1582
M33 8.8 1894 10.9 2133
M36 8.8 2440 10.9 2761
M39 8.8 3135 10.9 3543
TORQUE, TORQUE,
ISO R 989
Nm Nm
C C
B B
02.04.2003 ZOB 15.04.2003 BYA
Drawn Sheet Format
02.04.2003 ZOB 1 /1 A1 Kristiansand, Norway
A HPT 500 2E AC A
Rev
LINK HANGER File: D1433A0003.idw
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
07.1103
1 POS. M04 ADDED BYA
068
D 067 D
M01
C 1 1 C
071
M03
89

30
M02 M04
B B
TIGHTENING OF BOLTS NOTES

GRADE
GRADE
STAINLESS STEEL LOCKING WIRE= 1.0mm
M8 8.8 26 10.9 28
M10 8.8 50 10.9 56
M12 8.8 87 10.9 98
M14 8.8 137 10.9 156 This document and all information and data disclosed herein or herewith are the confidential and proprietary property of Hydralift asa,
M16 8.8 211 10.9 238 and are not to be used, reproduced or disclosed in whole or in part by or to anyone without the written permission of Hydralift asa.
M18 8.8 294 10.9 332 Designed Approved Projection Scale
M20 8.8 412 10.9 465 27.01.2003 ZOB 14.04.2003 BYA 1:2
M22 8.8 554 10.9 626 Drawn Sheet Format
M24 8.8 712 10.9 804 KAJ Kristiansand, Norway
A M27 8.8 1028 10.9 1161
11.02.2003 1 /1 A3 A
M30 8.8 1402 10.9 1582 Replaces Replaced by
M33 8.8 1894 10.9 2133 HPT 500 2E AC, LINK TILT
M36 8.8 2440 10.9 2761 Rev
M39 8.8 3135 10.9 3543 ELEVATOR LINK CLAMP (350 TONS) File: D1434A0013.idw
ISO R 989 TORQUE,
Nm
TORQUE,
Nm ASSEMBLY D1434-A0013 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
H H
G G
M01
F F
M01
E E
CLAMP FOR 500 TONS LINKS 012
D CLAMP FOR 350 TONS LINKS 013 D
NOTE:
-STANDARD DELIVERY INCLUDES 1 SET
OF CLAMPS (REF. ITEM 013) FOR 350 TONS
C ELEVATOR LINKS. C
-CLAMPS (REF. ITEM 012) FOR 500 TONS

CLAMP FOR 500 TONS LINKS
ELEVATOR LINKS CAN BE DELIVERED
012
AS OPTIONAL ITEM.
CLAMP FOR 350 TONS LINKS 013
B B
02.04.2003 ZOB 15.04.2003 BYA

Drawn Sheet Format
Kristiansand, Norway
02.04.2003 ZOB 1/1 A1
A
HPT 500 2E AC A
LINK TILT File: D1434A0015.idw Rev
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
814
30 (TO BE USED FOR
LIFTING OF THE HPT WHEN
H HANDLED HORIZONTAL IN H
TRANSPORT CRADLE
M02
M08
M02
M07
G G
M04
M04
M07
M01
M08
F 02 F
M01
M05 M06
461,5 02
M05 M06
E E
2160
D 01 D
C C
NOTES


B 3. ALL UNPROTECTED AND PHOSPHATED SURFACES TO BE B

TIGHTENING OF BOLTS COATED WITH CORROSION INHIBITOR "VALVOLINE TECTYL 506"
GRADE GRADE
M8 8.8 26 10.9 28
ISO 13920-AE EN 287-1/2 303 kg
M10 8.8 50 10.9 56
M12 8.8 87 10.9 98 ISO 2768-mK-E EN 288-1/2/3/4
M14 8.8 137 10.9 156 This document and all information and data disclosed herein or herewith are the confidential and proprietary property of Hydralift asa,
M16 8.8 211 10.9 238 and are not to be used, reproduced or disclosed in whole or in part by or to anyone without the written permission of Hydralift asa.
M18 8.8 294 10.9 332 Designed Approved Projection Scale
M20 8.8 412 10.9 465 27.01.2003 ZOB 15.04.2003 BYA 1:5
M22 8.8 554 10.9 626
Drawn Sheet Format
M24 8.8 712 10.9 804
04.02.2003 ZOB Kristiansand, Norway
M27 8.8 1028 10.9 1161 1 /1 A1
M30 8.8 1402 10.9 1582 Replaces Replaced by
A
M33 8.8 1894 10.9 2133 HPT 500 2E AC A
M36 8.8 2440 10.9 2761 Rev
M39 8.8 3135 10.9 3543 TORQUE COLUMN File: D1435A0003.idw
ISO R 989 TORQUE,
Nm
TORQUE,
Nm ASSEMBLY D1435-A0003 0
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
21.03.03
1 RANGE CHANGED
M08 ITEM 050,051,053.054,055 & 104 REVISED29.04.03
ZOB
H M06 M07 2
+ M21 & M22 ADDED ZOB
H
RANGE 100-240mm (2 7/8" D.P TO 9" IBOP) 21.11.03
3 REDESIGNED STABBING BELL KBH
70 (STROKE) 70 (STROKE)
B M13
M14 M20 050
G G
C M01
M22 056
M21
055 052
D
M15
DETAIL B ( 1 : 1 ) M18 053
M04
101
M09 A0017 M03
M11 051 M10 M03
F F
M18 102 M08
108 M04 M06

5 M03
SECTION A-A M26 M25
M04 M18 M15
M06
053
106
M07
106 M23 M24
A0017
M16 M09
051
E M11 E
M15
052 M09
M10
B1
101 M02
M02
DETAIL C ( 1 : 1 ) M16 B2
M08 103
M10
053 M03 M02 054
D M09 D
M06 M06 M07 M15 M09 104 NOTES

M11

STAINLESS STEEL LOCKING WIRE = 1.0mm. REF. HL4/A
PROCEDURE

M12 M15 055 GREASE BEFORE ASSEMBLING.
M05 M18 3. ALL BOLTS AND NUTS TO BE LUBRICATED WITH "KLUBER

C M18 M17 STABURAGS (NBU 30) DURING ASSEMBLY. C

5. GAS SPRING (ITEM M12) TO BE PRE-CHARGED TO MAX.

Tp. A2 Tp. A1 M01 M20 CHARGING PRESSURE (150 bar).
(Tp=TESTPOINT) M14
M13 6. POS. M17 (M12 BOLT ON STABBING BELL RUBBER) SHOULD
DETAIL D ( 1 : 1 ) NOT BE TIGHTENED TOO HARD, RESULTING IN RUBBER LIPS
A GETTING STUCK ON EACH OTHER
056
TIGHTENING OF BOLTS
B ISO 13920-AE EN 287-1/2 B
ALL BOLTS SLIGHTLY OILED ISO 2768-mK-E EN 288-1/2/3/4 638
GRADE GRADE
M8 8.8 26 10.9 28 5 14.05.2004 POS. 108 ADDED KBH SGS SGS
M10 8.8 50 10.9 56 4 08.03.2004 POS 106 & A0017 ADDED SGS KBH KBH
A A M12
M14
8.8
8.8
87
137
10.9
10.9
98
156
Rev. Date Description
Made Checked Appr.
M16 8.8 211 10.9 238 belongs to National Oilwell Norway AS. It is loaned for limited purposes
M18 8.8 294 10.9 332 Reproduction, in whole or in part, or use of this design or distribution of
M20 8.8 10.9 465 this information to others is not permitted without the express written
412 consent of National Oilwell Norway AS. This document is to be returned
Hydralift ASA
M22 8.8 554 10.9 626 to National Oilwell Norway AS upon request and in any event upon
M24 8.8 712 10.9 804
Title:
B M27 8.8 1028 10.9 1161
M30 8.8 1402 10.9 1582 ASSEMBLY
2133
M33
M36
8.8
8.8
1894
2440
10.9
10.9 2761 BACK UP GRABBER
Tp. B2
M39 8.8 3135 10.9 3543 HPT 500 2E AC
A Tp. B1 ISO R 989 TORQUE, TORQUE, Scale: Projection: Size: Main Part: A
Nm Nm
1:5 A1
D1436-A0015 1 /1 5
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
H H
(1:2)
G 111 G
110
F F
111 M06
M05
M04
109
109
M01
E E
M02
M03
M05
(1:2)
D D
9
23
C C
NOTES TIGHTENING OF BOLTS Tolerances except as noted Welding except as noted Total weight
B ALL BOLTS SLIGHTLY OILED ISO 13920-AE EN 287-1/2 B
Excerpt from HL/TP-15 ISO 2768-mK-E EN 288-1/2/3/4 24,7
Torque [Nm]
1. ALL BOLTS TO BE DRILLED THROUGH AND LOCKED WITH A4-80
Size Grade 8.8, Grade 10.9,

HDG Phosphated
M8 26 28 22
M10 50 56 44 0 05.03.2004 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION SGS KBH KBH
M12 87 98 76 Rev. Date Description Made Checked Appr.
M14 137 156 121 This document contains proprietary and confidential information which
2. ALL BOLTS AND NUTS TO BE LUBRICATED WITH "KLUBER M16 211 238 187 belongs to National Oilwell Norway AS. It is loaned for limited purposes
M18 294 332 260
STABURAGS (NBU 30) DURING ASSEMBLY. M20 412 465 364
M22 554 626 490 to National Oilwell Norway AS upon request and in any event upon SERVICEBOX 401, KORSVIKFJORDEN
M24 712 804 629
Title:
M27 1028 1161 909
M30 1402 1582 1240 HPT 500 2E AC, BACKUP GRABBER
M33
M36
1894
2440
2133
2761
1670
2160 GRABBER CENTRALIZER
M39 3135 3543 2770 ASSEMBLY DRAWING
1:2 A1 D1436-A0015
D1436-A0017 1 /1 0
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
H H
M01
G G
M02
670
07
F F
M05
OPEN
LOCKING WIRE M07
M08
ø5 HOLE DRILLED M04 M11 M06
THRU CYL. ROD
E FOR SPLIT PIN E
M09 M10
A
04
01 02 05
M08
CLOSED
LOCKING WIRE
D D
M07
M06 M04 M02 M03
ø5 HOLE DRILLED
02 03 NOTE : THRU FOR SPLIT PIN
CLEAN + APPLY LOCTITE 638
C ON ITEM 03 PRIOR MOUNTING
NOTES C
TO ITEM 01
DETAIL A ( 0,80 : 1 ) 1. BOLTS TO BE DRILLED THROUGH AND LOCKED WITH

GREASE BEFORE ASSEMBLING.


B B

ISO 13920-AE kg
EN 287-1/2
ISO 2768-mK-E EN 288-1/2/3/4
07.04.2003 ZOB 08.05.2003 BYA
Drawn Sheet Format
07.04.2003 ZOB 1 /1 A1 Kristiansand, Norway
02
A HPT 500 2E AC A
760 File: D1437A0003.idw Rev
IBOP ACTUATOR
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Document number
Component list Revision
Page 1 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Description HPT 500 2E AC
Manufacturer
Modelnumber GENERAL ARRANGEMENT
Ex class, temp. class, gas group,

ex cert. institute, ex cert ref
Level Material Disc. BOM item Description Remarks Quantity
.1 XT3035D1400A0 D1400 HPT 500 2E AC 1 N/A

001
..2 D1410 HPT 500 2E AC 1 N/A
XT3035D1410A0
001
...3 XD1411A0006 D1411 HPT-05, BAIL 1 N/A
....4 XD141100021 021 HPT, BAIL 0 N/A
.....5 S 145363523 Steel EEx d, , , , 0 kg
....4 XD141100025 025 HPT, BAIL 2 N/A

.....5 S 145368018 Steel EEx d, , , , 40,6 kg
....4 25161 M01 BOLT, HEX, M16 X 060MM 12 PCS

....4 XD141100022 022 HPT, BAIL 0 N/A
.....5 S 145359742 Steel EEx d, , , , 0 kg
....4 35377 M02 SPLIT PIN Ø 08MM 2 PCS

....4 XD141100057 057 HPT, BAIL 2 N/A
.....5 S 145856498 Steel EEx d, , , , 7,8 kg
....4 95755 M03 CASTLE NUT, M48, HDG 2 PCS

....4 81750 M21 BAIL FOR HPT 500 1 PCS
...3 XD1412A0005 D1412 HPT, THREAD COMP SYSTEM 1 N/A
Printed 02.02.2011 10:57:36 By:NOV\PettersenK
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 2 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer

....4 96822 M01 B-Link 1 PCS

....4 37507 M02 SHACKLE 17,0T. 1 PCS
....4 36197 M03 CHAIN JOINT 2 PCS
....4 36196 M04 CHAIN 15T WLL 1,5 M
...3 XD1413A0006 D1413 HPT-05, WATER COURSE 1 PCS
....4 XD141300015 015 HPT-05, WATER COURSE 1 N/A
.....5 S 145461390 Steel EEx d, , , , 125 kg
....4 24365 M02 PLUG FOR GOOSE NECH, 2 3/4"BSP 1 PCS

....4 89320000061 M03 O-RING 88,49, VIOR, VITON FOR 1 PCS
GOOSENECK
....4 26560 M06 WASHER, M24 8 PCS
....4 41053 M07 MUD CIRCUIT, GOOSE NECK, 1 PCS
.....5 47703 144876044 MUD CURCUIT, GOOSE NECK, 1 PCS
MOULDE
.....5 41054 144876042 MUD CIRCUIT, GOOSE NECK, 1 PCS
MACHINING
....4 XD141300014 014 HPT-05, WATER COURSE 0 N/A
.....5 S 145380940 Steel EEx d, , , , 0 kg
...3 XD1414A0003 D1414 HPT 500 2E AC 1 N/A
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 3 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer

....4 69569 M01 GEARBOX FOR HPS, 350/500T 1 PCS

....4 XD1414A0004 A0004 HPT, GEARBOX 1 N/A
.....5 XD141400019 019 HPT, GEARBOX 1 N/A
......6 S 145473794 Steel EEx d, , , , 3,3 kg
.....5 XD141400020 020 HPT, GEARBOX 1 N/A

......6 S 145473795 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,4 kg
.....5 17183 M02 BOLT, HEX, M12 X 040MM 4 PCS

.....5 18138 M01 WASHER, M12, A4 8 PCS
.....5 97539 M09 O-RING 70 SHORE, Ø106 1 PCS
.....5 97829 M13 FEMALE THREAD FLANGE 1" BSP 1 PCS
3000
.....5 67193 M12 FEMALE THREAD FLANGE 1 1/4" 1 PCS
3000
.....5 25637 M08 BOLT, INNER HEX, M10 X 040MM 8 PCS
.....5 13044 M11 O-RING FOR 1" SAE STAND FLANGE 1 PCS
.....5 13043 M07 O-RING FOR 1 1/4" SAE STAND 1 PCS
FLANGE
.....5 14182 M05 O-RING 70 SHORE 60 1 PCS
.....5 130153 M06 SHAFT SEAL, 25 40 7 SIMMERRING 1 PCS
.....5 141596 M04 FLEXIBLE COUPLING 1 PCS
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 4 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer

...3 XD1415A0004 D1415 HPT DRIVE MOTOR 1 N/A

....4 80583 EM102 ELECTRIC MOTOR f/TOP DRIVE 336 1 PCS
kW (450HP
....4 37121 M05 BOLT, HEX, DRILLED FOR LOCKING 18 PCS
....4 16410 M04 WASHER, M08, A4-80 45 PCS
....4 26558 M03 WASHER, M20 4 PCS
....4 XD141500002 002 HPT, DRIVE MOTOR 2 N/A
.....5 S 145362587 Steel EEx d, , , , 6 kg
....4 53990 JB103 JUNCTION BOX EEXE EEx e, T6, II, DNV, 2001-OSL-ATEX- 1 PCS
200x200x150mm SS 0176
....4 XD141500020 020 HPT-05, DRIVE MOTOR 1 N/A

.....5 S 145454806 Steel EEx d, , , , 1,9 kg

.....5 S 145453506 Steel EEx d, , , , 1 kg
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 5 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer

.....5 S 145371269 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,2 kg
....4 81484 JB102 JUNCTION BOX f/LAND RIG TD 1 PCS

EEXE SS COMP.
....4 13563 M08 NUT, M08, A4-80 8 PCS
.....5 S 145464655 Steel EEx d, , , , 5,9 kg
....4 XD141500026 026 DRIVE MOTOR 3 N/A

.....5 S 145511957 Steel EEx d, , , , 3 kg
....4 XD141500027 027 DRIVE MOTOR 1 N/A

.....5 S 145511961 Steel EEx d, , , , 1 kg
...3 XD1416A0008 D1416 HPT, PARKING BRAKE 1 N/A

....4 XD141600040 040 PARKING BRAKE 1 N/A
.....5 S 145510870 Steel EEx d, , , , 11,5 kg

.....5 S 145510871 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,4 kg
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 6 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer

.....5 S 145510872 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,1 kg
....4 XD141600023 023 HPT, PARKING BRAKE 1 N/A

.....5 S 145393252 Steel EEx d, , , , 27,4 kg

....4 16410 M02 WASHER, M08, A4-80 16 PCS
....4 95332 M03 Airflex 14 CB 400, single element 1 PCS
....4 30212 M04 LOCK SCREW M08 X 025MM 1 PCS
....4 25616 M05 BOLT, INNER HEX, M06 X 030MM 3 PCS
....4 14837 M06 WASHER, M06, A4-80 6 PCS
....4 26629 M07 NUT, M06, A4-80 3 PCS
....4 60273 M08 LOCK SCREW M06 X 012MM 1 PCS
....4 155610 M09 FLEXIBLE COUPLING REXNORD 1 PCS
....4 142605 146036036 PARKING BRAKE ASSEMBLY 1 PCS
...3 XD1418A0014 D1418 HPT, MOTOR COOLING 1 N/A
....4 95349 M01 CENTRIFUGAL FAN, RIGHT 1 PCS
HANDED
....4 81752 M02 INLET FILTER FOR VBL9 1 PCS
...3 XD1419A0003 D1419 HPT, DRILL STEM & IBOP 1 N/A
....4 XD1419I0001 I0001 HPS, DRILL STEM & IBOP 0 N/A
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 7 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer

.....5 S 145363518 Steel EEx d, , , , 0 kg
....4 141719 050 LOCKING RING FOR KELLY 3 PCS

....4 141720 051 LOCKING RING FOR KELLY 3 PCS
....4 XD1419I0008 I0008 HPS, DRILL STEM & IBOP 0 N/A
...3 XD1421A0001 D1421 HPT, TORQUE CARRIAGE 4 N/A
....4 XD142100003 03 HPT, TORQUE CARRIAGE 4 N/A
.....5 S 145360099 Steel EEx d, , , , 7,5 kg
....4 XD142100002 02 HPT-05, TORQUE CARRIAGE 4 N/A

.....5 S 145360098 Steel EEx d, , , , 24,1 kg

.....5 S 145360100 Steel EEx d, , , , 1,4 kg

.....5 S 145360092 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,08 kg

....4 96823 M06 CIRCLIP, 095 8 PCS
....4 10210 M07 CIRCLIP, 030 8 PCS
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 8 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer

....4 19586 M05 CIRCLIP, 060 4 PCS

....4 19842 M04 GREASE NIPPLE, M10X1,0 12 PCS
STRAIGHT 316
....4 96741 M01 TRACK ROLLER, YOKE, Ø72/35 X 29 8 PCS
....4 10911 M02 RADIAL SPHERICAL PLAIN 4 PCS
BEARING
.....5 S 145370355 Steel EEx d, , , , 3,7 kg
....4 96433 M03 HAIR PIN Ø 06 x 117MM 8 PCS

....4 26556 M09 WASHER, M16 16 PCS
....4 26558 M12 WASHER, M20 8 PCS
.....5 S 145360101 Steel EEx d, , , , 1,2 kg

..2 D1430 HPT 500 2E AC 1 N/A
XT3035D1430A0
001
...3 XD1431A0005 D1431 HPT, ROTATING HEAD 1 N/A
....4 XD143100033 033 HPT, ROTATING HEAD 1 N/A
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 9 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer

.....5 S 145358187 Steel EEx d, , , , 90 kg

.....5 S 145361618 Steel EEx d, , , , 5,5 kg

.....5 S 145362277 Steel EEx d, , , , 8,4 kg

.....5 S 145358189 Steel EEx d, , , , 4,4 kg

.....5 S 145358192 Steel EEx d, , , , 2,92 kg
....4 XD143100039 039 HPT/HPS, ROTATING HEAD 4 N/A

.....5 S 145358193 Steel EEx d, , , , 4,8 kg

.....5 S 145358194 Steel EEx d, , , , 219 kg
....4 22518 M01 SLEWING RING, 0644 1 PCS

....4 95709 M03 DISC SPRING, SF-TAF 96 PCS
....4 26665 M04 CASTLE NUT, M24 4 PCS
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 10 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer

....4 96485 M05 HYDR. CYLINDER 125/110 0 PCS

....4 95691 M13 V-RING 1 PCS
....4 142084 M14 SLYDRING 2 PCS
....4 95675 M06 O-RING 8 PCS
....4 95674 M07 ROTO GLYD RING 8 PCS
....4 12520 M15 GREASE NIPPLE, 1/8"BSP 2 PCS
....4 47853 M18 WASHER, M12, A4-80 52 PCS
....4 26612 M19 WASHER, M24 12 PAA
....4 32130 M20 WASHER, M16, A4-80 6 PCS
....4 13056 M22 THREADED ROD, M12 X 1000MM 4 PCS
....4 31635 M23 LOCK NUT, M12 8 PCS
....4 92764 M24 BACK-UP RING 14 PCS
....4 31641 M25 O-RING 90 SHORE Ø13 14 PCS
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 11 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer

.....5 S 145362588 Steel EEx d, , , , 48,4 kg
....4 91833 042 HPS ROTATING HEAD, SEALING 7 PCS

PISTON
....4 56592 M28 INITIATOR W/5 METER CABLE 0 PCS
....4 18139 M31 WASHER, M10, A4-80 3 PCS
....4 16410 M32 WASHER, M08, A4-80 3 PCS
.....5 S 145404318 Steel EEx d, , , , 1,2 kg

.....5 S 145440205 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,2 kg

....4 14837 M35 WASHER, M06, A4-80 2 PCS
.....5 S 146229112 Steel EEx d, , , , 1 kg
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 12 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer


.....5 S 145916210 Steel EEx d, , , , 1 kg

.....5 S 331591275 Steel EEx d, , , , 152 kg
...3 XD1433A0003 D1433 HPT, LINK HANGER 1 N/A

....4 81738 M04 LINK HANGER, HPT 500 1 PCS
....4 XD143300005 005 HPT, LINK HANGER 2 N/A
.....5 S 145355655 Steel EEx d, , , , 10,6 kg

....4 XD143300004 004 HPT, LINK HANGER 0 N/A
.....5 S 145355651 Steel EEx d, , , , 0 kg
....4 146585 146180950 LINK HANGER ASSEMBLY 1 PCS

....4 XD1433I0003 I03 HPT, LINK HANGER 0 N/A
.....5 S 231824139 Steel EEx d, , , , 0 kg

....4 26665 M02 CASTLE NUT, M24 4 PCS
...3 XD1434A0014 D1434 HPT 500 2E AC 1 N/A
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 13 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer

....4 XD1434A0012 012 HPS, LINK TILT 2 N/A

.....5 XD143400065 065 HPT, LINK TILT 2 N/A
......6 S 145360725 Steel EEx d, , , , 6,5 kg
.....5 XD143400066 066 HPT , LINK TILT 2 N/A

......6 S 145360726 Steel EEx d, , , , 6,7 kg
.....5 26667 M01 CASTLE NUT, M30 2 PCS

.....5 42173 M03 SPLIT PIN Ø 03,2MM 2 PCS
.....5 XD143400071 071 HPT, LINK TILT 2 N/A
......6 S 145373597 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,9 kg
.....5 26563 M04 WASHER, M30 4 PCS

...3 XD1435A0003 D1435 HPT, SUSPENSION FOR GRABBER 1 N/A
....4 XD143500014 01 HPT, SUSPENSION FOR GRABBER 1 N/A
.....5 S 145363520 Steel EEx d, , , , 286 kg
....4 96427 M02 BONDURA BOLT, ø60x270 2 PCS

....4 26563 M04 WASHER, M30 2 PCS
....4 XD143500015 02 HPT, SUSPENSION FOR GRABBER 2 N/A
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 14 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer

.....5 S 145363521 Steel EEx d, , , , 1,4 kg

....4 26556 M06 WASHER, M16 4 PCS
....4 26667 M07 CASTLE NUT, M30 2 PCS
....4 95427 M01 PLAIN BEARING 2 PCS
...3 XD1436A0015 D1436 HPT, GRABBER 1 N/A
....4 XD143600050 050 HPT, GRABBER 1 N/A
.....5 S 145360702 Steel EEx d, , , , 122 kg
....4 XD143600054 054 GRABBER 1 N/A

.....5 S 145360720 Steel EEx d, , , , 29,9 kg
....4 XD143600055 055 HPT, GRABBER 2 N/A

.....5 S 145360717 Steel EEx d, , , , 49,8 kg
....4 XD143600051 051 HPT, GRABBER 1 N/A

.....5 S 145360711 Steel EEx d, , , , 259 kg
....4 XD143600053 053 HPT, GRABBER 2 N/A

.....5 S 145360713 Steel EEx d, , , , 39,6 kg
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 15 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer

....4 XD143600101 101 HPT, GRABBER 2 N/A

.....5 S 145351616 Steel EEx d, , , , 61,6 kg
....4 XD143600052 052 HPT, GRABBER 2 N/A

.....5 S 145360712 Steel EEx d, , , , 22,8 kg
....4 XD143600056 056 HPT, GRABBER 1 N/A

.....5 S 145360721 Steel EEx d, , , , 11,1 kg
....4 XD143600102 102 HPT, GRABBER 2 N/A

.....5 S 145346821 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,6 kg
....4 27659 M01 EYE BOLT, M16, W/CERT. 1 PCS

....4 93143 M02 DIES 15" CURVATURE- CR715 2 PCS
....4 95701 M03 FIT BOLT, UNBRAKO 4 PCS
....4 14185 M08 O-RING 70 SHORE 159,3 2 PCS
....4 29998 M09 GUIDE STRIP/RING 150 4 PCS
....4 12031 M10 ROD WIPER SEAL 150 2 PCS
....4 12025 M11 PISTON/ROD SEAL 150 2 PCS
....4 26569 M13 WASHER, M48 1 PCS
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 16 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer

....4 95755 M14 CASTLE NUT, M48, HDG 1 PCS

....4 95687 M06 GUIDE STRIP/RING Ø170, 4 PCS
PTFE/40% BRONZE
....4 95688 M07 PISTON/ROD SEAL, ø170 2 PCS
....4 99548 M12 GAS SPRING, F1=3000N 2 PCS
....4 XD143600103 103 HPT, GRABBER 1 N/A
.....5 S 145371714 Steel EEx d, , , , 2 kg
....4 XD143600104 104 HPT, GRABBER 1 N/A

.....5 S 145371153 Steel EEx d, , , , 5,9 kg
....4 71981 M16 EO 316 PLUG BSPP 1/4-ED 8 PCS

....4 18138 M18 WASHER, M12, A4 24 PCS
....4 XD143600105 105 HPT, GRABBER 2 N/A
.....5 S 145376128 Steel EEx d, , , , 6,4 kg

....4 26556 M22 WASHER, M16 12 PCS
....4 XD143600106 106 HPT, GRABBER 1 N/A
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 17 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer

.....5 S 145436611 Steel EEx d, , , , 1,6 kg

....4 32130 M24 WASHER, M16, A4-80 2 PCS
....4 XD1436A0017 A0017 HPT, GRABBER 1 N/A
.....5 XD143600109 109 HPT, GRABBER 1 N/A
......6 S 145450277 Steel EEx d, , , , 9 kg
.....5 XD143600111 111 HPT, GRABBER 2 N/A

......6 S 145450279 Steel EEx d, , , , 2,6 kg
.....5 XD143600110 110 HPT, GRABBER 1 N/A

......6 S 145450278 Steel EEx d, , , , 9 kg
.....5 96741 M01 TRACK ROLLER, YOKE, Ø72/35 X 29 4 PCS

.....5 26554 M03 WASHER, M12 8 PCS
.....5 26664 M04 CASTLE NUT, M20 4 PCS
.....5 12520 M05 GREASE NIPPLE, 1/8"BSP 4 PCS
.....5 30006 M06 SPLIT PIN Ø 04MM 4 PCS
....4 14837 M26 WASHER, M06, A4-80 4 PCS
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 18 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer

....4 XD143600108 108 HPT, GRABBER 2 N/A

.....5 S 145446409 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,6 kg
....4 XD143600162 162 GRABBER 2 N/A

.....5 S 145488843 Steel EEx d, , , , 2 kg
...3 XD1437A0003 D1437 HPT, IBOP ACTUATOR 1 N/A

....4 XD143700012 012 HPT, IBOP ACTUATOR 1 N/A
.....5 S 145385903 Steel EEx d, , , , 31,7 kg

.....5 S 145385904 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,7 kg
....4 XD143700014 014 HPS, IBOP ACTUATOR 1 N/A

.....5 S 145385905 Steel EEx d, , , , 13,6 kg

.....5 S 145385906 Steel EEx d, , , , 5,2 kg

.....5 S 145385907 Steel EEx d, , , , 3,3 kg
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 19 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer

.....5 S 145385908 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,6 kg

.....5 S 145385909 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,1 kg
....4 98439 H01 IBOP PNEUMATIC CYLINDER 0 PCS

200/40x180
....4 26665 M01 CASTLE NUT, M24 1 PCS
....4 34188 M05 STUD TYPE TRACK ROLLER 2 PCS
....4 42286 M06 NUT, LOW TYPE M20 4 PCS
....4 19842 M07 GREASE NIPPLE, M10X1,0 2 PCS
STRAIGHT 316
....4 26554 M09 WASHER, M12 4 PCS
....4 67675 M04 BUSHING 2 PCS
.....5 S 145508098 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,6 kg
....4 16665 M10 WASHER, M24, A4-80 2 PCS

www.nov.com
Document number
Page 20 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer

.....5 S 145527588 Steel EEx d, , , , 1,3 kg
....4 142603 146221685 IBOP ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY 0 PCS

.1 XD1405A0005 D1405 HPT, SPECIAL TOOLS 1 N/A
..2 92624 M01 ALUMINIUM BOX, 415L 1 PCS
..2 XD1405A0006 A0006 HPS/HPT, SPECIAL TOOLS 1 N/A
...3 XD140500008 008 HPS, SPECIAL TOOLS 1 N/A
....4 33016 145495482 HPS LINK TILT, PIN HAMMER 0 PCS
....4 S 145327561 Steel EEx d, , , , 14,6 kg
...3 XD140500009 009 HPS, SPECIAL TOOL 1 N/A

....4 S 145327562 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,4 kg
...3 26650 M01 NUT, M30 2 PCS

...3 XD140500031 031 HPS, SPECIAL TOOL 1 N/A
....4 S 145450658 Steel EEx d, , , , 1,1 kg
....4 S 217108239 Steel EEx d, , , , 1 kg
....4 S 237409777 Steel EEx d, , , , 1 kg
....4 S 281092211 Steel EEx d, , , , 1 kg
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 21 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer

....4 S 281770668 Steel EEx d, , , , 1 kg
....4 S 290923917 Steel EEx d, , , , 1 kg
....4 S 304558701 Steel EEx d, , , , 1 kg
...3 81573 146011719 KNUCKLE LINK, PIN HAMMER 0 PCS

...3 XD140500007 225773285 HPS, SPECIAL TOOLS 1 N/A
....4 S 145327552 Steel EEx d, , , , 1,5 kg
..2 XD1405A0007 A0007 HPT-05, SPECIAL TOOLS 1 N/A

...3 XD140500032 032 HPT-05, SPECIAL TOOLS 1 N/A
....4 S 145441857 Steel EEx d, , , , 13,4 kg
...3 68490 M01 CHAIN JOINT 2 PCS

...3 17972 M02 SAFETY LINCH PIN, Ø 04MM 2 PCS
...3 25323 M03 BOLT, HEX, M30 X 080MM 1 PCS
...3 37515 M04 SHACKLE 3,25T. 4 PCS
...3 26559 M05 WASHER, M22 2 PCS
..2 XD140500030 030 HPS, SPECIAL TOOLS 1 N/A
...3 S 145449023 Steel EEx d, , , , 1 kg
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 22 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer

..2 28491 M02 GOOSENECK, MUD CIRCUIT 1 PCS

WIRELINE PLUG
..2 XD140500055 055 HPS, SPECIAL TOOLS 0 N/A
...3 S 145560248 Steel EEx d, , , , 0 kg
..2 146638 146221683 SPESIAL TOOLS, PIN HAMMER 0 PCS

AND LIFT. TOOL
.1 XT3035D1400E0 E0001 BLOCK DIAGRAM 1 N/A
001
..2 54354 01 Pressure switch 1 to 11 psig 1 PCS
..2 82138 02 PULSEENCODER 1024ppr. 4,5-30V. 1 PCS
..2 81319 03 THERMOELEMENT W/ EEx ia, T6, IIC, DEMKO, 02 ATEX 1 PCS
TRANSMITTER 126962
..2 82487 04 INITIATOR P+F 1 PCS

..2 82487 05 INITIATOR P+F 1 PCS
..2 81502 06 MAGNETIC FLOAT SWITCH KSR 1 PCS
..2 D01 BLOCK DIAGRAM 1 N/A
XT3035D1400E0
002
...3 56534 145498620 04X12 AWG ARM/SHEAT XT125 7M
POLYRAD
POLYRAD
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 23 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer


POLYRAD
POLYRAD
...3 80677 145499179 EXTENTION LOOP POWER,777- 1 PCS
3C,A&S
...3 80675 145499180 SERVICE LOOP POWER,3C 777.A&S 1 PCS
...3 80669 145499181 RECEPTACLE ASSEMBLY.777- 1 PCS
1C.A&S
1C.A&S
1C.A&S
...3 80679 145499184 EXTENTION CABLE ASSEMBLY A&S 1 PCS
...3 80674 145499186 RECEPTACLE ASSEMBLY 1 PCS
12C,MALE INSRT A&S
...3 80734 145499187 ELECTRIC MOTOR ABB,Exn 132M4 1 PCS
8,6KW-S1
..2 D02 TERMINATION DIAGRAM 1 N/A
XT3035D1400E0
100
XT3035D1400E0
101
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 24 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer


XT3035D1400E0
102
XT3035D1400E0
103
XT3035D1400E0
104
XT3035D1400E0
105
XT3035D1400E0
106
..2 D09 LAYOUT DIAGRAM 1 N/A
XT3035D1400E0
300
...3 D01 LOOP DIAGRAM 1 N/A
XT3035D1400E0
200
....4 50395 01 CIRCUIT BREAKER 16A 1 PCS
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 25 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer


....4 55012 08 SWITCH MODE POWER 432W 1 PCS
UNREG.
....4 56406 09 CONVERTER 24 Vdc/24 Vdc 10 A 1 PCS
....4 55012 10 SWITCH MODE POWER 432W 1 PCS
UNREG.
....4 51144 11 POWER SUPPLY FIM-SYSTEM 1 PCS
24Vdc
....4 53180 12 CONTACTOR RELAY 24VDC 1 PCS
XT3035D1400E0
201
....4 56831 01 CPU 315-2DP 1 PCS
....4 53302 02 DIG. INPUT 16x24 /UTGÅTT USE 1 PCS
ITEM 146780
....4 53336 03 DIG. OUTPUT 16CH RELAY 1 PCS
....4 53336 04 DIG. OUTPUT 16CH RELAY 1 PCS
....4 55176 05 ANALOG INPUT 8 CH 1 PCS
....4 55177 06 ANALOG OUTPUT 4 CH 1 PCS
....4 53298 07 BATTERY, BACK-UP S7-300 1 PCS
3,6V/0.95Ah
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 26 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer

....4 53298 08 BATTERY, BACK-UP S7-300 1 PCS

3,6V/0.95Ah
....4 53306 09 FRONT CONNECTOR 4 PCS
....4 53301 10 BACKPLATE, 530 MM 1 PCS
XT3035D1400E0
202
....4 50814 01 POTMETER REPEATER EEXI,1CH,0- EEx ia, T4, IIC, BASEEFA, 1 PCS
10V, BAS00ATEX7171X

XT3035D1400E0
203
....4 51260 01 IS-BARRIER F/INITIATORS (EEXI) EEx ia, NA, IIC, PTB, PTB 00 ATEX 1 PCS
2CH,RELAY 2080
2CH,RELAY 2080
2CH,RELAY 2080

XT3035D1400E0
204
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 27 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer


XT3035D1400E0
205
....4 50815 01 TRANSM.REPEATER/POWER EEXI 1 PCS
1CH 4-20/4-20
....4 50815 02 TRANSM.REPEATER/POWER EEXI 1 PCS
1CH 4-20/4-20
XT3035D1400E0
207
XT3035D1400E0
208
XT3035D1400E0
209
XT3035D1400E0
210
XT3035D1400E0
211
....4 50197 01 RELAY MINIATURE 10A/16A 1 POL 1 PCS
....4 50198 02 SOCKET FOR MINIATURE RELAY 1 1 PCS
POL
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 28 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer


POL
POL
POL
XT3035D1400E0
206
....4 81294 01 VALVE CONTROLLER CARD/HAWE 1 PCS
12/24V
....4 81296 02 HOLDER f/ELECTRONIC CARD 1 PCS
EUR.SIZE
XT3035D1400E0
301
...3 81484 01 JUNCTION BOX f/LAND RIG TD 1 PCS
EEXE SS COMP.
...3 80412 02 EEXE CABLE GLAND BRASS M40 EEx e, , II, BASEEFA, 3 PCS
BAS01ATEX2266X
...3 12734 03 TEFLON WASHER M40 3 PCS

...3 50512 04 EX BACKNUT BRASS M40 3 PCS
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 29 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer

...3 80408 05 EEXE CABLE GLAND BRASS M25 EEx e, NA, II, BASEEFA, 01 ATEX 1 PCS
2266X

...3 55831 08 EEXE DRAIN NIPPLE BRASS M20 1 PCS
COMPLETE
..2 D11 BLANK PAGE 1 N/A
XT3035D1400E0
302
XT3035D1400E0
303
...3 53990 01 JUNCTION BOX EEXE EEx e, T6, II, DNV, 2001-OSL-ATEX- 1 PCS
200x200x150mm SS 0176
...3 80408 02 EEXE CABLE GLAND BRASS M25 EEx e, NA, II, BASEEFA, 01 ATEX 3 PCS
2266X

...3 55831 05 EEXE DRAIN NIPPLE BRASS M20 1 PCS
COMPLETE
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 30 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer

...3 80412 06 EEXE CABLE GLAND BRASS M40 EEx e, , II, BASEEFA, 1 PCS
BAS01ATEX2266X

XT3035D1400E0
304
...3 81414 01 CPU-CPM REMOTE I/O 1 PCS
...3 81415 02 BASE FOR CPM 1 PCS
...3 81416 03 PLUG FOR CPM 120 ohm 1 PCS
...3 81417 04 DIG.OUT REMOTE I/O [EEx ib], T4, IIC, PTB, PTB 99 ATEX 1 PCS
2220
...3 81418 05 DIG. INPUT 16 ch. REMOTE I/O EEx ib, T4, IIC, PTB, PTB 99 ATEX 1 PCS
2184
2220
...3 81420 07 ANALOG OUTPUT 8 ch. REMOTE I/O [EEx ib], T4, IIC, PTB, PTB 99 ATEX 1 PCS
2207
...3 81421 08 CABLE REMOTE I/O, 1.1 m 1 PCS
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 31 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer

...3 81422 09 PLUG FOR BUSRAIL STOP END 1 PCS

...3 81423 10 PLUG FOR BUSRAIL STOP BEGIN 1 PCS
...3 81424 11 PLUG FOR BUSRAIL STOP SUB-D 1 PCS
BEGIN
...3 81425 12 PLUG FOR BUSRAIL STOP SUB-D 1 PCS
END
...3 81426 13 TERMINAL BLUE 9 PCS
...3 81427 14 BUSRAIL REMOTE I/O 2 PCS
...3 81428 15 PROFIBUS DP REPEATER REMOTE 1 PCS
I/O
...3 80760 16 TWISTCONTR. WO/SPRING 1 PCS
RETURN 0-280 deg.
2220
...3 81418 18 DIG. INPUT 16 ch. REMOTE I/O EEx ib, T4, IIC, PTB, PTB 99 ATEX 1 PCS
2184
...3 81497 19 ANALOG INSTR.Ex 4-20mA 1 PCS

TROPES.IP56
...3 81497 20 ANALOG INSTR.Ex 4-20mA 1 PCS
TROPES.IP56
...3 80692 21 RECEPTACLE.DRILLERS CONSOLE 1 PCS
16-12PR
..2 82009 07 CONNECTOR,FEMALE,37X16AWG 1 PCS
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 32 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer

..2 82010 08 CONNECTOR,MALE,37X16AWG 1 PCS

..2 56533 CAB01 12X02X16 AWG ARM/SHEAT XT125 10 M
POLYRAD
..2 56533 CAB02 12X02X16 AWG ARM/SHEAT XT125 1M
POLYRAD
..2 56533 CAB03 12X02X16 AWG ARM/SHEAT XT125 1M
POLYRAD
..2 82714 13 PRESSURE SWITCH 1 PCS
..2 80678 CAB04 EXTENTION CABLE ASSEMBLY 1 PCS
A&S 60METER
..2 80673 CAB05 RECEPTACLE ASSEMBLY 1 PCS
68C,MALE INSRT A&S
..2 80676 CAB06 SERVICE LOOP AUXILARY A&S 1 PCS
..2 80691 CAB07 DRILLERS CONSOLE CABLE#16- 1 PCS
12PR A&S
..2 51028 14 PRESSURE SWITCH EEx d, T6, IIC, SIRA, 02ATEX1087X 1 PCS
..2 81517 15 THERMOELEMENT W/ 1 PCS

TRANSMITTER
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 33 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer

.1 XT3035D1400H0 H0003 HYDRALIFT PORTABLE TOPDRIVE 1 N/A

003
..2 32773 H50 DUST EXCLUDER AISI316 1 PCS
..2 21853 H51 RETURN FILTER 120L 1 PCS
..2 39359 H52 BALL VALVE 1/2" BSP 2 PCS
..2 81810 H01 VALVE BLOCK FOR HPT500 1 PCS
..2 96497 H02 ORBIT MOTOR 260 CCM 1 PCS
..2 96483 H05 HYDR. CYLINDER 100/63 2 PCS
..2 63110 H04 CHECK VALVE 3/4" 1 PCS
..2 81826 H07 BREATHER FILTER 1 PCS
..2 96689 H08 AXIAL PISTON PUMP 1 PCS
..2 11993 H12 MINIMESS, 1/4" BSP 6 PCS
..2 19229 H20 CHECK VALVE 1" 1 PCS
..2 37501 H21 PRESSURE GAUGE 0-16 BAR 1 PCS
..2 96700 H22 OIL COOLER ELEMENT with bypass 1 PCS
..2 98898 H23 RETURN FILTER, 80L 1 PCS
..2 XD1436A0015 H29 HPT, GRABBER 1 N/A
...3 XD143600050 050 HPT, GRABBER 1 N/A
....4 S 145360702 Steel EEx d, , , , 122 kg
...3 XD143600054 054 GRABBER 1 N/A
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 34 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer

....4 S 145360720 Steel EEx d, , , , 29,9 kg
...3 XD143600055 055 HPT, GRABBER 2 N/A

....4 S 145360717 Steel EEx d, , , , 49,8 kg
...3 XD143600051 051 HPT, GRABBER 1 N/A

....4 S 145360711 Steel EEx d, , , , 259 kg
...3 XD143600053 053 HPT, GRABBER 2 N/A

....4 S 145360713 Steel EEx d, , , , 39,6 kg
...3 XD143600101 101 HPT, GRABBER 2 N/A

....4 S 145351616 Steel EEx d, , , , 61,6 kg
...3 XD143600052 052 HPT, GRABBER 2 N/A

....4 S 145360712 Steel EEx d, , , , 22,8 kg
...3 XD143600056 056 HPT, GRABBER 1 N/A

....4 S 145360721 Steel EEx d, , , , 11,1 kg
...3 XD143600102 102 HPT, GRABBER 2 N/A

....4 S 145346821 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,6 kg
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 35 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer

...3 27659 M01 EYE BOLT, M16, W/CERT. 1 PCS

...3 93143 M02 DIES 15" CURVATURE- CR715 2 PCS
...3 95701 M03 FIT BOLT, UNBRAKO 4 PCS
...3 14185 M08 O-RING 70 SHORE 159,3 2 PCS
...3 29998 M09 GUIDE STRIP/RING 150 4 PCS
...3 12031 M10 ROD WIPER SEAL 150 2 PCS
...3 12025 M11 PISTON/ROD SEAL 150 2 PCS
...3 26569 M13 WASHER, M48 1 PCS
...3 95755 M14 CASTLE NUT, M48, HDG 1 PCS
...3 95687 M06 GUIDE STRIP/RING Ø170, 4 PCS
PTFE/40% BRONZE
...3 95688 M07 PISTON/ROD SEAL, ø170 2 PCS
...3 99548 M12 GAS SPRING, F1=3000N 2 PCS
...3 12520 M15 GREASE NIPPLE, 1/8"BSP 6 PCS
...3 XD143600103 103 HPT, GRABBER 1 N/A
....4 S 145371714 Steel EEx d, , , , 2 kg
...3 XD143600104 104 HPT, GRABBER 1 N/A

....4 S 145371153 Steel EEx d, , , , 5,9 kg
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 36 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer

...3 71981 M16 EO 316 PLUG BSPP 1/4-ED 8 PCS

...3 18138 M18 WASHER, M12, A4 24 PCS
...3 XD143600105 105 HPT, GRABBER 2 N/A
....4 S 145376128 Steel EEx d, , , , 6,4 kg
...3 35377 M20 SPLIT PIN Ø 08MM 1 PCS

...3 26556 M22 WASHER, M16 12 PCS
...3 XD143600106 106 HPT, GRABBER 1 N/A
....4 S 145436611 Steel EEx d, , , , 1,6 kg

...3 32130 M24 WASHER, M16, A4-80 2 PCS
...3 XD1436A0017 A0017 HPT, GRABBER 1 N/A
....4 XD143600109 109 HPT, GRABBER 1 N/A
.....5 S 145450277 Steel EEx d, , , , 9 kg
....4 XD143600111 111 HPT, GRABBER 2 N/A

.....5 S 145450279 Steel EEx d, , , , 2,6 kg
....4 XD143600110 110 HPT, GRABBER 1 N/A
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 37 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer

.....5 S 145450278 Steel EEx d, , , , 9 kg

....4 26554 M03 WASHER, M12 8 PCS
....4 26664 M04 CASTLE NUT, M20 4 PCS
...3 37105 M25 BOLT, HEX, DRILLED FOR LOCKING 4 PCS
...3 14837 M26 WASHER, M06, A4-80 4 PCS
...3 XD143600108 108 HPT, GRABBER 2 N/A
....4 S 145446409 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,6 kg
...3 XD143600162 162 GRABBER 2 N/A

....4 S 145488843 Steel EEx d, , , , 2 kg

..2 99491 H44 FILTERREG. AND LUBRICATOR 1 PCS
UNIT
..2 81781 H46 VALVE MANIFOLD BLOCK FOR 1 PCS
HPT, -20 deg
..2 98439 H48 IBOP PNEUMATIC CYLINDER 1 PCS
200/40x180
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 38 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer

..2 11114 H49 BALL VALVE 1" 1 PCS

..2 21750 H54 FLOW CONTROL VALVE, SINGLE 2 PCS
ACTION
..2 98438 H03 SCREW PUMP, 32 CCM, OILTECH 1 PCS
..2 98564 H09 Servo-suction valve 1 PCS
..2 98563 H10 CHECK VALVE 3/4" 1 PCS
..2 99318 H11 CHECK VALVE 1 1/4" 1 PCS
..2 11100 H13 BALL VALVE 1" LONG THREADED 1 PCS
..2 143294 H57 PUMP/MOTOR UNIT 1 PCS
..2 47944 H55 CHECK VALVE 1" BSP 1 PCS
..2 24248 H40 QUICK COUPLING, FEMALE, 1/2" 1 PCS
BSP- 316
..2 24249 H41 QUICK COUPLING, MALE, 1/2" - 316 1 PCS
..2 145478564 HYDRAULIC HOSE LIST 1 PCS
HT3035D1400H0
003
...3 AAG0055GJHI 101 HYD HOSE STEEL CUT HOSE 1 PCS
LENGTH
....4 125025 145479135 210 BAR HOSE, HYDRAULIC,1" 0,55 M
....4 125208 145479136 1X36X2.0-25 DKO-S STRAIGHT 1 PCS
....4 125227 145479137 1X36X2.0-25 DKO-S 90DEGREE 1 PCS
....4 26980 145479138 MOUNTING COST HYDR. HOSE 1 PCS
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 39 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer

...3 AAF0085GHGH 102 HYD HOSE STEEL CUT HOSE 1 PCS

LENGTH
....4 125020 145479140 210 BAR HOSE, HYDRAULIC, 3/4" 0,85 M
....4 125206 145479141 3/4X30X2.0-20 DKO-S STRAIGHT 1 PCS
...3 AAG0120GJHI 104 HYD HOSE STEEL CUT HOSE 1 PCS
LENGTH
....4 125227 145439302 1X36X2.0-25 DKO-S 90DEGREE 1 PCS
...3 AAC0026GDHD 105 HYD HOSE STEEL CUT HOSE 1 PCS
LENGTH
....4 125222 145480342 3/8X20X1.5-12 DKO-S 90DEGREE 1 PCS
LENGTH
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 40 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer


...3 AAF0275GHGH 200 HYD HOSE STEEL CUT HOSE 1 PCS
LENGTH
...3 AAG0065GJII 201 HYD HOSE STEEL CUT HOSE 1 PCS
LENGTH
....4 125246 145474126 1X36X2.0-25 DKO-S P88 45 1 PCS
DEGREE
...3 AAG0075GJGJ 203 HYD HOSE STEEL CUT HOSE 1 PCS
LENGTH
...3 AAA0060GCHC 300 HYDRAULIC HOSE WITH STEEL 1 PCS
COUPLING
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 41 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer


...3 AAD0050GEHE 301 HYD HOSE STEEL CUT HOSE 1 PCS
LENGTH
COUPLING
...3 AAA0250GCGC 401 HYD HOSE STEEL CUT HOSE 1 PCS
LENGTH
....4 125004 145479740 210 BAR HOSE, HYDRAULIC, 1/4" 2,5 PCS
...3 AAC0030GDID 801 HYDRAULIC HOSE WITH STEEL 1 PCS
COUPLING
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 42 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer


....4 125242 145440261 3/8X20X1.5-12 DKO-S P88 45 1 PCS
DEGREE
COUPLING
....4 125242 145440261 3/8X20X1.5-12 DKO-S P88 45 1 PCS
DEGREE
...3 AAC0095GDGD 803 HYDRAULIC HOSE WITH STEEL 1 PCS
COUPLING
COUPLING
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 43 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer


LENGTH
....4 125005 145478446 210 BAR HOSE, HYDRAULIC, 3/8" 5M
COUPLING
....4 125242 145440261 3/8X20X1.5-12 DKO-S P88 45 1 PCS
DEGREE
...3 AAC0045GDHD 504 HYDRAULIC HOSE WITH STEEL 1 PCS
COUPLING
COUPLING
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 44 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer


LENGTH
COUPLING
COUPLING
COUPLING
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 45 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer


COUPLING
...3 AAC0165GDGD 511 HYD HOSE STEEL CUT HOSE 1 PCS
LENGTH
COUPLING
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 46 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer


COUPLING
...3 AAC0083GDID 530 HYD HOSE STEEL CUT HOSE 1 PCS
LENGTH
....4 125242 145480358 3/8X20X1.5-12 DKO-S P88 45 1 PCS
DEGREE
...3 AAC0086GDID 531 HYD HOSE STEEL CUT HOSE 1 PCS
LENGTH
....4 125242 145480363 3/8X20X1.5-12 DKO-S P88 45 1 PCS
DEGREE
COUPLING
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 47 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer


COUPLING
LENGTH
....4 125010 145480368 210 BAR HOSE, HYDRAULIC, 1/2" 3M
LENGTH
...3 AAD0225GEGE 540 HYD HOSE STEEL CUT HOSE 1 PCS
LENGTH
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 48 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer


...3 AAD0215GEHE 541 HYDRAULIC HOSE WITH STEEL 1 PCS
COUPLING
COUPLING
.1 94242 M01 HPS WATER COURSE ( 5000 PSI ) 1 PCS
..2 XD1413A0001 76787980 HPS-02/-03/HPT-05, WATER 0 N/A
COURSE
...3 31590 001 WASH PIPE 0 PCS
...3 89111007102 002 LOWER NUT 0 PCS
...3 89111007202 003 LOCK SREW, LOWER NUT 0 PCS
WASHPIPE
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 49 of 49
BOM XT3035D1400G0001
Manufacturer

...3 89111007302 004 LOWER SPACER 0 PCS

...3 89111007402 005 INTERMEDIATE SPACER 0 PCS
...3 89111007502 006 UPPER SPACER 0 PCS
...3 89111014902 007 UPPER SEAL HOLDER FOR 5000 0 PCS
AND 7500 PSI
...3 89111014802 008 UPPER NUT 0 PCS
...3 89113004902 009 O-RING, FOR 5000 AND 7500 PSI 0 PCS
...3 13887 010 GREASE NIPPLE 1/8" NPT 0 PCS
STRAIGHT
...3 89113005002 011 WASH PIPE PACKING, SET OF 5 0 PCS
...3 89111003102 012 RING 0 PCS
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 1 of 29
BOM XT3035D1400A0002
Description HPT 500 - 2E - AC
Manufacturer
Modelnumber MAIN ASSEMBLY

.1 XT3035D1410A0 D1410 HPT 2E AC 1 N/A

002
..2 XD1412A0005 D1412 HPT, THREAD COMP SYSTEM 1 N/A
...3 96822 M01 B-Link 1 PCS
...3 37507 M02 SHACKLE 17,0T. 1 PCS
...3 36197 M03 CHAIN JOINT 2 PCS
...3 36196 M04 CHAIN 15T WLL 1,5 M
..2 XD1411A0006 D1411 HPT-05, BAIL 1 N/A
...3 XD141100021 021 HPT, BAIL 0 N/A
....4 S 145363523 Steel EEx d, , , , 0 kg
...3 XD141100025 025 HPT, BAIL 2 N/A

....4 S 145368018 Steel EEx d, , , , 40,6 kg

...3 XD141100022 022 HPT, BAIL 0 N/A
....4 S 145359742 Steel EEx d, , , , 0 kg

...3 XD141100057 057 HPT, BAIL 2 N/A
....4 S 145856498 Steel EEx d, , , , 7,8 kg

www.nov.com
Document number
Page 2 of 29
BOM XT3035D1400A0002
Manufacturer

...3 81750 M21 BAIL FOR HPT 500 1 PCS

..2 XD1418A0021 D1418 MOTOR COOLING 1 N/A
...3 XD141500016 016 HPT 500 2E AC, DRIVE MOTOR W/ 1 N/A
....4 S 145449633 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,17 kg
...3 XD141800051 051 MOTOR COOLING 1 N/A

....4 S 145447319 Steel EEx d, , , , 7,8 kg

....4 S 145011760 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,9 kg

....4 S 145007454 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,1 kg
...3 99755 M01 FAN FOR COOLER 1 PCS

...3 18139 M03 WASHER, M10, A4-80 22 PCS
...3 26630 M04 NUT, M10, A4-80 2 PCS
...3 26516 M06 WASHER, M04, A4-80 1 PCS
...3 14837 M09 WASHER, M06, A4-80 4 PCS
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 3 of 29
BOM XT3035D1400A0002
Manufacturer

...3 27084 M10 COUNTERSUNK BOLT, M10 X 2 PCS

040MM
...3 27165 M02 PAL-NUT, M10 8 PCS
...3 XD141500015 015 DRIVE MOTOR 1 N/A
....4 S 145436506 Steel EEx d, , , , 1 kg
..2 XD1413A0005 D1413 HPT-05, WATER COURSE 1 N/A

...3 24365 M06 PLUG FOR GOOSE NECH, 2 3/4"BSP 1 PCS
...3 26560 M02 WASHER, M24 8 PCS
...3 89320000061 M03 O-RING 88,49, VIOR, VITON FOR 1 PCS
GOOSENECK
...3 XD141300006 006 HPS, WATER COURSE 0 N/A
....4 S 145329150 Steel EEx d, , , , 0 kg
...3 XD1413S0013 S0013 HPT, WATER COURSE 1 N/A

....4 41053 M09 MUD CIRCUIT, GOOSE NECK, 1 PCS
.....5 47703 144876044 MUD CURCUIT, GOOSE NECK, 1 PCS
MOULDE
.....5 41054 144876042 MUD CIRCUIT, GOOSE NECK, 1 PCS
MACHINING
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 4 of 29
BOM XT3035D1400A0002
Manufacturer

....4 60708 M01 WECO UNION 4" 1 PCS

....4 XD141300009 009 HPS, WATER COURSE 0 N/A
.....5 S 145332683 Steel EEx d, , , , 0 kg
....4 S 001 Steel EEx d, , , , 0 kg
..2 XD1401A0006 D1401 HPT, SERVICE LOOP 1 N/A

...3 XD140100021 021 HPS, SERVICE LOOP 1 N/A
....4 S 145407288 Steel EEx d, , , , 9,9 kg

....4 S 145407289 Steel EEx d, , , , 4,4 kg

....4 S 145414350 Steel EEx d, , , , 4 kg
...3 XD140100025 025 HPT, SERVICE LOOP 1 N/A

....4 S 145448535 Steel EEx d, , , , 74,3 kg
...3 XD140100026 026 HPT-05, SERVICE LOOP 2 N/A

....4 S 145451588 Steel EEx d, , , , 3 kg
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 5 of 29
BOM XT3035D1400A0002
Manufacturer

...3 26556 M02 WASHER, M16 6 PCS

...3 18139 M05 WASHER, M10, A4-80 8 PCS
..2 XD1414A0005 D1414 HPT, GEARBOX 1 N/A
...3 XD141400012 012 HPT 2 N/A
...3 69569 M01 GEARBOX FOR HPS, 350/500T 1 PCS
...3 147886 M92 DEFLECTOR FOR HPT 1 PCS
...3 17705 M04 WASHER, M16, A4-80 8 PCS
...3 XD1414A0018 A0018 HPT-05, GEARBOX 1 N/A
....4 81975 M11 HPT, BRACKET FOR VALVES & 1 PCS
INSTR. JB
....4 18138 M02 WASHER, M12, A4 6 PCS
....4 18139 M04 WASHER, M10, A4-80 12 PCS
....4 26630 M05 NUT, M10, A4-80 4 PCS
....4 XD141400011 011 HPT, GEARBOX 0 N/A
.....5 S 145409702 Steel EEx d, , , , 0 kg
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 6 of 29
BOM XT3035D1400A0002
Manufacturer

....4 26629 M07 NUT, M06, A4-80 2 PCS

...3 XD1414I0014 I0014 HPT-05 GEARBOX 0 N/A
....4 S 145505795 Steel EEx d, , , , 0 kg
...3 XD1414A0032 A0032 HPT, GEARBOX 1 N/A

....4 18139 M01 WASHER, M10, A4-80 4 PCS
....4 XD141400066 066 HPT, GEARBOX 1 N/A
.....5 S 145531277 Steel EEx d, , , , 1,8 kg
....4 147899 146036029 OIL FILTER 1 PCS

...3 XD141400092 092 HPT-05, GEARBOX 0 N/A
....4 S 145648247 Steel EEx d, , , , 0 kg
...3 146634 M13 MOTOR SUPPORT BRACKET 2 PCS

...3 29385 M07 NUT, M16, VG 8 PCS
...3 26642 M08 NUT, M12 2 PCS
...3 130483 M09 NUT, LOW TYPE M12 2 PCS
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 7 of 29
BOM XT3035D1400A0002
Manufacturer


...3 26554 M12 WASHER, M12 8 PCS
...3 XD141400114 114 HPS, GEARBOX 1 N/A
....4 S 145968371 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,9 kg
..2 XD1415A0007 D1415 HPT, DRIVE MOTOR 1 N/A

...3 53990 JB102 JUNCTION BOX EEXE EEx e, T6, II, DNV, 2001-OSL-ATEX- 2 PCS
200x200x150mm SS 0176
...3 81484 JB101 JUNCTION BOX f/LAND RIG TD 2 PCS

EEXE SS COMP.
...3 82158 EM102 ELECTRIC MOTOR f/TOP DRIVE 336 1 PCS
kW (450HP
...3 16410 M03 WASHER, M08, A4-80 52 PCS
...3 16231 M02 WASHER, M20, A4-80 8 PCS
...3 XD141500021 021 HPT-05, DRIVE MOTOR 1 N/A
....4 S 145464655 Steel EEx d, , , , 5,9 kg
...3 13563 M07 NUT, M08, A4-80 8 PCS
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 8 of 29
BOM XT3035D1400A0002
Manufacturer


...3 27071 M09 EYE BOLT, M24 W/CERTIFICAT 2 PCS
...3 XD141500027 027 DRIVE MOTOR 2 N/A
....4 S 145511961 Steel EEx d, , , , 2 kg
...3 XD141500026 026 DRIVE MOTOR 2 N/A

....4 S 145511957 Steel EEx d, , , , 2 kg
...3 XD141500014 014 HPT, DRIVE MOTOR 1 N/A

....4 S 145392622 Steel EEx d, , , , 3,5 kg

....4 S 145371269 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,4 kg

....4 S 145362587 Steel EEx d, , , , 6 kg
...3 XD1415A0015 A15 HPT, DRIVE MOTOR 4 N/A

....4 XD141500026 26 DRIVE MOTOR 4 N/A
.....5 S 145511957 Steel EEx d, , , , 1 kg
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 9 of 29
BOM XT3035D1400A0002
Manufacturer

.....5 S 145860813 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,4 kg

.....5 S 145454806 Steel EEx d, , , , 1,9 kg

....4 14837 M02 WASHER, M06, A4-80 16 PCS
....4 16410 M04 WASHER, M08, A4-80 20 PCS
...3 146583 146036033 DRIVE MOTOR W/ACCESSORIES 1 PCS
..2 XD1421A0001 D1421 HPT, TORQUE CARRIAGE 4 N/A
...3 XD142100003 03 HPT, TORQUE CARRIAGE 4 N/A
....4 S 145360099 Steel EEx d, , , , 7,5 kg
...3 XD142100002 02 HPT-05, TORQUE CARRIAGE 4 N/A

....4 S 145360098 Steel EEx d, , , , 24,1 kg

....4 S 145360100 Steel EEx d, , , , 1,4 kg

....4 S 145360092 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,08 kg
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 10 of 29
BOM XT3035D1400A0002
Manufacturer


...3 96823 M06 CIRCLIP, 095 8 PCS
...3 10210 M07 CIRCLIP, 030 8 PCS
...3 19586 M05 CIRCLIP, 060 4 PCS
...3 19842 M04 GREASE NIPPLE, M10X1,0 12 PCS
STRAIGHT 316
...3 96741 M01 TRACK ROLLER, YOKE, Ø72/35 X 29 8 PCS
...3 10911 M02 RADIAL SPHERICAL PLAIN 4 PCS
BEARING
....4 S 145370355 Steel EEx d, , , , 3,7 kg
...3 96433 M03 HAIR PIN Ø 06 x 117MM 8 PCS

...3 26556 M09 WASHER, M16 16 PCS
...3 26558 M12 WASHER, M20 8 PCS
....4 S 145360101 Steel EEx d, , , , 1,2 kg

..2 XD1418A0018 D1418 HPT, MOTOR COOLING 1 N/A
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 11 of 29
BOM XT3035D1400A0002
Manufacturer

...3 XD1418A0016 A0016 HPT, MOTOR COOLING 1 N/A

....4 XD141800034 034 HPT MOTOR COOLING 1 N/A
.....5 S 145348090 Steel EEx d, , , , 12,1 kg
....4 XD1418A0011 A0011 HPT, MOTOR COOLING 1 N/A

.....5 95350 ? CENTRIFUGAL FAN, LEFT HANDED 1 PCS
.....5 81752 M02 INLET FILTER FOR VBL9 1 PCS
....4 14837 M02 WASHER, M06, A4-80 12 PCS
....4 26629 M03 NUT, M06, A4-80 6 PCS
....4 18139 M05 WASHER, M10, A4-80 32 PCS
....4 26630 M06 NUT, M10, A4-80 16 PCS
.....5 S 145388243 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,05 kg
....4 XD141500027 027 DRIVE MOTOR 1 N/A

.....5 S 145511961 Steel EEx d, , , , 1 kg

....4 16410 M08 WASHER, M08, A4-80 6 PCS
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 12 of 29
BOM XT3035D1400A0002
Manufacturer

....4 147727 M09 HPS MOTOR COOLING SYSTEM, 1 PCS

RUBBER TUBE
...3 XD1418A0017 A0017 HPT, MOTOR COOLING 1 N/A
....4 XD141800035 035 HPS, MOTOR COOLING 1 N/A
.....5 S 145358850 Steel EEx d, , , , 12,1 kg

.....5 S 145388243 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,1 kg
....4 XD1418A0014 A0014 HPT, MOTOR COOLING 1 N/A

.....5 95349 M01 CENTRIFUGAL FAN, RIGHT 1 PCS
HANDED
.....5 81752 M02 INLET FILTER FOR VBL9 1 PCS
....4 14837 M02 WASHER, M06, A4-80 12 PCS
....4 26629 M03 NUT, M06, A4-80 6 PCS
....4 18139 M05 WASHER, M10, A4-80 32 PCS
....4 26630 M06 NUT, M10, A4-80 16 PCS
....4 XD141500027 027 DRIVE MOTOR 1 N/A
.....5 S 145511961 Steel EEx d, , , , 1 kg
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 13 of 29
BOM XT3035D1400A0002
Manufacturer

....4 16410 M08 WASHER, M08, A4-80 6 PCS

....4 147727 M09 HPS MOTOR COOLING SYSTEM, 1 PCS
RUBBER TUBE
..2 XD1420A0001 D1420 HPT, ON BOARD HPU 1 N/A
...3 XD142000001 001 HPT, ON BOARD HPU 1 N/A
....4 S 145348115 Steel EEx d, , , , 81 kg

...3 14837 M05 WASHER, M06, A4-80 18 PCS
...3 22068 M15 NUT, M12, A4-80 8 PCS
....4 S 145387224 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,1 kg
...3 21853 H51 RETURN FILTER 120L 0 PCS

...3 81826 H07 BREATHER FILTER 0 PCS
...3 81319 E01 THERMOELEMENT W/ EEx ia, T6, IIC, DEMKO, 02 ATEX 0 PCS
TRANSMITTER 126962
...3 81502 E02 MAGNETIC FLOAT SWITCH KSR 0 PCS

...3 98406 H15 COMPENSATOR 1 1/2" SAE 0 PCS
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 14 of 29
BOM XT3035D1400A0002
Manufacturer

...3 25654 M13 BOLT, INNER HEX, M12 X 100MM 4 PCS

...3 47853 M14 WASHER, M12, A4-80 10 PCS
...3 18139 M09 WASHER, M10, A4-80 8 PCS
...3 22480 M19 LEVEL GAUGE W/THERMOMETRE 1 PCS
...3 11116 H52-2 BALL VALVE 1/2" 0 PCS
....4 S 145393532 Steel EEx d, , , , 2,4 kg

....4 S 145393533 Steel EEx d, , , , 4,2 kg
...3 31311 M02 WASHER, M05, A4-80 6 PCS

...3 13044 M16 O-RING FOR 1" SAE STAND FLANGE 2 PCS
...3 80734 E03 ELECTRIC MOTOR ABB,Exn 132M4 0 PCS
8,6KW-S1
...3 96770 M29 FLEXIBLE COUPLING, COMPLETE 1 PCS
...3 96689 H08 AXIAL PISTON PUMP 0 PCS
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 15 of 29
BOM XT3035D1400A0002
Manufacturer

...3 96769 M30 BELL HOUSING 1 PCS

...3 13045 M18 O-RING FOR 1 1/2" SAE STAND 2 PCS
FLANGE
...3 10946 M06 PLUG, 1/2" 4 PCS
...3 10611 M17 STRAIGHT CONN. 16-1/2"BSP, B/O 1 PCS
...3 145274 146180948 HPU TANK W/PUMP 1 PCS
..2 XD1419A0003 D1419 HPT, DRILL STEM & IBOP 1 N/A
...3 XD1419I0001 I0001 HPS, DRILL STEM & IBOP 0 N/A
....4 S 145363518 Steel EEx d, , , , 0 kg
...3 141719 050 LOCKING RING FOR KELLY 3 PCS

...3 141720 051 LOCKING RING FOR KELLY 3 PCS
...3 XD1419I0008 I0008 HPS, DRILL STEM & IBOP 0 N/A
..2 XD1416A0008 D1416 HPT, PARKING BRAKE 2 N/A
...3 XD141600040 040 PARKING BRAKE 2 N/A
....4 S 145510870 Steel EEx d, , , , 11,5 kg

....4 S 145510871 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,4 kg
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 16 of 29
BOM XT3035D1400A0002
Manufacturer

....4 S 145510872 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,1 kg
...3 XD141600023 023 HPT, PARKING BRAKE 2 N/A

....4 S 145393252 Steel EEx d, , , , 27,4 kg

...3 16410 M02 WASHER, M08, A4-80 32 PCS
...3 95332 M03 Airflex 14 CB 400, single element 2 PCS
...3 30212 M04 LOCK SCREW M08 X 025MM 2 PCS
...3 14837 M06 WASHER, M06, A4-80 12 PCS
...3 26629 M07 NUT, M06, A4-80 6 PCS
...3 60273 M08 LOCK SCREW M06 X 012MM 2 PCS
...3 155610 M09 FLEXIBLE COUPLING REXNORD 2 PCS
...3 142605 146036036 PARKING BRAKE ASSEMBLY 2 PCS
.1 XT3035D1430A0 D1430 HPT 2E AC 1 N/A
002
..2 XD1431A0005 D1431 HPT, ROTATING HEAD 1 N/A
...3 XD143100033 033 HPT, ROTATING HEAD 1 N/A
....4 S 145358187 Steel EEx d, , , , 90 kg
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 17 of 29
BOM XT3035D1400A0002
Manufacturer

....4 S 145361618 Steel EEx d, , , , 5,5 kg

....4 S 145362277 Steel EEx d, , , , 8,4 kg

....4 S 145358189 Steel EEx d, , , , 4,4 kg

....4 S 145358192 Steel EEx d, , , , 2,92 kg
...3 XD143100039 039 HPT/HPS, ROTATING HEAD 4 N/A

....4 S 145358193 Steel EEx d, , , , 4,8 kg

....4 S 145358194 Steel EEx d, , , , 219 kg
...3 22518 M01 SLEWING RING, 0644 1 PCS

...3 95709 M03 DISC SPRING, SF-TAF 96 PCS
...3 26665 M04 CASTLE NUT, M24 4 PCS
...3 96485 M05 HYDR. CYLINDER 125/110 0 PCS
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 18 of 29
BOM XT3035D1400A0002
Manufacturer

...3 95691 M13 V-RING 1 PCS

...3 142084 M14 SLYDRING 2 PCS
...3 95675 M06 O-RING 8 PCS
...3 95674 M07 ROTO GLYD RING 8 PCS
...3 47853 M18 WASHER, M12, A4-80 52 PCS
...3 26612 M19 WASHER, M24 12 PAA
...3 32130 M20 WASHER, M16, A4-80 6 PCS
...3 13056 M22 THREADED ROD, M12 X 1000MM 4 PCS
...3 31635 M23 LOCK NUT, M12 8 PCS
...3 92764 M24 BACK-UP RING 14 PCS
...3 31641 M25 O-RING 90 SHORE Ø13 14 PCS
....4 S 145362588 Steel EEx d, , , , 48,4 kg
...3 91833 042 HPS ROTATING HEAD, SEALING 7 PCS

PISTON
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 19 of 29
BOM XT3035D1400A0002
Manufacturer


...3 56592 M28 INITIATOR W/5 METER CABLE 0 PCS
...3 18139 M31 WASHER, M10, A4-80 3 PCS
...3 16410 M32 WASHER, M08, A4-80 3 PCS
....4 S 145404318 Steel EEx d, , , , 1,2 kg

....4 S 145440205 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,2 kg

...3 14837 M35 WASHER, M06, A4-80 2 PCS
....4 S 146229112 Steel EEx d, , , , 1 kg

....4 S 145916210 Steel EEx d, , , , 1 kg
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 20 of 29
BOM XT3035D1400A0002
Manufacturer


....4 S 331591275 Steel EEx d, , , , 152 kg
..2 XD1433A0003 D1433 HPT, LINK HANGER 1 N/A

...3 81738 M04 LINK HANGER, HPT 500 1 PCS
...3 XD143300005 005 HPT, LINK HANGER 2 N/A
....4 S 145355655 Steel EEx d, , , , 10,6 kg

...3 XD143300004 004 HPT, LINK HANGER 0 N/A
....4 S 145355651 Steel EEx d, , , , 0 kg
...3 146585 146180950 LINK HANGER ASSEMBLY 1 PCS

...3 XD1433I0003 I03 HPT, LINK HANGER 0 N/A
....4 S 231824139 Steel EEx d, , , , 0 kg

...3 26665 M02 CASTLE NUT, M24 4 PCS
..2 XD1437A0003 D1437 HPT, IBOP ACTUATOR 1 N/A
...3 XD143700012 012 HPT, IBOP ACTUATOR 1 N/A
....4 S 145385903 Steel EEx d, , , , 31,7 kg
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 21 of 29
BOM XT3035D1400A0002
Manufacturer


....4 S 145385904 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,7 kg
...3 XD143700014 014 HPS, IBOP ACTUATOR 1 N/A

....4 S 145385905 Steel EEx d, , , , 13,6 kg

....4 S 145385906 Steel EEx d, , , , 5,2 kg

....4 S 145385907 Steel EEx d, , , , 3,3 kg

....4 S 145385908 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,6 kg

....4 S 145385909 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,1 kg
...3 98439 H01 IBOP PNEUMATIC CYLINDER 0 PCS

200/40x180
...3 26665 M01 CASTLE NUT, M24 1 PCS
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 22 of 29
BOM XT3035D1400A0002
Manufacturer

...3 34188 M05 STUD TYPE TRACK ROLLER 2 PCS

...3 42286 M06 NUT, LOW TYPE M20 4 PCS
...3 19842 M07 GREASE NIPPLE, M10X1,0 2 PCS
STRAIGHT 316
...3 26554 M09 WASHER, M12 4 PCS
...3 67675 M04 BUSHING 2 PCS
....4 S 145508098 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,6 kg
...3 16665 M10 WASHER, M24, A4-80 2 PCS

....4 S 145527588 Steel EEx d, , , , 1,3 kg
...3 142603 146221685 IBOP ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY 0 PCS

..2 XD1434A0015 D1434 HPT, LINK TILT 1 N/A
...3 XD1434A0013 A0013 HPS, LINK TILT 2 N/A
....4 XD143400067 067 HPT, LINK TILT 2 N/A
.....5 S 145351614 Steel EEx d, , , , 6,2 kg
....4 XD143400068 068 HPT LINK TILT 2 N/A

.....5 S 145346435 Steel EEx d, , , , 6,4 kg
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 23 of 29
BOM XT3035D1400A0002
Manufacturer

....4 26667 M01 CASTLE NUT, M30 2 PCS

.....5 S 145373597 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,9 kg
....4 42173 M03 SPLIT PIN Ø 03,2MM 2 PCS

....4 26563 M04 WASHER, M30 4 PCS
...3 XD1434A0012 A0012 HPS, LINK TILT 2 N/A
.....5 S 145360725 Steel EEx d, , , , 6,5 kg
....4 XD143400066 066 HPT , LINK TILT 2 N/A

.....5 S 145360726 Steel EEx d, , , , 6,7 kg
....4 26667 M01 CASTLE NUT, M30 2 PCS

....4 42173 M03 SPLIT PIN Ø 03,2MM 2 PCS
.....5 S 145373597 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,9 kg
....4 26563 M04 WASHER, M30 4 PCS

...3 146584 146180951 LINK TILT ASSEMBLY, HPT 0 PCS
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 24 of 29
BOM XT3035D1400A0002
Manufacturer

..2 XD1436A0015 D1436 HPT, GRABBER 1 N/A

...3 XD143600050 050 HPT, GRABBER 1 N/A
....4 S 145360702 Steel EEx d, , , , 122 kg
...3 XD143600054 054 GRABBER 1 N/A

....4 S 145360720 Steel EEx d, , , , 29,9 kg
...3 XD143600055 055 HPT, GRABBER 2 N/A

....4 S 145360717 Steel EEx d, , , , 49,8 kg
...3 XD143600051 051 HPT, GRABBER 1 N/A

....4 S 145360711 Steel EEx d, , , , 259 kg
...3 XD143600053 053 HPT, GRABBER 2 N/A

....4 S 145360713 Steel EEx d, , , , 39,6 kg
...3 XD143600101 101 HPT, GRABBER 2 N/A

....4 S 145351616 Steel EEx d, , , , 61,6 kg
...3 XD143600052 052 HPT, GRABBER 2 N/A

....4 S 145360712 Steel EEx d, , , , 22,8 kg
...3 XD143600056 056 HPT, GRABBER 1 N/A
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 25 of 29
BOM XT3035D1400A0002
Manufacturer

....4 S 145360721 Steel EEx d, , , , 11,1 kg
...3 XD143600102 102 HPT, GRABBER 2 N/A

....4 S 145346821 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,6 kg
...3 27659 M01 EYE BOLT, M16, W/CERT. 1 PCS

...3 93143 M02 DIES 15" CURVATURE- CR715 2 PCS
...3 95701 M03 FIT BOLT, UNBRAKO 4 PCS
...3 14185 M08 O-RING 70 SHORE 159,3 2 PCS
...3 29998 M09 GUIDE STRIP/RING 150 4 PCS
...3 12031 M10 ROD WIPER SEAL 150 2 PCS
...3 12025 M11 PISTON/ROD SEAL 150 2 PCS
...3 26569 M13 WASHER, M48 1 PCS
...3 95687 M06 GUIDE STRIP/RING Ø170, 4 PCS
PTFE/40% BRONZE
...3 95688 M07 PISTON/ROD SEAL, ø170 2 PCS
...3 99548 M12 GAS SPRING, F1=3000N 2 PCS
...3 XD143600103 103 HPT, GRABBER 1 N/A
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 26 of 29
BOM XT3035D1400A0002
Manufacturer

....4 S 145371714 Steel EEx d, , , , 2 kg
...3 XD143600104 104 HPT, GRABBER 1 N/A

....4 S 145371153 Steel EEx d, , , , 5,9 kg
...3 71981 M16 EO 316 PLUG BSPP 1/4-ED 8 PCS

...3 18138 M18 WASHER, M12, A4 24 PCS
...3 XD143600105 105 HPT, GRABBER 2 N/A
....4 S 145376128 Steel EEx d, , , , 6,4 kg

...3 26556 M22 WASHER, M16 12 PCS
...3 XD143600106 106 HPT, GRABBER 1 N/A
....4 S 145436611 Steel EEx d, , , , 1,6 kg

...3 32130 M24 WASHER, M16, A4-80 2 PCS
...3 XD1436A0017 A0017 HPT, GRABBER 1 N/A
....4 XD143600109 109 HPT, GRABBER 1 N/A
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 27 of 29
BOM XT3035D1400A0002
Manufacturer

.....5 S 145450277 Steel EEx d, , , , 9 kg
....4 XD143600111 111 HPT, GRABBER 2 N/A

.....5 S 145450279 Steel EEx d, , , , 2,6 kg
....4 XD143600110 110 HPT, GRABBER 1 N/A

.....5 S 145450278 Steel EEx d, , , , 9 kg

....4 26554 M03 WASHER, M12 8 PCS
....4 26664 M04 CASTLE NUT, M20 4 PCS
...3 14837 M26 WASHER, M06, A4-80 4 PCS
...3 XD143600108 108 HPT, GRABBER 2 N/A
....4 S 145446409 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,6 kg
...3 XD143600162 162 GRABBER 2 N/A

....4 S 145488843 Steel EEx d, , , , 2 kg
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 28 of 29
BOM XT3035D1400A0002
Manufacturer

..2 XD1435A0003 D1435 HPT, SUSPENSION FOR GRABBER 1 N/A

...3 XD143500014 01 HPT, SUSPENSION FOR GRABBER 1 N/A
....4 S 145363520 Steel EEx d, , , , 286 kg
...3 96427 M02 BONDURA BOLT, ø60x270 2 PCS

...3 26563 M04 WASHER, M30 2 PCS
...3 XD143500015 02 HPT, SUSPENSION FOR GRABBER 2 N/A
....4 S 145363521 Steel EEx d, , , , 1,4 kg

...3 26556 M06 WASHER, M16 4 PCS
...3 26667 M07 CASTLE NUT, M30 2 PCS
...3 95427 M01 PLAIN BEARING 2 PCS
..2 XD1404A0002 D1404 HPS/HPT, WIRE LINE EQUIPMENT 0 N/A
...3 XD140400002 002 HPS/HPT, WIRE LINE EQUIPMENT 0 N/A
....4 S 145460906 Steel EEx d, , , , 46,4 kg

....4 S 145465348 Steel EEx d, , , , 7 kg
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 29 of 29
BOM XT3035D1400A0002
Manufacturer

....4 S 145456453 Steel EEx d, , , , 1,4 kg

....4 S 145457095 Steel EEx d, , , , 0,2 kg
...3 90403 M01 WIRE SHEAVE 9", FOR Ø10 mm 0 PCS

WIRE
...3 26646 M03 NUT, M20 0 PCS
...3 18139 M05 WASHER, M10, A4-80 0 PCS
...3 26642 M07 NUT, M12 0 PCS
...3 47783 M09 SHACKLE 0,5T. 0 PCS
....4 S 145529483 Steel EEx d, , , , 1,6 kg
...3 81568 146011718 WIRE LINE GUIDE ASSEMBLY 0 PCS

.1 47716 MO1 ELEVATOR LINK, 2 3/4" x 108", 350T 0 PAA
www.nov.com
Customer Parts List
Drawing No.: T3035-D1400-H0003 Drawing Name: Remarks:
Revision: 1 HYDRALIFT PORTABLE TOPDRIVE
Item No: XT3035D1400H0003 HPT500-2E-AC
Updated 17.01.2005 FLOW DIAGRAM
Other Doc No:
Project:
Customer:
Qty Item No. Drawing Reference / Remarks

Pos
Unit Wgt. Item Name Tag No.
1 81810
H01
100,00 VALVE BLOCK FOR HPT500 PCV50102-01
1 96497
H02
8,57 ORBIT MOTOR 260 CCM DT-HYM50102
1 98438
H03
4,40 SCREW PUMP, 32 CCM, OILTECH
1 63110
H04
0,67 CHECK VALVE 3/4"
2 96483
H05
30,00 HYDR. CYLINDER 100/63
1 96485
H06
60,00 HYDR. CYLINDER 125/110
1 81826
H07
0,40 BREATHER FILTER
1 96689
H08
25,00 AXIAL PISTON PUMP
1 98564
H09
0,50 SERVO-SUCTION VALVE
1 98563
H10
0,70 CHECK VALVE 3/4"
1 99318
H11
2,80 CHECK VALVE 1 1/4"
6 11993
H12
0,10 MINIMESS, 1/4" BSP
1 11100
H13
0,39 BALL VALVE 1" LONG THREADED
1 19229
H20
0,88 CHECK VALVE 1"
1 37501
H21
0,30 PRESSURE GAUGE 0-16 BAR PI 50102-01
www.nov.com PDFPartslist.exe (1.28.4044.17814) (XAL) 02.02.2011 13:55:40 Page: 1 of 3

Customer Parts List
Other Doc No:
Project:
Customer:

Pos
1 96700
H22
3,00 OIL COOLER ELEMENT with bypass DT-FEM50102
1 98898
H23
4,00 RETURN FILTER, 80L
1 XD1436A0015 D1436-A0015
H29
HPT, GRABBER;2E AC, ASSEMBLY;ASSEMBLY
652,86 DT-HCLV50102-01
DRAWING
2 96484
H30
19,00 HYDR. CYLINDER 63/40 DT-HCLA50102-01
1 24248
H40
0,37 QUICK COUPLING, FEMALE, 1/2" BSP- 316
1 24249
H41
0,10 QUICK COUPLING, MALE, 1/2" - 316
1 99491
H44
1,00 FILTERREG. AND LUBRICATOR UNIT
1 81781
H46
0,00 VALVE MANIFOLD BLOCK FOR HPT, -20 deg
1 98439
H48
22,22 IBOP PNEUMATIC CYLINDER 200/40x180 DT-ACL 50102
1 11114
H49
2,36 BALL VALVE 1"
1 32773
H50
0,10 DUST EXCLUDER AISI316
1 21853
H51
2,20 RETURN FILTER 120L
2 39359
H52
0,53 BALL VALVE 1/2" BSP
2 21750
H54
0,37 FLOW CONTROL VALVE, SINGLE ACTION
1 143294
H57
0,00 PUMP/MOTOR UNIT

Customer Parts List
Other Doc No:
Project:
Customer:

Pos
1 47944
H55
1,00 CHECK VALVE 1" BSP
1 HT3035D1400H0003
16,15 HYDRAULIC HOSE LIST
Total weight 1010,37

National Oilwell Varco Norway
CUSTOMER PARTS LIST
Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : HT3035D140
Debtor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . :
Hull Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . :
Machine Number . . . . . . . . . . :
Draw number . . . . . . : Drawing revision . . . . . . . . . . :

Item No. . . . . . . . . . . . . : HT3035D1400H0003 HYDRAULIC HOSE LIST
T3035
Item group . . . . . . . . . : 3250-003 HYDRAULIC HOSE COMP.

CustDocNo . . . . . . . . . :
Position Tag No Quantity Item name Item No. Drawing Reference
101 1,0 HYD HOSE STEEL CUT HOSE LENGTH AAG0055GJHI T3035-D1400-H0003
102 1,0 HYD HOSE STEEL CUT HOSE LENGTH AAF0085GHGH T3035-D1400-H0003
104 1,0 HYD HOSE STEEL CUT HOSE LENGTH AAG0120GJHI T3035-D1400-H0003
105 1,0 HYD HOSE STEEL CUT HOSE LENGTH AAC0026GDHD T3035-D1400-H0003
200 1,0 HYD HOSE STEEL CUT HOSE LENGTH AAF0275GHGH T3035-D1400-H0003
201 1,0 HYD HOSE STEEL CUT HOSE LENGTH AAG0065GJII T3035-D1400-H0003
203 1,0 HYD HOSE STEEL CUT HOSE LENGTH AAG0075GJGJ T3035-D1400-H0003
300 1,0 HYDRAULIC HOSE WITH STEEL COUPLING AAA0060GCHC T3035-D1400-H0003
301 1,0 HYD HOSE STEEL CUT HOSE LENGTH AAD0050GEHE T3035-D1400-H0003
401 1,0 HYD HOSE STEEL CUT HOSE LENGTH AAA0250GCGC T3035-D1400-H0003
504 1,0 HYDRAULIC HOSE WITH STEEL COUPLING AAC0045GDHD T3035-D1400-H0003
"External Documents" HL110: Date 02/02-11 08:35 Page 1

CUSTOMER PARTS LIST

T3035

CustDocNo . . . . . . . . . :
508 1,0 HYDRAULIC HOSE WITH STEEL COUPLING AAC0040GDGD T3035-D1400-H0003
511 1,0 HYD HOSE STEEL CUT HOSE LENGTH AAC0165GDGD T3035-D1400-H0003
530 1,0 HYD HOSE STEEL CUT HOSE LENGTH AAC0083GDID T3035-D1400-H0003
531 1,0 HYD HOSE STEEL CUT HOSE LENGTH AAC0086GDID T3035-D1400-H0003
540 1,0 HYD HOSE STEEL CUT HOSE LENGTH AAD0225GEGE T3035-D1400-H0003
541 1,0 HYDRAULIC HOSE WITH STEEL COUPLING AAD0215GEHE T3035-D1400-H0003
801 1,0 HYDRAULIC HOSE WITH STEEL COUPLING AAC0030GDID T3035-D1400-H0003

CUSTOMER PARTS LIST

T3035

CustDocNo . . . . . . . . . :

Document number
Page 1 of 11
BOM XT3035D1400E0001
Description BLOCK DIAGRAM
Manufacturer
Modelnumber INSTRUMENT

.1 54354 01 Pressure switch 1 to 11 psig 1 PCS

.1 82138 02 PULSEENCODER 1024ppr. 4,5-30V. 1 PCS
.1 81319 03 THERMOELEMENT W/ EEx ia, T6, IIC, DEMKO, 02 ATEX 1 PCS
TRANSMITTER 126962
.1 82487 04 INITIATOR P+F 1 PCS

.1 82487 05 INITIATOR P+F 1 PCS
.1 81502 06 MAGNETIC FLOAT SWITCH KSR 1 PCS
.1 XT3035D1400E0 D01 BLOCK DIAGRAM 1 N/A
002
..2 56534 145498620 04X12 AWG ARM/SHEAT XT125 7M
POLYRAD
POLYRAD
POLYRAD
POLYRAD
..2 80677 145499179 EXTENTION LOOP POWER,777- 1 PCS
3C,A&S
..2 80675 145499180 SERVICE LOOP POWER,3C 777.A&S 1 PCS
..2 80669 145499181 RECEPTACLE ASSEMBLY.777- 1 PCS
1C.A&S
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 2 of 11
BOM XT3035D1400E0001
Manufacturer


1C.A&S
1C.A&S
..2 80679 145499184 EXTENTION CABLE ASSEMBLY A&S 1 PCS
..2 80674 145499186 RECEPTACLE ASSEMBLY 1 PCS
12C,MALE INSRT A&S
..2 80734 145499187 ELECTRIC MOTOR ABB,Exn 132M4 1 PCS
8,6KW-S1
.1 XT3035D1400E0 D02 TERMINATION DIAGRAM 1 N/A
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
.1 XT3035D1400E0 D09 LAYOUT DIAGRAM 1 N/A
300
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 3 of 11
BOM XT3035D1400E0001
Manufacturer

..2 D01 LOOP DIAGRAM 1 N/A

XT3035D1400E0
200
...3 50395 01 CIRCUIT BREAKER 16A 1 PCS
...3 55012 08 SWITCH MODE POWER 432W 1 PCS
UNREG.
...3 56406 09 CONVERTER 24 Vdc/24 Vdc 10 A 1 PCS
...3 55012 10 SWITCH MODE POWER 432W 1 PCS
UNREG.
...3 51144 11 POWER SUPPLY FIM-SYSTEM 1 PCS
24Vdc
...3 53180 12 CONTACTOR RELAY 24VDC 1 PCS
XT3035D1400E0
201
...3 56831 01 CPU 315-2DP 1 PCS
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 4 of 11
BOM XT3035D1400E0001
Manufacturer

...3 53302 02 DIG. INPUT 16x24 /UTGÅTT USE 1 PCS

ITEM 146780
...3 53336 03 DIG. OUTPUT 16CH RELAY 1 PCS
...3 53336 04 DIG. OUTPUT 16CH RELAY 1 PCS
...3 55176 05 ANALOG INPUT 8 CH 1 PCS
...3 55177 06 ANALOG OUTPUT 4 CH 1 PCS
...3 53298 07 BATTERY, BACK-UP S7-300 1 PCS
3,6V/0.95Ah
...3 53298 08 BATTERY, BACK-UP S7-300 1 PCS
3,6V/0.95Ah
...3 53306 09 FRONT CONNECTOR 4 PCS
...3 53301 10 BACKPLATE, 530 MM 1 PCS
XT3035D1400E0
202
...3 50814 01 POTMETER REPEATER EEXI,1CH,0- EEx ia, T4, IIC, BASEEFA, 1 PCS
10V, BAS00ATEX7171X

XT3035D1400E0
203
...3 51260 01 IS-BARRIER F/INITIATORS (EEXI) EEx ia, NA, IIC, PTB, PTB 00 ATEX 1 PCS
2CH,RELAY 2080
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 5 of 11
BOM XT3035D1400E0001
Manufacturer

2CH,RELAY 2080
2CH,RELAY 2080

XT3035D1400E0
204
XT3035D1400E0
205
...3 50815 01 TRANSM.REPEATER/POWER EEXI 1 PCS
1CH 4-20/4-20
...3 50815 02 TRANSM.REPEATER/POWER EEXI 1 PCS
1CH 4-20/4-20
XT3035D1400E0
207
XT3035D1400E0
208
XT3035D1400E0
209
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 6 of 11
BOM XT3035D1400E0001
Manufacturer


XT3035D1400E0
210
XT3035D1400E0
211
...3 50197 01 RELAY MINIATURE 10A/16A 1 POL 1 PCS
...3 50198 02 SOCKET FOR MINIATURE RELAY 1 1 PCS
POL
POL
POL
POL
XT3035D1400E0
206
...3 81294 01 VALVE CONTROLLER CARD/HAWE 1 PCS
12/24V
...3 81296 02 HOLDER f/ELECTRONIC CARD 1 PCS
EUR.SIZE
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 7 of 11
BOM XT3035D1400E0001
Manufacturer


301
..2 81484 01 JUNCTION BOX f/LAND RIG TD 1 PCS
EEXE SS COMP.
..2 80412 02 EEXE CABLE GLAND BRASS M40 EEx e, , II, BASEEFA, 3 PCS
BAS01ATEX2266X
..2 12734 03 TEFLON WASHER M40 3 PCS

..2 50512 04 EX BACKNUT BRASS M40 3 PCS
..2 80408 05 EEXE CABLE GLAND BRASS M25 EEx e, NA, II, BASEEFA, 01 ATEX 1 PCS
2266X

..2 55831 08 EEXE DRAIN NIPPLE BRASS M20 1 PCS
COMPLETE
.1 XT3035D1400E0 D11 BLANK PAGE 1 N/A
302
303
..2 53990 01 JUNCTION BOX EEXE EEx e, T6, II, DNV, 2001-OSL-ATEX- 1 PCS
200x200x150mm SS 0176
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 8 of 11
BOM XT3035D1400E0001
Manufacturer

..2 80408 02 EEXE CABLE GLAND BRASS M25 EEx e, NA, II, BASEEFA, 01 ATEX 3 PCS
2266X

..2 55831 05 EEXE DRAIN NIPPLE BRASS M20 1 PCS
COMPLETE
..2 80412 06 EEXE CABLE GLAND BRASS M40 EEx e, , II, BASEEFA, 1 PCS
BAS01ATEX2266X

304
..2 81414 01 CPU-CPM REMOTE I/O 1 PCS
..2 81415 02 BASE FOR CPM 1 PCS
..2 81416 03 PLUG FOR CPM 120 ohm 1 PCS
..2 81417 04 DIG.OUT REMOTE I/O [EEx ib], T4, IIC, PTB, PTB 99 ATEX 1 PCS
2220
..2 81418 05 DIG. INPUT 16 ch. REMOTE I/O EEx ib, T4, IIC, PTB, PTB 99 ATEX 1 PCS
2184
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 9 of 11
BOM XT3035D1400E0001
Manufacturer

2220
..2 81420 07 ANALOG OUTPUT 8 ch. REMOTE I/O [EEx ib], T4, IIC, PTB, PTB 99 ATEX 1 PCS
2207
..2 81421 08 CABLE REMOTE I/O, 1.1 m 1 PCS

..2 81422 09 PLUG FOR BUSRAIL STOP END 1 PCS
..2 81423 10 PLUG FOR BUSRAIL STOP BEGIN 1 PCS
..2 81424 11 PLUG FOR BUSRAIL STOP SUB-D 1 PCS
BEGIN
..2 81425 12 PLUG FOR BUSRAIL STOP SUB-D 1 PCS
END
..2 81426 13 TERMINAL BLUE 9 PCS
..2 81427 14 BUSRAIL REMOTE I/O 2 PCS
..2 81428 15 PROFIBUS DP REPEATER REMOTE 1 PCS
I/O
..2 80760 16 TWISTCONTR. WO/SPRING 1 PCS
RETURN 0-280 deg.
2220
..2 81418 18 DIG. INPUT 16 ch. REMOTE I/O EEx ib, T4, IIC, PTB, PTB 99 ATEX 1 PCS
2184
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 10 of 11
BOM XT3035D1400E0001
Manufacturer

..2 81497 19 ANALOG INSTR.Ex 4-20mA 1 PCS

TROPES.IP56
..2 81497 20 ANALOG INSTR.Ex 4-20mA 1 PCS
TROPES.IP56
..2 80692 21 RECEPTACLE.DRILLERS CONSOLE 1 PCS
16-12PR
.1 82009 07 CONNECTOR,FEMALE,37X16AWG 1 PCS
.1 82010 08 CONNECTOR,MALE,37X16AWG 1 PCS
.1 56533 CAB01 12X02X16 AWG ARM/SHEAT XT125 10 M
POLYRAD
.1 56533 CAB02 12X02X16 AWG ARM/SHEAT XT125 1M
POLYRAD
.1 56533 CAB03 12X02X16 AWG ARM/SHEAT XT125 1M
POLYRAD
.1 82714 13 PRESSURE SWITCH 1 PCS
.1 80678 CAB04 EXTENTION CABLE ASSEMBLY 1 PCS
A&S 60METER
.1 80673 CAB05 RECEPTACLE ASSEMBLY 1 PCS
68C,MALE INSRT A&S
.1 80676 CAB06 SERVICE LOOP AUXILARY A&S 1 PCS
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 11 of 11
BOM XT3035D1400E0001
Manufacturer

.1 80691 CAB07 DRILLERS CONSOLE CABLE#16- 1 PCS

12PR A&S
.1 51028 14 PRESSURE SWITCH EEx d, T6, IIC, SIRA, 02ATEX1087X 1 PCS
.1 81517 15 THERMOELEMENT W/ 1 PCS

TRANSMITTER
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 1 of 1
BOM XT3035D1400E0002
Manufacturer
Modelnumber POWER

.1 56534 145498620 04X12 AWG ARM/SHEAT XT125 7M

POLYRAD
POLYRAD
POLYRAD
POLYRAD
.1 80677 145499179 EXTENTION LOOP POWER,777- 1 PCS
3C,A&S
.1 80675 145499180 SERVICE LOOP POWER,3C 777.A&S 1 PCS
.1 80669 145499181 RECEPTACLE ASSEMBLY.777- 1 PCS
1C.A&S
1C.A&S
1C.A&S
.1 80679 145499184 EXTENTION CABLE ASSEMBLY A&S 1 PCS
.1 80674 145499186 RECEPTACLE ASSEMBLY 1 PCS
12C,MALE INSRT A&S
.1 80734 145499187 ELECTRIC MOTOR ABB,Exn 132M4 1 PCS
8,6KW-S1
www.nov.com
Customer Parts List
Drawing No.: T3035-D1400-E0003 Drawing Name: Remarks:
Revision: 1 ONSHORE DRILLING RIG
Item No: XT3035D1400E0003
Updated 26.01.2005 BLOCK DIAGRAM
Other Doc No:
Project:
Customer:

Pos
1 82159
0,00 CAMERA SYSTEM F/ HPS CCTV
Total weight 0,00

Document number
Page 1 of 1
BOM XT3035D1400E0201
Description LOOP DIAGRAM
Manufacturer
Modelnumber PLC CONFIGURATION

.1 56831 01 CPU 315-2DP 1 PCS

.1 53302 02 DIG. INPUT 16x24 /UTGÅTT USE 1 PCS
ITEM 146780
.1 53336 03 DIG. OUTPUT 16CH RELAY 1 PCS
.1 53336 04 DIG. OUTPUT 16CH RELAY 1 PCS
.1 55176 05 ANALOG INPUT 8 CH 1 PCS
.1 55177 06 ANALOG OUTPUT 4 CH 1 PCS
.1 53298 07 BATTERY, BACK-UP S7-300 1 PCS
3,6V/0.95Ah
.1 53298 08 BATTERY, BACK-UP S7-300 1 PCS
3,6V/0.95Ah
.1 53306 09 FRONT CONNECTOR 4 PCS
.1 53301 10 BACKPLATE, 530 MM 1 PCS
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 1 of 1
BOM XT3035D1400E0202
Manufacturer
Modelnumber DIGITAL INPUT

.1 50814 01 POTMETER REPEATER EEXI,1CH,0- EEx ia, T4, IIC, BASEEFA, 1 PCS
10V, BAS00ATEX7171X
www.nov.com
Document number
Page 1 of 1
BOM XT3035D1400E0203
Manufacturer
Modelnumber DIGITAL INPUT

.1 51260 01 IS-BARRIER F/INITIATORS (EEXI) EEx ia, NA, IIC, PTB, PTB 00 ATEX 1 PCS
2CH,RELAY 2080
2CH,RELAY 2080
2CH,RELAY 2080
www.nov.com
Customer Parts List
Revision: 2 LOOP DIAGRAM
Item No: XT3035D1400E0205 ANALOG INPUT
Updated 01.01.1900 HPT-2E-AC
Other Doc No:
Project:
Customer:

Pos
1 50815
01
TRANSM.REPEATER/POWER EEXI 1CH 4-20/4-
0,51 -U04
20
1 50815
02
TRANSM.REPEATER/POWER EEXI 1CH 4-20/4-
0,51 -U05
20
Total weight 1,01

Customer Parts List
Revision: 2 LOOP DIAGRAM
Item No: XT3035D1400E0206 ANALOG OUTPUT
Updated 08.09.2004 HPT-2E-AC
Other Doc No:
Project:
Customer:

Pos
1 81294
01
0,30 VALVE CONTROLLER CARD/HAWE 12/24V -U03
1 81296
02
0,50 HOLDER f/ELECTRONIC CARD EUR.SIZE -U03.1
Total weight 0,80

Document number
Page 1 of 1
BOM XT3035D1400E0211
Manufacturer
Modelnumber INTERFACE PREMISSIVE SIGNALS

.1 50197 01 RELAY MINIATURE 10A/16A 1 POL 1 PCS

.1 50198 02 SOCKET FOR MINIATURE RELAY 1 1 PCS
POL
POL
POL
POL
www.nov.com

T3035 Complete User Manual Rev.1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

T3035 Complete User Manual Rev.1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

T3035 Complete User Manual Rev.1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Manual

Portable Top Drive

RIG/PLANT REFERENCE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION

CLIENT DOCUMENT NUMBER DOCUMENT NUMBER REV

7. SAFETY AND SERVICE BULLETINS

8. SPARE PARTS LIST

10. DRAWINGS AND PARTS LISTS

1.1 Portable Top Drive

Typical Top Drive in Test Stand

1.2 Structure and Contents of Manual

The manual is based on Norwegian Standard NS 5820: Supplier's Documentation

1.3 Contacts for Assistance

National Oilwell Norway AS

Switchboard phone: +47 381 92000

Chapter 2: Main Data

2 MAIN DATA ...................................................................................................................... 3

Chapter 2: Main Data

2.1 Safety Summary

2.2 Main Data

Equipment: National Oilwell TM Portable Top Drive

Client: Upetrom Group Management SRL

Supplier’s project no.: T3035

Type of elevator links supplied: 350 tons, 108”

Recommended type of hydr. oil: Texaco Rando HDZ

Gearbox oil type: Texaco Synlube CLP 150

Further data: See the Product Data Sheet in chapter 9.

Chapter 2: Main Data

2.2.1 Alarm and Setpoint Schedule

Description Setpoints Increasing Switch Comments

Gearbox oil temp. high 90 ºC Increasing TT011 Alarm only

HPU temp. high 65 °C Increasing TT013 Alarm only

HPU level low Low level Decreasing LS012 Alarm only

Link tilt pressure 10 barg Increasing PS006 Inhibit pipehandler rotation

LS pressure settings in Various Increasing H01 See hydraulic flow

Counter balance valves in Various Increasing H01 Provide intended functions

Chapter 2: Main Data

2.2.2 Unit Conversions

barg = psig x 0.06895

bara = bar (absolute)

2.3 External Connections

The equipment is externally hooked up as follows:

Electrical connections: See the instrument block diagram.

Chapter 2: Main Data

2.4 Restrictions in Use

2.5 Restrictions in Guarantee

National Oilwell Norway AS refuse all responsibility caused by breach of the

Chapter 2: Main Data

Chapter 3: Technical Description

3 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................ 3

Chapter 3: Technical Description

The HPT package is optimized in respect of

Key benefits of the HPT are:

• 16.2 ft stack-up height

Chapter 3: Technical Description

3.2 Overview of Main & Sub Assemblies

A standard HPT system consists of following main & sub assemblies:

Drive System (Motor and Gearbox with accessories), including:

Control System, including:

• Control Station incl. AC Drive and PLC

• Torque Tube System